JP6518732B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  There is a gaming machine which performs advance notice effects in relation to the result corresponding to the start memory prior to the start timing of the special view variation display game based on the start memory. As one form of such advance notice effect, there is a hold notice effect for changing the display mode of the hold storage display in relation to the result corresponding to the start memory. In addition, there is a gaming machine which attracts the attention of the player to the feature operation in the progress of the game and enhances the interest.

JP 2012-45311 A JP, 2006-296836, A

  However, since the on-hold notice effect is performed at the winning opportunity to the starting winning opening and the on-hold shift opportunity at the start of the change, and the product operation is performed as the predetermined effect in the variable display game, Have difficulty. In addition, by attracting the player's attention to the feature operation during the progress of the game, the player's attention to the on-hold notice effect may be distracted.

  In one aspect, the present invention aims to provide a gaming machine capable of raising the player's interest in holding notice effects while attracting the player's attention to the feature operation during the game progress. .

  In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine as shown below is provided. The gaming machine stores the starting memory as the right to execute the first game, changes the display mode of the holding display according to the starting memory in relation to the result of the first game corresponding to the starting memory, It is feasible and includes a first display unit, a second display unit, a third display unit, a fourth display unit, a movable unit, an operation unit, and a control unit. The first display unit can display the first game. The second display unit can display a hold display. The third display unit can display a second game executed in parallel with the first game. The fourth display unit can display a predetermined display. The movable portion is operable in a predetermined operation mode. The operation unit can accept an operation. The control unit causes the first display unit to display a guidance display for guiding the operation of the operation unit when the third display unit displays a specific result mode in the second game, and is movable when the operation is accepted at the operation unit The unit is changed from the first state to the second state and the predetermined display is displayed on the fourth display unit, and the correspondence between the display mode of the predetermined display on the fourth display unit and the display mode of the hold display on the second display unit is It is possible to execute an on-hold notice effect that displays the correspondence notification display to be notified on the first display unit and changes the display mode of the on-hold display in the second display unit.

  According to one aspect, in the gaming machine, it is possible to raise the player's interest in the on-hold notice effect while attracting the player's attention to the feature operation during the progress of the game.

1 is a perspective view showing an example of a gaming machine of a first embodiment. It is a front view which shows an example of the game board of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an example of a control system of a game machine of a 1st embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows an example of a structure of the presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the package display apparatus of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of main processing according to the first embodiment. FIG. 12 is a second diagram showing a flowchart of main processing according to the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of timer interrupt processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of payment command transmission processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of structure of a number-of-wins counter area of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a winning opening switch / state monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the starting opening switch monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the hard random number acquisition process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure starting opening 1 switch process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure starting opening 2 switch process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure reservation information determination processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 game processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 2 game processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 usual process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 2 usual process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flow chart of the special figure 1 change start processing of a 1st embodiment. It is FIG. (2) which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 fluctuation | variation start process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flowchart of the special figure 2 change start process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the flowchart of the special figure 2 change start process of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of a variation start information setting process of the first embodiment; FIG. 13 is a second diagram showing a flowchart of fluctuation start information setting processing according to the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the high probability change frequency update process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flow chart of processing during special figure 1 change of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the flow chart of processing during special figure 1 change of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flow chart of processing during special figure 2 fluctuation of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the flow chart of processing during special figure 2 fluctuation of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of processing transfer setting processing 1 during special figure 1 display of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of processing transfer setting processing 1 during special figure 2 display of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of processing transfer setting processing 2 during a special figure 1 display of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of processing transfer setting processing 2 during a special figure 2 display of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) showing the flow chart of processing under special figure 1 display of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) showing the flow chart of processing under special figure 1 display of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure (the 3) showing the flow chart of processing under special figure 1 display of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) showing the flow chart of processing under special figure 2 display of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) showing the flow chart of processing under special figure 2 display of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure (the 3) which shows the flow chart of processing under special figure 2 display of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram (part 1) showing a flowchart of the external information editing process of the first embodiment; FIG. 13 is a second diagram showing the flowchart of the external information editing process of the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the main process in the presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the reception command check process in the presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the reception command analysis process in the presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view which shows an example of the game board of the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sub display apparatus of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the display apparatus of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure (1) which shows an example of the production | presentation aspect in the game machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows an example of the production | presentation aspect in the game machine of 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 26 is a third diagram showing an example of an effect mode in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the flame | frame of 2nd Embodiment, a count result, and the relationship of an expectation. It is a timing chart which shows an example of execution timing of count production in the 2nd embodiment, convective line production, and big hit information production. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the presentation mode determination processing at the time of count presentation execution of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the attitude | position state of the sub display apparatus of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) showing an example of the display screen in the display of a 3rd embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) showing an example of the display screen in the display of a 3rd embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol variation by symbol switching in the sub display apparatus of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol variation by the horizontal scroll in the sub display apparatus of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the display production determination processing in the production control apparatus of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of arrangement | positioning of push button LED in the push button of 3rd Embodiment, and a touch sensor. It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship between push-button operation of 3rd Embodiment, and the attitude | position change state of a sub display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the attitude | position change state of the sub display apparatus of the modification 1 of 3rd Embodiment, and a fluctuation display. It is a figure which shows an example of the attitude | position change state of the sub display apparatus of the modification 2 of 3rd Embodiment, and a fluctuation display. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation display in the sub display apparatus of the modification 3 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure (1) which shows an example of the change display in the sub display of modification 4 of a 3rd embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) showing an example of the fluctuation display in the sub display of modification 4 of a 3rd embodiment. FIG. 15 shows an example of a gaming state transition diagram and a probability fluctuation state of the fourth embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) showing an example of the display screen in the display of a 4th embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) showing an example of the display screen in the display of a 4th embodiment. It is FIG. (3) which shows an example of the display screen in the display apparatus of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the big symbol display aspect classified by conditions at the time of the small hit of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hitting symbol determination process in the presentation control apparatus of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of pending | holding memory and small hit design of 4th Embodiment. It is a front view showing an example of a game board of a 5th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sub display apparatus of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the presentation start memory display of 5th Embodiment, and its display mode. It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of the effect lamp of 5th Embodiment, and a display mode. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation | movement aspect of the board production apparatus of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the pattern of the presentation game which the sub display apparatus of 5th Embodiment performs. It is a figure which shows an example of the reach derivation display in the sub display apparatus of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) showing an example of the reach production display in the sub display of a 5th embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) showing an example of the reach production display in the sub display of a 5th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the rocking display in the sub display apparatus of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of 3 symbol temporary stop derivation | leading-out display in the sub display apparatus of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the production start memory count increase process in the production control apparatus of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the presentation game execution opportunity determination processing in the presentation control apparatus of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the presentation game pattern setting process in the presentation control apparatus of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the presentation game skip process in the presentation control apparatus of 5th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows a flow of processing in case an effect control device of a 5th embodiment plays an effect game with pattern 1. It is a timing chart which shows a flow of processing in case an effect control device of a 5th embodiment plays an effect game with a pattern 2. It is a timing chart which shows a flow of processing in case an effect control device of a 5th embodiment plays an effect game with a pattern 3. It is a timing chart which shows a flow of processing in case an effect control device of a 5th embodiment plays an effect game by pattern 4. It is a timing chart which shows a flow of processing in case an effect control device of a 5th embodiment plays an effect game by pattern 5. It is a figure which shows an example of the music selection display in the sub display apparatus of the modification 1 of 5th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows a flow of processing in case an effect control device of modification 1 of a 5th embodiment performs an effect game with a pattern 1. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the production game execution opportunity determination processing in the production control apparatus of the modification 2 of 5th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows a flow of processing in case a production control device of modification 3 of a 5th embodiment performs a production game in multiple times in a special figure change display game. It is a timing chart which shows a flow of processing in case a production control device of modification 4 of a 5th embodiment performs a production game over a plurality of special figure change display games. It is a timing chart which shows a flow of processing in case a production control device of modification 5 of a 5th embodiment performs a production game over a plurality of special figure change display games. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen in the display apparatus of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the presentation game in the sub display apparatus of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) showing an example of operation guidance of a push button using a display of a 6th embodiment, a sub display, and an effect lamp. It is a figure (the 2) showing an example of operation guidance of a push button using a display of a 6th embodiment, a sub display, and an effect lamp. It is a figure (the 1) showing an example of a reservation notice effect with change of a display mode of a reservation display or a reservation display of a 6th embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) showing an example of a reservation notice effect with change of a display mode of a reservation display or a reservation display of a 6th embodiment. It is a figure (the 3) showing an example of a reservation notice effect with change of a display mode of a reservation display or a reservation display of a 6th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship of the display mode and the degree of anticipation in the reservation notice production of a 6th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of a pending | holding notice production | presentation with a change of the display mode of a pending | hold display or a pending | holding digestion display of the modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart of the pending | holding advance announcement production of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the expectation degree alerting | reporting of the modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a pending | holding change aspect determination process in the presentation control apparatus of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the presentation game setting process in the presentation control apparatus of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the operation guidance setting process in the presentation control apparatus of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the corresponding | compatible guidance setting process in the presentation control apparatus of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen in the display apparatus of the modification 1 of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart of the pending | reporting preliminary production effect of the modification 2 of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the production | presentation aspect in the prior notice of the pending | holding notice production | presentation of the modification 2 of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of a pending | holding notice production | presentation with a change of the display mode of the pending | hold display of a modification 3 of 6th Embodiment, or a pending | save digestion display. It is a figure (the 1) showing an example of a reservation notice preparation with change of a display mode of a reservation display or a reservation display of a modification 4 of a 6th embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) showing an example of a reservation notice effect with change of a display mode of a reservation display or a reservation display of a modification 4 of a 6th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of a pending | holding notice production | presentation with a change of the display mode of the pending | hold display of a modification 5 of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship between the production | presentation lamp of the modification 6 of 6th Embodiment, a corresponding | compatible display, and a pending | holding display. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect lamp of the modification 7 of 6th Embodiment, a corresponding | compatible display, and a relationship of a pending | holding display.

Hereinafter, embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
First Embodiment
First, a first embodiment will be described based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing an example of a gaming machine according to the first embodiment.

  The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be capable of opening and closing. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a housing portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame (transparent plate holding frame) 15 provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

  In addition, on the left and right of the glass frame 15, lamps, LEDs, etc. are internally incorporated to display decoration or effects, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a delivery abnormality occurs, an alarm notification color (for example, A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (flashing) (red) and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits a sound (for example, a sound effect) are provided. Furthermore, a speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is also provided at the lower part of the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormal contents are notified by voice from the speakers 19a and 19b. Note that a lamp for notifying a dispensing abnormality may be provided on a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

  In the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate (storage tray) 21 for supplying gaming balls to a bat firing device (not shown) and gaming balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 There is provided an upper flat ball outlet 22 which flows out, a lower tray (a tray) 23 for storing gaming balls dispensed in a state in which the upper tray 21 is full, and an operation unit 24 of a hitting launch device. Further, at the upper edge of the upper tray 21, an option setting unit 25 is provided for the player to set various options. A plurality of selection button switches 25 a are provided around the upper surface of the option setting unit 25, and a decision button switch 25 b is provided at the center of the upper surface of the option setting unit 25. The option setting unit 25 functions as an effect setting unit for the player to set the effect mode. In this case, the selection button switch 25a functions as an effect button switch for selecting an effect mode, and the determination button switch 25b functions as an determination button switch for determining an effect mode. Further, on the lower right side of the front frame 12, a key hole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.

  When the selection button switch 25a functions as a production button switch, the gaming machine 10 performs an operation in which the player's operation is performed based on the player's operation received from the selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b. You can do For example, the effect of the player's operation being intervened is the effect in the variable display game (decorative special view variable display game) on the display device (variable display device) 41 (see FIG. 2), and the gaming machine 10 is a display device The character to be displayed on the screen 41 can be moved, or the identification information in the decorative feature variation display game displayed on the display device 41 can be stopped.

  Further, to the right of the option setting unit 25, the player operates the ball lending button 27, which is operated when the ball lending is received from the adjacent ball lending machine, and to discharge the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A discharge button 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the ball striking device is supplied with the game balls from the upper plate 21 in the game area 32 on the front of the game board 30. Launch towards (see Figure 2). Also, by operating the selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b, for example, the volume radiated from the speakers 19a and 19b can be set, and the brightness of the game board 30 can be set, for example. .

Next, the gaming board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the first embodiment.
A substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed on the surface of the game board 30. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at four corners of the game board 30, respectively. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect structure) 40 provided with a display device (variable display device) 41 substantially at the center is arranged. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 encloses the periphery of the display area of the display device 41, protrudes forward beyond the display surface of the display device 41, and is formed so that it is difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

  The display device 41 is configured of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube). In the area (display area) where an image of the display screen can be displayed, information related to the game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbol), a character producing a special view variation display game, a background image enhancing a rendering effect, etc. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variable display), and a decorative special view variation display game corresponding to the special view variation display game is performed. Further, on the display screen, an image (for example, a big hit display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) for an effect based on the progress of the game is displayed.

  Further, on the upper portion of the center case 40, there is provided a board effect device 44 that effects the game by operating. The panel rendering device 44 is operable toward the center of the display device 41 from the state shown in FIG.

  On the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (common view start gate) 34 is provided which gives a start condition of the common view variation display game. The game ball (the game ball passing through the common drawing start gate 34) winning the common drawing start gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).

  Also, two general winning openings 35 are disposed on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, and one general on the lower right side of the center case 40 and the right portion of the special variation winning device 38 described later. The winning opening 35 is arranged. The game ball that has won the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

  Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a start winning opening 36 forming a first start winning opening (start winning area) for giving a start condition of the first special view variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) (Starting opening 1) is provided. The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

  In addition, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (the special drawing fluctuation display game (special drawing fluctuation display game) starting condition is provided on the right side of the center case 40 at a position lower than the common drawing start gate 34 A first start winning opening, a start winning area) is provided. The normal fluctuation winning device 37 (starting opening 1) is provided with a movable member 37b which can be opened to allow the game ball to easily flow in by opening in the direction in which the upper end side falls to the right, and this movable member The numeral 37b is normally almost vertical and holds a closed closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) to which the game ball can not flow. Then, when the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the upper end side is turned so that the upper end side falls to the right by the common electric solenoid 37c (refer to FIG. 3) as a driving device The game ball can easily change into an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which the game ball easily flows into the winning device 37. The game ball that has won the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). In addition, it is possible to be able to win even when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the closed state, and in the closed state, it may be harder to win than in the open state. The normal fluctuation winning device 37 corresponds to an ordinary motor vehicle (Puden).

  On the right side of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, there is formed a flow-off path 91 through which gaming balls can flow. A start-up winning opening 92 is provided at a lower portion of the flow-down passage 91, and a guiding portion 93 is provided below the flow-off passage 91. The upper surface 94 of the guiding portion 93 is inclined to the left, and the upper surface 94 receives game balls flowing downward without winning in the start winning hole 92, and the left is a special fluctuation winning device 38 described later. It is designed to guide you.

  The start winning opening 92 is a second starting winning opening (starting winning area) for giving the start condition of the second special view variation display game (special view 2 variation display game). The winning game ball is detected by the starting opening 2 switch 92a (see FIG. 3).

  Also, below the start winning opening 36 in the game area 32, a special variation winning device (lower prize winning opening, big winnings that can be converted into a non-accepting state and an easy-to-accepting state according to the result of the special view fluctuation display game). A mouth 1) 95 is provided. The special variation winning device 95 has an opening and closing member 95c, and the closing member 95c closes the big winning opening as a result of the special view variation display game as an auxiliary game. The open / close member 95 c converts the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area 32 into an open state (a state advantageous to the player) that can be received. That is, the special variation winning device 95 is provided with a large winning opening (lower large winning opening, large winning opening 1) opened and closed by the opening and closing member 95c driven by the large winning opening 1 solenoid 95b (see FIG. 3) as a drive device. During the small hit gaming state (second special gaming state) according to the result of the special view 1 variation display game, the flow of gaming balls into the big winning opening by converting the large winning opening from the closed state to the opened state. It is made easy, and a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. In the inside of the special winning opening (winning area), a special winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3) is disposed as a detecting means for detecting the gaming ball having entered the special winning opening. .

  In the lower right of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a special fluctuation winning device (upper prize winning opening, big prize winning) which can be converted into a state where the game ball is not accepted or a state easy to accept Mouth 2) 38 is provided. The special variation winning device 38 has an opening / closing member (opening / closing door) 38c, and the opening / closing member 38c is closed as a result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. In the closed state, the opening / closing member 38 c retracts to convert the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area 32 into an open state (a state advantageous to the player) which can be received. That is, the special variation winning device 38 has a special winning opening (upper large winning opening, large winning opening 2) opened and closed by the opening / closing member 38c driven by the large winning opening 2 solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a drive device. Small hit game state (second special game state) during the big hit game state (first special game state) by the result of the special view 1 change display game and the special view 2 change display game or the result of the special view 2 change display game In the middle, it is made to facilitate the flow of gaming balls into the big winning opening by converting the big winning opening from the closed state to the open state, and gives the player a predetermined gaming value (prize ball) ing. In the inside of the special winning opening (winning area), a special winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3) is disposed as a detecting means for detecting the gaming ball having entered the special winning opening. .

  When there are a plurality of large winning opening switches as in the present embodiment, one or two large winning opening switches 38a are provided as a whole (see FIG. 3). In the case of the first embodiment, the special variation winning device 95 forming the first special variation winning device (lower large winning opening, large winning opening 1) is provided with only one large winning opening switch 38a. On the other hand, the special variation winning device 38 forming the second special variation winning device (upper large winning opening, large winning opening 2) is provided with a plurality of (two for example) large winning opening switches 38a. The special variation winning device 95 is, for example, a winning device (so-called mini-attacker) whose large winning opening is smaller than the special variation winning device 38.

  Further, on the left side of the center case 40, a warp port (warp inlet) 39a is provided. The gaming balls having flowed into the warp flow path from the warp port 39a roll on the stage in the center case 40, and a portion thereof is guided to the warp outlet 39b. The warp exit 39 b is located immediately above the start winning opening 36, and the gaming ball guided to the warp exit 39 b is likely to win the start winning opening 36.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the gaming area 32 where the gaming balls flow down, the area on the left of the center case 40 is the left gaming area, and the area on the right of the center case 40 is the right gaming area It is assumed. Then, the player adjusts the launch force and shoots the game ball to the left side game area (so-called left strike), whereby the start winning hole 36, the special fluctuation winning device 95, the general winning hole 35 (the right of the special fluctuation winning device 38 The game can be aimed at winning a prize in the club (except for the general winning opening 35), and the game ball is fired to the right-hand game area (so-called right-handed) by the common drawing start gate 34 or the normal fluctuation winning device 37, special fluctuation winning It is possible to aim for winning in the device 38 and the like.

  In addition, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, in the lower right part of the game board 30), the first special view change display game or the second special view change display game and the common view start gate 34 that make up the special view change display game are A collective display device 50 is provided which displays a common drawing variation display game triggered by winning and various information.

  The collective display unit 50 includes a round display unit 51 configured of an LED or the like, a special view 1 suspension display unit 52, a special view 1 symbol display unit 53, a special view 2 symbol display unit 54, and a common pattern symbol display unit 55, the common view holding display unit 56, and the state display unit 57 (see FIG. 5). Details of the collective display device 50 will be described later.

Next, a control system of the gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of a control system of the gaming machine of the first embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 is provided with a gaming control apparatus 100, and the gaming control apparatus 100 is a main control apparatus (main board) that controls the game in an integrated manner, and is a gaming microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer) 111. Between a central processing unit (CPU) unit 110 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., and the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. It consists of data bus 140 grade.

  The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer 111 called an amusement chip (IC (Integrated Circuit)) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and the operation clock and timer interrupts of the gaming microcomputer 111 and the reference of the random number generation circuit. And an oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 for generating a clock. The game control apparatus 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control apparatus 100 are supplied with DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC (Direct Current) 32 V, DC 12 V, DC 5 V generated by the power supply device 400. Enabled.

  The power supply device 400 generates an AC (Alternating Current) -DC converter that generates the DC voltage of 32 V from an AC power supply of 24 V, a DC-DC converter that generates lower DC voltage such as 12 V DC or 5 V DC from a voltage of 32 V DC And a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to the RAM (Random Access Memory) in the gaming microcomputer 111 at the time of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit. And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal for notifying generation and recovery.

  In the first embodiment, the power supply 400 is configured separately from the game control apparatus 100, but the backup power supply 420 and the control signal generator 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control 100, ie, , And may be provided on the main substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control apparatus 100 are subject to replacement at the time of model change, as in the first embodiment, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal are provided on a substrate different from the power supply 400 or the main substrate. By providing the generation unit 430, it is possible to remove the target from replacement and to reduce the cost.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the gaming microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the gaming control apparatus 100, and data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or even after the power is shut off. Control signal generation unit 430 monitors, for example, the voltage of 32 V generated by normal power supply unit 410 and detects the occurrence of a power failure when it falls below 17 V, for example, to change the power failure monitoring signal and reset signal after a predetermined time. Output Also, at the time of power on or recovery from a power failure, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

  In addition, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal and causes the entire control system to be reset.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read only memory (ROM) 111B, and a random access memory (RAM) 111C.

  The ROM 111B stores unchanged information (program, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a non-volatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a working area of the CPU 111A or a storage area of various signals and random values during game control. It is used as An electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as an EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable ROM) may be used as the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C.

  In addition, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special view variation display game, the contents of the effect, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine a variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random number 1, the variation pattern random number 2 and the variation pattern random number 3 stored as the start storage. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a falling fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a falling, a big hit fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Further, in these pattern tables, tables for determining a second half fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), fluctuation before reaching the reach state A table (a first half fluctuation group table, a first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining a first half fluctuation pattern which is a pattern is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device capable of changing the display state, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. In the special outcome mode, in the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state is a gaming state advantageous to the player (special gaming state), at a stage where a part of the plurality of display results is not yet derived and displayed, This refers to a display state in which the display result derived and displayed satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In addition, the reach state is deviated from the display condition which is the special result mode even when reaching the stage before the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. Then, for example, the reach state includes a state (so-called all-rotation reach) in which variable display is performed by a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state in which the special result mode is uniform. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when display control of the display device progresses to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition to be the special result mode.

  Therefore, for example, the decorative special view fluctuation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special view fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle and right fluctuation display areas in the display device. When displaying the result mode by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle and displaying the result mode, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state where the variable display is stopped by the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the fluctuation display areas of left, middle and right (for example, the same The state in which the identification information is obtained (except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  And, this reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result aspect is different (expected values are different) as reach effects such as normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and Premier reach are set. Expected values are set to increase in the following order: "no reach" <"normal reach" <"special 1 reach" <"special 2 reach" <"special 3 reach" <"premier reach". Further, this reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special view variable display game (when it is a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special view variable display game (when it is out of alignment). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is a state in which the possibility of a big hit is higher than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generate and output drive signals for the solenoid and the display device. Control the whole. Also, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a big hit random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (various A variation pattern random number for determining the variation display game execution time etc. in reach display or non-reach variation display, and a random number generation circuit for generating a collision random number etc for determining hit of the common drawing variation display game And a clock generator for generating a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec (ms)) to the CPU 111A based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock giving update timing of the random number generation circuit. Have.

  Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one fluctuation pattern table from among a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the processing related to the special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A is a game result (big hit or small hit or break) of the special figure fluctuation display game, and a probability state (normal probability state or high probability) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current gaming state Condition), the operation condition (time saving operation condition) of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 as the current gaming condition, the number of starting memories, etc., any one fluctuation pattern table is selected from a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables Get. Here, the CPU 111A serves as a variation distribution information acquisition unit that acquires one variation pattern table among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and a payout motor of a payout unit provided to the gaming machine 10 according to a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100. Controls to drive out and pay out the winning balls. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit of the ball lending machine attached to the gaming machine 10, and performs control for dispensing the ball. .

  In the input section 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111, the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, the starting opening 1 switch 37a in the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the starting opening 2 switch 92a in the starting winning opening 92, Connected to the gate switch 34a in the start gate 34, the winning opening switch 35a, the special variation winning device 38 and the special winning opening switch 38a of the special variation winning device 95, the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is 7V An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided which receives a negative logic signal like this and converts it to a 0V-5V positive logic signal. The proximity I / F 121 also receives a detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine 10. In addition, the proximity I / F 121 has an input range of 7 V-11 V, so the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is incorrectly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is disconnected. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as floating and to output an abnormality detection signal.

  The winning opening switch 35a will be described. Although the winning opening switch 35a is shown in one block in FIG. 3, a plurality of (N) winning opening switches 35a (three in the present embodiment) are actually included. Is provided on the game board 30, and the respective signals are input to the proximity I / F 121 through different signal lines. In addition, although the special winning opening switch 38a is shown in one block in FIG. 3, a plurality (X pieces) of special winning opening switches 38a (three in this embodiment) are actually provided on the game board 30. It is done. Then, the plurality of big winning opening switches 38a are respectively connected by different signal lines, or, for example, wired OR (not shown) on a relay substrate (not shown) existing between the switches and the game control device 100 (main substrate). It is connected to the game control apparatus 100 by a method called wired OR). The board radio wave sensor 62 and the magnetic sensor 61 described later may also be connected by a plurality of different signal lines, and may also be connected to the game control apparatus 100 by a method called wired OR.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Note that among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, detection signals of the start opening 1 switches 36a and 37a, the start opening 2 switch 92a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 38a are the second input port 123 Input to In addition, about the output (output from proximity I / F 121) of the signal of starting opening 1 switch 36a, 37a which is the starting opening switch of the special figure 1 is shown by one signal line in FIG. There are two.

  Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, a detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 and an abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected is input to the third input port 124. Further, the third input port 124 is a detection signal of the magnetic sensor 61 for detecting fraud which is provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like, and a frame radio wave fraud signal from the payout control device 200 (provided on the front frame 12 A signal output based on detection of a radio wave by the frame radio wave sensor) and a payout busy signal (a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept a command) are also input. A vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and a detection signal of the vibration sensor switch may be input to the third input port 124.

  Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the game control apparatus 100 to the non-illustrated test shot test apparatus via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, detection signals of the start opening 1 switches 36a and 37a and the start opening 2 switch 92a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. There is.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage such as 5 V necessary for the operation of a normal IC from the power supply device 400. It has become.

  The data held by the second input port 123 asserts an enable signal CE (Chip Enable) (not shown) to a valid level by decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 by the gaming microcomputer 111. Change) can be read out. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

  Further, in the input unit 120, a detection signal of the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10, a main frame opening detection provided on the front frame (body frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10, etc. Detection signal of switch 64, payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating payout abnormality), chute ball out switch signal (signal indicating lack of gaming ball before payout), overflow switch signal (lower tray 23 has gaming ball at a predetermined amount) A signal output when the above storage (full) is detected), a touch switch signal (a signal based on an input of a touch switch provided on the operation unit 24) is taken, and the data bus 140 A first input port 122 is provided to supply the gaming microcomputer 111 via the interface.

  In addition, the game control device 100 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like. It has a function to remove noise from the signal. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are temporarily input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise is removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and supplied to each port of the output unit 130. In addition, the reset signal RESET is directly output to the relay substrate 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test emission test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay substrate 70 for output to the test emission test device. It is configured to In addition, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be able to be output to the direct shot testing device via the relay substrate 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to the first to third ports 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset to prevent the malfunction of the system. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from each port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed in a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is set as one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal from the side of the effect control device 300 to the game control device 100.

  Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying special design symbol information of the variable display game to a test shot test device of a notable authorized organization not shown via a relay board 70 An output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control apparatus (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as a real machine (mass-produced article for sale) installed in a game arcade. A detection signal of a switch that does not require processing, such as a starting opening switch, output from the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the test shot test apparatus via the relay substrate 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals that can not be supplied as they are to the test shooting test device as they are, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the board radio wave sensor 62, are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. The error signal indicating that control can not be performed is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial shot test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay substrate 70. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test shot test device, and a connector that relays and transmits a signal line of a detection signal of a switch that does not pass through the buffer. ing. A chip enable signal CE (not shown) output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay substrate 70, and a signal of the port selected and controlled by the chip enable signal CE is supplied to the test shooting test apparatus It is supposed to be.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, a special winning opening 1 solenoid 95b for opening and closing the opening and closing member 95c of the special variation winning device 95 (the first winning opening 1) And a second output port 134 for outputting open / close data of a common current solenoid 37c for opening / closing the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37. The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of FIG.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as the big hit information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collecting terminal or a game arcade internal management device (hall computer) etc.) installed in the game arcade. Can be supplied to an external device via a photorelay. Note that part of the information supplied to the external device is output from the fourth output port 136. The fifth output port 137 also outputs a release permission signal to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Furthermore, the output unit 130 receives open / close data signals of the special winning opening 1 solenoid 95b, the special winning opening 2 solenoid 38b, and the common solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid driving signal. The first driver (drive circuit) 138a, the second driver 138b for outputting the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and the output from the fourth output port 136 Information to be supplied from the third driver 138c for outputting the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the current lead-in side of the batch display device 50, the fifth output port 137 or the fourth output port 136 to an external device such as a management device A fourth driver 138 d for outputting a signal to the external information terminal board 71 is provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC 32 V as a power supply voltage from the power supply device 400 in order to drive a solenoid operating at 32 V. Further, DC 12 V is supplied to the second driver 138 b that drives the segment lines of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line according to the display data, the power supply voltage may be 12 V or 5 V.

  A dynamic drive system is achieved by flowing a current into the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12 V and extracting the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in step S1 and is turned on. The fourth driver 138 d for outputting the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with 12 V DC to give a level of 12 V to the external information signal. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the relay board 70 side, not on the output section 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 490. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be communicable with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can exchange data with the inspection device 490 by serial communication. Since such data transmission and reception are performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the first to third input ports 122, 123, 124 Not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the effect control device of the first embodiment.
The effect control device 300 is for displaying an image on the display device 41 in accordance with a command and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 which comprises an amusement chip (IC) like the game microcomputer 111 and the main control microcomputer 311. A video display processor (VDP) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sound to reproduce various melodies, sound effects and the like from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  The main control microcomputer 311 can be a PROM 321 consisting of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 for providing a work area, and holding stored contents even when power is not supplied at the time of a power failure. An FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM) 323 and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 338 serving as a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (date, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM 311 a for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes a command (rendering command) from the gaming microcomputer 111, determines the content of the effect, instructs the VDP 312 the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to play the sound, and the decoration lamp Processing such as lighting, motor drive control of a motor or a solenoid, management of presentation time, etc.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area, and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. In addition, the VDP 312 is connected to an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM 326 used to expand and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. It is done.

  Although not particularly limited, transmission / reception of data is performed between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the serial case.

  A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the decoration lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30 to the microcomputer for main control 311 from the VDP 312, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. The VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT or the like is also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the Low Voltage Differential Signaling (LVDS) method. Video data, horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is transmitted to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  An audio ROM 327 storing audio data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The voiced sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The decoration control command signal (rendering command (rendering command, etc.) is transmitted via the command I / F 331 to the decoration special drawing reservation number command, decoration special drawing command, variation command, stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. Receive as). Since the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 operates at DC 5 V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with the function of converting the signal level There is.

  Further, in the effect control device 300, a panel decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling a panel decoration device 46 having an LED (a light emitting diode) or the like provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40), a glass frame 15 A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 etc.) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the board, a board provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40) A panel effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided to drive and control the effect device 44 (for example, movable objects that cooperate with the effect display on the display device 41 to enhance the effect effect, etc.). These control circuits 332 to 334 for driving and controlling the lamp, the motor, the solenoid and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. Even if a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect) is provided on the glass frame 15 and a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling this frame effect device is provided. Good.

  Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, the effect button switch 25a and the decision button switch 25b of the option setting unit 25 provided on the glass frame 15, and the effect role switch for detecting the initial position of the motor in the panel effect device 44, etc. 47 (the function of detecting the on / off state of the effect motor switch) and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and detecting the state of the volume adjustment switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 for main control A switch input circuit 336 having a function of inputting a detection signal to the microcomputer 311 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC32V of DC, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motor and LED, DC5V used as power supply voltage of command I / F 331, generates voltage of DC15V for driving motor, LED and speaker It is configured to Furthermore, when using an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V as the main control microcomputer 311, DC − for generating 3.3 V DC or 1.2 V DC based on 5 V DC. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in a reset state. Also, it is supplied from the main control microcomputer 311 to the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314 and the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal), and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling lamps and motors. And reset them. Further, a cooling fan 45 for cooling each part of the game machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling fan 45 is driven in a state where the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on. Further, the circuit board that constitutes the effect control device 300 corresponds to a sub control board (also referred to as a sub board).

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described.
The CPU 111A of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control apparatus 100 extracts the random determination value for hit determination of the common drawing based on the input of the detection signal of the gaming ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the common drawing start gate 34 The game is compared with the judgment value stored in the table to determine the hit-off of the common-pattern variation display game. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined period of time on the regular symbol display portion 55 of the batch display device 50, processing is performed to display a general view variation display game to be stopped and displayed. If the result of this common view variation display game is a hit, while displaying the special result aspect corresponding to each of the first stop symbol to the third hit stop symbol on the common symbol symbol display section 55, the common current solenoid 37c Is controlled to open the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control device 100 functions as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). When the result of the common drawing variation display game is a release, control is performed to display a result mode of the deviation on the common drawing symbol display unit 55.

  Also, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36 and the starting opening 1 switch 37a provided in the normal variation winning device 37, the starting winning combination (starting memory) is stored Based on the starting memory, a process for determining the hit of the first special figure fluctuation display game by extracting the big hit judgment random number value of the first special figure fluctuation display game and comparing it with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B. Do. In addition, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 2 switch 92a provided in the starting winning opening 92 stores the starting memory, based on the starting memory, the second special view fluctuation display for big hit judgment disturbance A numerical value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B to determine the hit of the second special figure variation display game.

  Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs control signals (rendering control command, rendition command) including the determination results of the first special view variation display game and the second special view variation display game to the presentation control device 300. Do. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 or the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 of the collective display device 50, processing for displaying the special view variation display game Do. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variation display game based on the winnings in the starting winning area (starting winning opening 36, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the starting winning opening 92) of the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area 32. Make a game control means.

  Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 performs a process of displaying a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the setting of the effect state, the output of the sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, and the process of controlling the light emission of various LEDs are performed. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as effect control means for controlling an effect on a game (a variable display game or the like).

  And, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 has a special result aspect or a small hit result aspect in the special figure 1 symbol display portion 53 or the special figure 2 symbol display portion 54. While displaying the special game state and the small hit game state (that is, the process of executing the special game and the small hit game). In the processing for generating the special gaming state due to the result of the first special view fluctuation display game and the second special view fluctuation display game becoming a big hit, the CPU 111A, for example, the special fluctuation winning device by the special winning opening 2 solenoid 38b Control is performed to open the opening and closing member 38 c and to allow the game ball to flow into the big winning opening 2. In this special game state, the CPU 111A, for example, either a predetermined number (for example, nine) of game balls win in the special winning opening 2, or a predetermined openable time elapses from the opening of the special winning opening 2. One round is to open the large winning opening 2 until the condition is achieved, and control (cycle game) to repeat (repeat) this for a predetermined number of rounds is performed. Further, in the processing for generating a small hit gaming state due to the result of the first special view change display game (special view 1 change display game) becoming a small hit, the CPU 111A is, for example, by the special winning opening 1 solenoid 95b. Control is performed to open the opening / closing member 95 c of the special variation winning device 95 and to allow the game ball to flow into the big winning opening 1. Further, in the processing for generating a small hit gaming state due to the result of the second special view variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) becoming a small hit, the CPU 111A is, for example, by the special winning opening 2 solenoid 38b. Control is performed to open the opening / closing member 38c of the special variation winning device 38 and allow the game ball to flow into the big winning opening 2. The opening / closing operation pattern (opening / closing operation mode) of the special winning opening performed in the small hit gaming state is such that an operation of maintaining the opening / closing member in the open state is performed four times at intervals of 1500 ms, for example, for 200 ms. As described above, the game control device 100 functions as a special winning opening / closing control unit that performs control to open / close the special winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a release, the CPU 111A performs control to display the result mode of the deviation on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 or the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 of the batch display device 50.

  Further, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game, the game control apparatus 100 can generate the high probability state as the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state. The high probability state is a state in which the probability of being a hit result in the special figure fluctuation display game is higher than that of the normal probability state. Also, the first special view fluctuation display game and the second special view game, regardless of which special view fluctuation display game of the first special view fluctuation display game and the second special view fluctuation display game is a high probability state. Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

  In addition, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game, the game control apparatus 100 can generate a time saving state (specific gaming state, common figure high probability state) as a gaming state after the end of the special gaming state. In this short time state, the probability (common drawing probability) to be the hit result of the common drawing fluctuation display game is set to a high probability (general drawing high probability state) higher than 0 which is the normal probability (general drawing low probability state) Is possible. As a result, control is performed so that the opening time of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 per unit time is larger than that in the case where the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the low probability state. Here, in the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 in the present embodiment, the drawing probability is set to "0" so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal gaming state.

  Further, in the time saving state, the execution time of the common view variation display game (general view change time) is, for example, 500 ms, and the common view stop time for displaying the result of the common view change display game is, for example, 600 ms. When the game variation display game hits and results in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 being released, the opening time (the time for general electric power release) and the number of times of opening (for example, 500 ms × 1 time) of the first hit stop symbol, The opening time of the second stop symbol (general power opening time) and the number of times open (for example, 1700 ms × 2 times), the third opening time of the stop symbol (general time open time) and the number of openings (for example, 1700 ms × It can be set to be 3 times).

  In addition, the execution time of the common drawing fluctuation display game, the common drawing stop time, the number of times of general electric power release, and the general electric power release time are appropriately set so as to control the common drawing fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the short time operation state. For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (general drawing fluctuation time) of the common drawing fluctuation display game described above to be the second fluctuation display time shorter than the first fluctuation display time. (E.g., 10000 ms is 1000 ms). Moreover, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the common drawing stop time for displaying the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 ms is 704 ms). Further, in the time saving state, when the common drawing fluctuation display game hits and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (the general public opening time) is the normal state (general drawing low probability state) It is possible to control to become the 2nd opening time longer than 1 opening time (for example, 100 ms is 1352 ms). Also, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 (the number of times of general electric power release) is greater than the number of first open times (for example, 2 times) with respect to one hit result of the common drawing fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the second opening number of times (for example, four times). Also, in the time saving state, the probability of becoming a hit result of the common drawing variation display game (general drawing probability) is higher than the normal probability (general drawing low probability state, for example, 1/251) in the normal operating state. It is possible to have a probability (generally high probability state, for example, 250/251).

  In the short time state, the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the common drawing fluctuation time, the common drawing stop time, the number of times of common power release, the common power open time, and the common drawing probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. Moreover, it is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states which are different from each other. In addition, either of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be selected in the case of a hit. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be made different. Also, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently of each other, and both can be generated simultaneously or only one can be generated. The short time state can also be referred to as a general power support state (during general power support or during power support).

  Further, in the case of the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the game control device 100 performs the second special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 2 fluctuation) after the end of the time saving state (after the end of power support) generated by the predetermined big hit. It is possible to generate the special figure 2 special mode (specific result high probability state which increases the probability that the second special figure fluctuation display game becomes the specific result) which increases the probability that the result of the display game) will be a small hit by a specified period, for example There is. This special view 2 special mode is a kind of high probability state.

  Next, an outline of the game (standard capture method) of the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment will be described. The game nature of the gaming machine 10 is a normal game state (in the special figure 2 special mode mentioned above, a special game state, a state which is neither time nor time state), the left strike is performed and a big hit is made in the special figure 1 variation display game. Aim, in the special game state (big hit state) or time saving state (during power support) do a right-handed, in special figure 2 special mode aim a small hit of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game by right-handed, special game state or time-shortened state Or, when the special figure 2 special mode ends and it becomes the normal game state, it returns to the left strike. In addition, by providing the above-mentioned special view 2 special mode, there is a possibility that the player can play with maintaining a sense of expectation higher than the normal gaming state even after the time saving state ends, and the interest of the game is improved. Do.

  Next, the configuration of the batch display device will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of the batch display device of the first embodiment. The batch display device 50 includes seven segments of LED_d1 and seven segments of LED_d2, and 16 LEDs from LED_d3 to LED_d18. The collective display device 50 displays various states according to the lighting mode of the 7-segment LED_d1 and the 7-segment LED_d2 and the LED_d3 to the LED_d18.

  The batch display device 50 distributes the various status display functions from the 7-segment LED_d1 and the 7-segment LED_d2 and the LED_d3 to the LED_d18, whereby the round display unit 51, the special view 1 suspension display unit 52, and the special view 1 symbol display unit 53 And a special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, a common figure symbol display unit 55, a common drawing reserve display unit 56, a state display unit 57, and a special figure 2 reserve display unit 58. The round display unit 51 displays the number of rounds in the special view game by lighting modes of the four LEDs of LED_d3 to LED_d6. The special view 1 suspension display unit 52 displays the number of reservations in the special view 1 game by the lighting mode of the two LEDs of LED_d11 and LED_d12. The special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 displays the symbols in the special figure 1 game by lighting modes of eight LEDs (seven segment LEDs and one dot LED) of seven segments LED_d1. Special figure 2 symbol indicatory department 54 indicates the design in the special figure 2 game with the lighting feature of 8 LED (7 segment LED and 1 dot LED) of 7 segments LED d2. The common-design symbol display unit 55 displays the symbols in the common-play game by lighting modes of the three LEDs of LED_d8, LED_d10, and LED_d18. The common drawing reservation display unit 56 displays the number of reservations in the common drawing game by lighting modes of the two LEDs of LED_d15 and LED_d16. The state display unit 57 displays the gaming state in the special view game by the lighting mode of the three LEDs of LED_d7, LED_d9, and LED_d17. The special view 2 suspension display unit 58 displays the number of reservations in the special view 2 game by lighting modes of two LEDs of LED_d13 and LED_d14.

  Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, control executed by the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 6 and 7 and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 8 which is performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be described. FIG. 6 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the main process of the first embodiment, and FIG. 7 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the main process of the first embodiment. The main process is a process executed by the CPU 111A.

  The main process is started by turning on the power. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 6 and FIG. 7, after the process of prohibiting the interrupt (step S1) is performed first, the start address of the area for saving the value of the register etc when the interrupt occurs. A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of the first embodiment, the address range of the RAM 111C is 0000h to 01FFh, and 00h or 01h is taken as the upper order. In step S4, 00h at the top of the address range of the RAM 111C is set.

  Next, a signal for stopping the emission is output to set the emission permission signal to the prohibited state (step S5). The release permission signal is set to the prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop the release, and the release of the game ball is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S6), and processing for setting a power on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, the slave control means (for example, the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300) which performs various controls in accordance with an instruction from the game control device 100 forming the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) to wait for the program to start properly is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 temporarily rises first, and sends a command to the slave control apparatus before the slave control apparatus (for example, the payout control apparatus 200 or the presentation control apparatus 300) starts up. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control apparatus 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control apparatus (the payout control apparatus 200, the effect control apparatus 300, etc.) It constitutes a standby means for setting a standby time.

  In addition, the power-on delay timer counts time using a storage area (a RAM area or a register other than the validity determination target) which is not a target of validity determination (check sum calculation) of data held in the RAM region. As a result, when the check data such as the checksum of the RAM area is calculated, it is not necessary to exclude and calculate a part of the RAM area, and it is possible to prevent the control at the time of turning on the power from becoming complicated.

  The initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 is performed by reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time. It can be detected reliably. That is, when the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting of the standby time or the RAM initialization switch is operated from the power on to the elapse of the standby time. It is necessary to keep operating 112. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it becomes possible to detect by performing the operation immediately after turning on the power without performing such troublesome operations, and the operation of initialization performed at the time of turning on the power It can prevent the situation that can not be accepted.

  Next, after performing processing (step S7) for setting a power on delay timer (for example, about 3 seconds), processing for monitoring standby time and monitoring occurrence of power failure during standby time (steps S8 to S12) Do. First, the number of times (for example, twice) of reading and checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and data bus is set (step S8), and the power failure monitoring signal is turned on or not A determination is made (step S9).

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). Then, if the on state of the power failure monitoring signal has not continued for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination (step S9) whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. If the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the process waits for the power of the gaming machine 10 to be shut off. . As described above, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period, thereby appropriately coping with a failure at the time of power on. be able to.

  That is, the game control device 100 functions as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure in a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to cope with a power failure that has occurred during a period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that forms the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately cope with a problem at the time of power on. Note that access to the RAM 111C is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the previous power-off are kept, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM 111C, and the control load can be reduced.

  On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, if no power failure occurs, the power on delay timer is updated by “−1” (step S11), and the timer value is “0”. It is determined whether it is "" (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). If the value of the timer is "0" (step S12; Y), that is, if the waiting time is over, the access permission of the read / write readable RWM (Read Write Memory) such as the RAM 111C or EEPROM is given (step S13) The off data is output to all output ports (set to a state where there is no output) (step S14).

  Next, a serial port (a port provided in advance in the gaming microcomputer 111 and used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this first embodiment) is set (step S15) It is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5 Ah) (step S16).

  Then, if the value of the blackout inspection area 1 is normal (step S16; Y), it is determined whether the value of the blackout inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal blackout inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h). (Step S17) If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (Step S17; Y), a checksum calculation process is performed to calculate a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM (Step S18), and the calculated checksum It is determined whether the checksums at the time of power-off match or not (step S19).

  Here, in the checksum calculation process performed in step S18 and step S43 described later, the sum of the data for the game control work area and the data for the state display work area may be calculated as a checksum, The checksum may be separately calculated from the data of the work area for work and the data of the work area for state display, or the checksum may be calculated only from the data of the game control work area. The game control work area is a work area used for game control among the storage areas in the RWM. The work area for state display is a work area used for state display among storage areas in the RWM.

  Next, if the checksums match (step S19; Y), it is determined whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned on from the previously read state of the first input port 122 (step S20). If the initialization switch 112 is off (step S20; N), the process proceeds to step S25 (FIG. 7), and the processing in the case of normal recovery from the power failure is performed.

  Also, if it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S16; N or step S17; N), or if it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step S19; N), the step The process proceeds to S21, and in steps S21 to S24, a process (first initialization process) for initialization upon data abnormality is performed. That is, based on the determination that the data in the RWM (for example, the RAM 111C) is abnormal, the game control device 100 initializes data stored in the RWM (data of all the areas including the access prohibited area). Form the first initialization means.

  Then, when the process proceeds to step S21, the RAM access prohibition area is set to access permission (step S21), and all RAM areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are zero cleared (step S22). And the RAM access inhibited area is set to access inhibited (step S23). Next, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S24), and the process proceeds to step S29. The area to be initialized here is an area having a value other than the value (zero) written in step S22 of the game control work area and the state display work area as an initial value, and in the present embodiment, It is an area related to setting of the customer waiting demo and setting of the rendering mode.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (step S20; Y), the process proceeds to step S27 (FIG. 7), and the initialization process at the time of initialization operation is performed in 2) Perform initialization processing). That is, the RAM initialization switch 112 is an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 is data (for example, RAM 111C) stored in accordance with the operation of the initialization operation unit. The second initialization means is provided to initialize the data of the area not including the access prohibited area).

  When the process proceeds to step S27 (FIG. 7), the data of the game control work area in the storage area (the area not including the access prohibited area) of the RWM (for example, the RAM 111C) is zero cleared The initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S28), and the process proceeds to step S29. The area to be initialized here is an area relating to the setting of the customer waiting demo and the setting of the effect mode in the present embodiment.

  As described above, the game control apparatus 100 according to the first embodiment performs the process of initialization when data is abnormal (first initialization process) and the process of initialization when initialization operation is performed (second initialization process). Since the function (the first initialization means, the second initialization means) to distinguish and execute is performed, it is possible to realize the optimum and waste-free initialization processing according to the situation.

  Next, when the process proceeds to step S25 (FIG. 7), the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S25), and the special drawing status (set in the special drawing status area described later) The command at the time of the power failure restoration corresponding to the state indicated by the data is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S26), and the process proceeds to step S31.

  Here, the area to be initialized in step S25 is a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. In step S25, the busy signal status area storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can receive a command, is also cleared, and the state of the payout busy signal is not determined. It is considered to be in an undefined state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the touch switch signal state is set to an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal is not determined.

  Further, in the case of the first embodiment, in step S26, a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 pending number command, a special figure 2 pending number command, a probability information command and a screen designation command are transmitted. Also, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, the information on the number of effects and the information on the number of times of high probability are transmitted. In addition, with the command of screen specification, the control state of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are usually processed (during fluctuation, big hit (first special game state), small hit (first 2) A command for instructing display of a customer waiting demo screen if none of them is a special gaming state), and a command for instructing display of a recovery screen otherwise.

  On the other hand, when the process proceeds from step S24 or S28 to step S29, a command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S29), and the process proceeds to step S31. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S29, a model designation command, a special figure 1 pending number command, a special figure 2 pending number command, a probability information command, a command for RAM initialization (displaying a customer waiting demo screen and displaying predetermined A plurality of commands such as a command for notifying the RAM initialization with light and sound (for example, for 30 seconds) are transmitted. Also, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, the information on the number of effects and the information on the number of times of high probability are transmitted.

  In step S31, processing for activating a CTC circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit)) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 ms) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for giving a trigger for updating the random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process of step S31, the random number generation circuit is activated and set (step S32). Specifically, setting of a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit to a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit is performed by the CPU 111A. Further, setting of bit transposition pattern of hard random numbers (here, big hit random numbers) generated by hardware of the random number generation circuit is also performed. The bit transposition pattern is a pattern that determines how to replace the bit arrangement of the extracted random number (arrangement before bit transposition) in a predetermined order and store it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition) is there. By replacing the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, it is possible to break the regularity of the random number and to improve the secrecy of the random number. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Also, it may be set arbitrarily by the user.

  Thereafter, the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at power-on are extracted, and the corresponding various initial value random numbers (in the first embodiment, big hit symbol initial value random numbers, small After saving in a predetermined area of RWM as an initial value (start value) of a winning symbol initial value random number, a hitting initial value random number, a hitting symbol initial value random number) (step S33), an interrupt is permitted (step S34).

  Here, "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that becomes the initial value of random number (big hit symbol random number) that determines big hit stop symbol of special figure, "small hit symbol initial value random number" is small hit stop of special figure It is a random number which becomes an initial value of a random number (small hitting symbol random number) which determines a symbol. In addition, "the initial value random number per hit" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number (random number per hit) that determines the hit in the common pattern change game, and "the initial symbol random number random" determines the per character It is a random number that is an initial value of a random number (per symbol random number). In addition, small hit design random numbers do not exist in models without small hits, and there may be cases in which a hit initial symbol random number does not exist depending on the model.

  The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the first embodiment is configured to change the initial value of the soft random number register every time the power is turned on. By setting it as the start value), it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to obtain an incorrect random number.

  Subsequently, initial value random number update processing (step S35) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers and break the regularity of the random numbers. This initial value random number updating process is a process of updating (initially incrementing) each initial value random number by, for example, “+1”. As described above, the randomness of the random number can be enhanced by continuously updating the initial value random number as long as time allows in the main processing.

  Although not particularly limited, in the first embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, the hit symbol random number is a random number generated by the random number generation circuit. It is configured to generate. However, the big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" updated based on a clock equal to or faster than the CPU operation clock, and the big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, hit random number, hit symbol random number is a program It is a "low-speed counter" updated based on a CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle as timer interrupt processing which is a processing unit. Also, in the big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, hit random number, hit symbol random number, so-called "initial value change method to change the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) every round of the random number Is adopted. Each of the random numbers may be a counter type update by “+1” or “−1”, or may be a random type update in which all values within the range appear separately without overlapping until one round. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number is a random number updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number update process of step S35, the number of times (for example, 2) for checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 via the port and the data bus and checking is set (step S36) It is determined whether the signal is on (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process (step S35). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number updating process and the check (loop process) of the power failure monitoring signal are repeated. By permitting the interrupt (step S34) before the initial value random number update process (step S35), when the timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is performed. By waiting for the initial value random number updating process, it is possible to avoid the pressure on the interrupt process.

  In addition to the main processing, there is also a method in which the initial value random number update processing is performed also in the timer interrupt processing in the above-described step S35 of the initial value random number update processing. In order to avoid the execution of the initial value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to prohibit and then update the interrupt to cancel the interrupt. As in the embodiment, when the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. This has the advantage that the main processing is simplified.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38). Then, if the on state of the power failure monitoring signal for the number of checks has not continued (step S38; N), the process returns to the determination (step S37) whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on. In addition, when the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, processing for temporarily prohibiting an interrupt (step S39) A process (step S40) of outputting the off data to the output port is performed.

  Thereafter, the blackout inspection area check data 1 is saved in the blackout inspection area 1 (step S41), and the blackout inspection area check data 2 is saved in the blackout inspection area 2 (step S42). Furthermore, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S43) for calculating a checksum at the time of power interruption of the RWM, and a process (step S44) for saving the calculated checksum in a checksum area, access to the RAM is prohibited. After performing the process (step S45), the process waits for the power of the gaming machine to be shut off. As described above, by saving check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating a checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is determined whether or not the information stored in the RWM is correctly backed up before the power shutdown. It can be determined at the time of reinjection.

  From the above, main control means (game control apparatus 100) for controlling the game in an integrated manner, and slave control means (disbursement control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. And the like), the main control means is a standby means (game control for setting a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device by delaying the activation of the main control means when the power is turned on). The apparatus 100) and the power failure monitoring means (game control apparatus 100) for monitoring the occurrence of the power failure in the predetermined standby time are provided.

  Further, the power supply device 400 for supplying power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period.

  Further, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) operates the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operating unit (RAM initialization switch 112) capable of external operation, and the initialization operation unit. Based on this, initialization means (game control apparatus 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111C is provided, and the operation state of the initialization operation unit is read before the start of the standby time.

Also, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.
[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing of the game control apparatus 100 will be described. FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first embodiment. This timer interrupt process is an interrupt process which occurs in the above-described main process from the time when the interrupt permission is issued until the interrupt is prohibited (steps S34 to S39). The timer interrupt process is a process executed by the CPU 111A.

  The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and timer interrupt processing is started.

  When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is designated (step S121). Switching to register bank 1 is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main process) to RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S122). In step S122, the same process as step S4 in the main process is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, the input from various sensors and switches, and the taking in of signals, that is, the input processing (step S123) for reading the state of each input port is performed. Then, based on the output data set in the various processes, an output process (step S124) for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (large winning opening 1 solenoid 95b, big winning opening 2 solenoid 38b, and common electric solenoid 37c). ). Note that when a signal for stopping the firing is output in step S5 in the main process, a signal of the firing permission is output by performing the output process, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state. The launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing is performed. Further, the release permission signal is a first signal indicating a state of release permission as viewed from the game control device 100, and a second signal (release permission signal) indicating a state of release permission as viewed from the payout control device 200. Are also generated in the payout control device 200 and output to the launch control device. That is, when the two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are allowed to launch, the gaming ball is configured to be in a state where it can be launched.

  Next, a payout command transmission process (step S125) for outputting a command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, a random number update process 1 (step S126), and a random number update process 2 (step S127) are performed. Here, the random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, the hit symbol random number which is the target of the initial value random number update processing. . Further, the random number updating process 2 is a process of updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

  After that, monitoring whether or not there is an input of a normal signal from the start opening 1 switches 36a, 37a, the start opening 2 switch 92a, the gate switch 34a of the common drawing, the winning opening switch 35a, the big winning opening switch 38a A winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S128) is performed to perform monitoring (whether or not the front frame or the glass frame is opened). In addition, starting opening switch monitoring processing (step S129) which monitors winning of the starting opening 1 switches 36a and 37a and the starting opening 2 switch 92a, special figure 1 game processing (step S130a) which performs processing concerning special figure 1 fluctuation display game, A special figure 2 game process (step S130b) for performing a process relating to the special figure 2 variable display game, and a regular drawing game process (step S130c) for performing a process relating to a common drawing variation display game are performed.

  In the start opening switch monitoring process, when there is a winning of the game ball in the start winning opening 36 or the normal fluctuation winning device 37 which makes the first start winning opening, or the starting winning opening 92 which makes the second start winning opening, various random numbers (The big hit random number etc) is extracted, the game result prior decision which decides the game result based on the particular prize beforehand in the stage before the start of the special figure fluctuation indicatory game is done.

  Next, the desired content of a segment LED (for example, an LED such as the special view 1 symbol display unit 53 of the collective display device 50) provided in the gaming machine 10 and displaying various information related to the display of special view variation display game and game. The segment LED editing process (step S131) which is driven to display the magnetic signal, the process of checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 and the process of determining whether there is an abnormality or not (step S132) The board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S133) is performed to check the detection signal of to determine whether there is an abnormality. Then, external information editing processing (step S134) for setting signals output to various external devices to the output buffer (step S134) and status display editing output processing for status display (step S135) are performed, and the timer interrupt processing ends.

  Here, in the first embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting the interrupt) and the process of restoring the specification of the register bank (that is, the process of specifying the register bank 0) are interrupts. It is performed automatically at the time of return (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Note that, depending on the CPU to be used, there are gaming machines that need to be instructed to execute a process of restoring an interrupt disabled state and a process of restoring a register bank specification.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (step S125) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a flowchart of payout command transmission processing according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a view showing an example of the structure of the winning number counter area according to the first embodiment.

  First, an example of the number-of-winnings counter region will be described. As shown in FIG. 10, for example, the number-of-winnings counter region 1 comprises three prize ball counters, ten prize ball counters, and 14 prize ball counters. The winning counter can be stored up to 65535 winnings. Next, as shown in FIG. 10, for example, as shown in FIG. 10, winning number counter area 2 includes three winning ball counters, ten winning ball counters, and 14 winning ball counters, and each winning number counter can store up to 255 winnings. It has become. In the check of the count number of the winning number counter area, the address of the winning number counter area is updated in step S202 and the like described later to check the above counters in order from the top (from the three winning ball counter).

Next, in FIG. 9, the left column is processing for updating (increasing) the number of times of output of the main winning ball signal, and the right column is processing for transmitting a payout command.
In the payout command transmission process, first, as described in FIG. 10, the counters of the plurality of winning number counter areas 2 provided for the number of winning balls (for example, 3 winning balls, 10 winning balls, 14 winning balls). Among them, it is determined whether or not there is a count number other than “0” in the counter to be checked (step S201). Then, when there is no count number (step S201; N), the address of winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S202), and checking of the counting numbers of all counters in winning number counter area 2 is completed. It is determined whether or not it is (step S203).

  If it is determined in step S201 that there is a count number (step S201; Y), the count number of the counter of the target winning number counter area 2 is subtracted ("-1" updated) (step S204). The number of payouts corresponding to the address of the area 2 (for example, any of the above three, ten or fourteen) is acquired (step S205). Next, the value of the remaining prize ball area and the number of payouts are added (step S206), the addition result is saved in the remaining prize ball area (step S207), and 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S208) It is determined whether the subtraction result is "0" or more (step S209). If it is determined in step S209 that the subtraction result is "0" or more (step S209; Y), the main prize ball signal output number is updated by "+1" (step S210), and the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining number area. (Step S211).

  In the main prize ball signal editing process in the external information editing process described later, the main prize ball signal is output based on the number of times the main prize ball signal is updated in step S210. Here, as the winning ball signal (main winning ball signal), one pulse is outputted from the main substrate (game control device 100) for every 10 pieces of payout schedule, and 10 pieces are dispensed from the payout substrate (disbursement control device 200). One pulse is output each time.

  Next, in the determination in step S203, it is determined that all the checks have ended (step S203; Y), or in the determination in step S209, the subtraction result is determined not to be “0” or more (step S209; N) In the case where the value of the payout command transmission timer is not "0", the value of the payout command transmission timer is updated by "-1" (step S212). If the payout command transmission process is the first timer interrupt process, the value of the payout command transmission timer is “0” because the initial value set in the last step S221 of the payout command transmission process is not set. From that, no subtraction will be done.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S213), and when the value of the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S213; Y), It is determined whether the payout busy signal is busy (step S214). Whether or not the payout busy signal is busy is determined not by referring to the state of the port but by referring to the payout busy signal flag. Here, as a condition for the payout busy signal to be on (busy), "diverting operation", "ball lending operation", "shooting ball out error", "overflow error", and "frame radio wave illegal occurrence" "Medium", "due to a drop of ball detection switch (switch to monitor dispensed balls)", "due to underdelivery error", "due to overdelivery error", "a prize to be dispensed in the memory of the dispensing control board When there is a count of the number of balls (the number of unpaid prize balls = the number of acquired game balls) (when it is not 0) or the like.

  Next, when the payout busy signal is not busy (step S214; N), it is determined whether the target counter of the winning number counter area 1 has a count (step S215) and the target counter of the winning number counter area 1 If there is no count (step S215; N), the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S216), and it is determined whether the check of all areas is completed (step S217). If the check of all the areas is not completed (step S217; N), the process returns to step S215.

  In step S215, if there is a count in the target counter of winning number counter area 1 (step S215; Y), the target winning number counter is updated by “−1” (step S218), and the address of winning number counter area 1 is The corresponding payout number command is acquired (step S219), and the acquired command is written to the serial transmission buffer for payout (step S220). Then, an initial value (for example, 200 ms) is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S221).

  When it is determined in step S213 that the value of the payout command transmission timer is not "0" (step S213; N), when it is determined in step S214 that the payout busy signal is busy (step S214; Y) If it is determined in step S217 that all areas have been checked (step S217; Y), or if the process of step S221 is completed, the payout command transmission process is ended.

  As can be understood from the configuration in which the processing is terminated without executing steps S215 and later depending on the determination results of steps S213 and S214, the payout command is not transmitted for each timer interrupt, but a predetermined time has elapsed. Have been sent since. In addition, the transmission of the payout command is also a condition that the payout control substrate side can pay out the winning balls.

[Prize port switch / status monitoring process]
Next, the winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step S128) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 8) will be described. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the winning opening switch / status monitoring processing of the first embodiment. In this winning opening switch / status monitoring process, first, the winning opening monitoring table 1 (for example, the count switch) corresponding to the two large winning opening switches 38a (count switches) in the upper large winning opening (the special variation winning device 38). Are stored (the data indicating the number of the port to which the detection signal from is input, the bit position in the port of the signal, etc. are stored) (step S 271). Next, the fraud & prize monitoring process (step S272) is performed to monitor whether there is an injustice (illegal prize) for winning in the big prize mouth despite the fact that the big prize mouth is not open. .

  After that, the winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to one large winning opening switch 38a in the lower large winning opening (special variation winning device 95) is prepared (step S273), and it is monitored whether there is an illegal winning or not. The fraud & prize monitoring process (step S274) for detecting a prize is executed. Then, prepare a winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switch (starting opening 1 switch 37a) in the general public (step S275a), and monitor whether there is an incorrect winning and detect the normal winning while the fraud & winning monitoring process ( Step S275 b) is performed.

  Next, the winning opening monitoring of the winning opening switch that does not require the fraud monitoring processing, that is, the winning opening switch that can always be winning (here, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 92a, the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) A table is prepared (step S276), a winning number counter updating process (step S277) for updating the winning number is performed, and a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process (step S278) is performed.

  Next, the value of the state scan counter for designating in order which switch or signal of the plurality of switches and signals to monitor the error state of the gaming machine 10 is to be the target of this monitoring is "0". To "3" (step S279). Thereafter, according to the value of the state scan counter, any of the switch abnormality 1 error output due to the occurrence of connector disconnection of the switch, the shoot ball out error from the payout control device 200, the overflow error from the overflow switch and the dispensing abnormality error. A gaming machine state monitoring table 1 is prepared for setting a target of error monitoring based on the parameter (step S280). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S281) is performed to determine whether an error has occurred.

  Next, according to the value of the status scan counter, prepare the gaming machine status monitoring table 2 for setting the monitoring of the error based on the glass frame open, the main body frame open, the frame radio wave fraud and the touch switch. (Step S282). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S283) is performed to determine whether an error has occurred.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S284). If the value of the status scan counter is not "0" (step S284; N), the winning opening switch / status monitor End the process. In this case, there is no monitoring target of the gaming machine status on the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. If the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S284; Y), the gaming machine status is based on the switch abnormality 2 error output due to the occurrence of connector disconnection of the switch or the like according to the value of the status scan counter. The gaming machine state monitoring table 3 for setting the monitoring of the above is prepared (step S285). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S286) is performed to determine whether an error has occurred, a payout busy signal check process (step S287) is performed, and the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is ended. The payout busy signal check process is not performed every time, but is performed once every four times, and since the remaining three times are passed, monitoring of a cycle of 16 ms is performed.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the starting opening switch monitoring process (step S129) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described using FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the starting opening switch monitoring process of the first embodiment.

  In the starting opening switch monitoring process, first, a prize monitoring table of starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36, normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37) is prepared (step A101), hard random number acquisition processing (step A102) is performed, and the starting opening It is determined whether or not there is a win to 1 (step A103).

If it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning on the starting opening 1 (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a winning on the starting opening 1 (step A103; Y), the game state is a predetermined state to be hit on the right (for example, general support state, big hit, etc.) It is determined whether there is any (step A104).

When it is determined in step A104 that the predetermined state is not right to hit (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A104 that the vehicle is in the predetermined state to be swayed (step A104; Y), a stern command notification command is prepared (step A105), and a rendering command setting process (step A106) Do. That is, in the case of the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, with the exception of the general electric power support state, the player hardly wins unless it is left hitting the starting opening 1, and the starting opening 1 has winning in the predetermined state In this case, since it can be estimated that the vehicle has been driven to the left even though the vehicle is in the predetermined state to be driven to the right, the presentation control device 300 transmits a notification (warning) instructing the player to issue a right strike instruction notification command to the presentation control device 300 to strike the right. Configured to

Next, after preparing a table for setting information on suspension by the starting opening 1 (step A107), the special view starting opening 1 switch processing (step A108) is performed.
Next, a prize monitoring table for the starting opening 2 (starting winning opening 92) is prepared (step A109), hard random number acquisition processing (step A110) is performed, and it is determined whether or not there is a winning on the starting opening 2 (Step A111).

If it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning on the starting opening 2 (step A111; N), the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A111 that there is a winning on the starting opening 2 (step A111; Y), it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the general power support state (time saving state) (step A112) If it is determined that the general-purpose power transmission support state is not set (Step A112; N), it is determined whether or not a big hit is in progress (Step A113). If it is determined in step A113 that the jackpot is not in progress (step A113; N), it is determined whether the special view fluctuation display game is in the final movement of the general power support (step A114).

  If it is determined in step A114 that the power conversion support is not in the final change (step A114; N), a left-handed command notification command is prepared (step A115), and effect command setting processing (step A116) is performed. That is, since it should be left-handed if it is not a normal power support state, a big hit, or a general power support final variation, a process of transmitting a left-handed instruction notification command to the effect control device 300 is performed.

  Then, when it is determined in step A112 that it is in the general power support state (step A112; Y), when it is determined in step A113 that it is in the big hit (step A113; Y), the general power support final in step A114. If it is determined that it is changing (step A114; Y), the process proceeds to step A117 when the process of step A116 is completed.

  In step A117, a table for setting information on hold by the starting opening 2 is prepared (step A117), and the special view starting opening 2 switch processing (step A118) is performed to end the starting opening switch monitoring processing.

  If it is determined in step A111 that there is a winning on the starting opening 2, for example, before executing step A112, the common electric power fraudulent (normal though the normal change winning device 37 is closed, it is normal There is provided a step of determining whether or not there is a prize in the variable winning device 37 being detected (improper detection), and if it is determined that this general electric power fraud is occurring, the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended without executing step A112 or later. The configuration may be such that the second start memory (start memory of Toku-zu 2) is not generated any more if there is a common electric power fraud.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, the details of the hard random number acquisition process (steps A102 and A110) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart of hard random number acquisition processing according to the first embodiment.

  In the hard random number acquisition process, first, among the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36 and the normal fluctuation winning device 37) and the starting opening 2 (starting winning opening 92), the winning no information of the starting opening to be monitored is set ( Step A121) It is determined whether there is an input to the starting port switch to be monitored among the starting port 1 switches 36a and 37a and the starting port 2 switch 92a (Step A122). Then, when there is no input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition process is ended. On the other hand, when there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether latch data is present in the target random number latch register (step A124).

  If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number is extracted, the hard random number acquisition processing is ended. When latch data is present in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y), the extracted jackpot random number is loaded and prepared in the hard random number latch register to be monitored (step A125). Then, of the starting opening 1 and the starting opening 2, the winning prize information of the starting opening to be monitored is set (step A126), and the hard random number acquisition processing is ended.

[Special figure starting port 1 switch processing]
Next, the details of the special view starting opening 1 switch processing (step A108) in the above-mentioned starting opening switch monitoring processing will be described using FIG. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special view starting opening 1 switch process of the first embodiment.

The special figure starting port 1 switch process is a process performed when there is an input of the starting port 1 switches 36a and 37a to be monitored (the start winning of the special figure 1 to be monitored).
In the special view starting opening 1 switch processing, first, the starting opening signal 1 output, which is the number of times of outputting information on the number of winnings to the starting opening 1 switches 36a and 37a to be monitored to the management device outside the gaming machine 10. The number of times is loaded (step A131), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step A132), and it is determined whether the number of times of output overflows (step A133). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM start opening signal 1 output number area (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, when the number of times of output overflows (step A133; Y), the process passes step A134 and proceeds to the process of step A135. In the first embodiment, values from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start opening signal 1 output frequency area. When the loaded value is “255”, the value after updating becomes “0” when “+1” is updated, and it is determined that the number of times of output overflows.

  Next, it is determined whether the number of special figure 1 reservations (number of start memories of special figure 1) to be updated corresponding to the starting opening 1 switches 36a and 37a to be monitored is less than the upper limit (for example, less than 4). (Step A135). When the number of special figure 1 reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A135; N), the special figure starting port 1 switch process is ended. If the number of special figure 1 reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), set the special figure 1 information setting flag used for setting of fluctuation information (for example, for sorting of pre-reading fluctuation pattern) ( Step A136) The special figure 1 pending number to be updated is updated by “+1” (step A137).

  Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area (random number storage area for special figure 1) corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number is calculated (step A138), and the big hit random number storage area of RWM is prepared in step A125. (Step A139). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the special figure 1 is extracted and prepared (step A140), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A141).

  Next, the small hit symbol random number of the special figure 1 is extracted, prepared, and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of RWM (step A 142), and the variation pattern random number 1, the variation pattern random number 2, and the variation pattern random number 3 The data is saved in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage area of RWM (step A143), and the special map reservation information determination process (step A144) is performed. Thereafter, a decoration special drawing 1 holding number command corresponding to the special drawing 1 holding number to be monitored is prepared (step A145), rendering command setting processing (step A 146) is performed, and the special drawing starting opening 1 switch processing is ended. .

  Here, the RAM 111C of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the gaming ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the starting winning area of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the special view changing display game A start winning memory storing means is provided which stores a predetermined number as an upper limit as a start memory which becomes an execution right of the above. In addition, the start winning memory storage means (RAM 111C) is the first start of the various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball on the starting opening 1 (start winning opening 36, the normal fluctuation winning device 37), with a predetermined number as the upper limit. Store as a memory.

[Special figure starting mouth 2 switch processing]
Next, the details of the special view start port 2 switch process (step A118) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described using FIG. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special view starting opening 2 switch process of the first embodiment.

The special figure starting port 2 switch process is a process that is performed when there is an input of the starting port 2 switch 92a to be monitored (starting winning of the special figure 2 to be monitored).
In the special view starting opening 2 switch processing, first, the starting opening signal 2 output number of times which is the number of times of outputting information on the number of winnings to the starting opening 2 switch 92a to the external management device of the gaming machine 10 is loaded ( Step A151) The loaded value is updated by “+1” (Step A152), and it is determined whether or not the number of outputs overflows (Step A153). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A153; N), the updated value is saved in the start opening signal 2 output number area of RWM (step A154), and the process proceeds to step A155. On the other hand, when the number of times of output overflows (step A153; Y), the process passes step A154 and shifts to the process of step A155. In the first embodiment, values from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start opening signal 2 output frequency area. When the loaded value is “255”, the value after updating becomes “0” when “+1” is updated, and it is determined that the number of times of output overflows.

  Next, it is determined whether the number of special figure 2 reservations (starting memories) to be updated corresponding to the starting opening 2 switch 92a to be monitored is less than the upper limit (for example, less than 4) (step A155). If the number of special views 2 to be updated is not less than the upper limit (step A 155; N), the special view starting opening 2 switch process is ended. If the number of special figures 2 to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A 155; Y), set the special figure 2 information setting flag used for setting of fluctuation information (for example, for sorting of prefetch fluctuation patterns) ( Step A156) The special figure 2 pending number to be updated is updated by “+1” (step A157).

  Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area (random number storage area for special figure 2) corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number is calculated (step A158), and the big hit random number storage area of RWM is prepared in step A125. (Step A159). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the special figure 2 is extracted and prepared (step A160), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A161).

  Next, the small hit symbol random number of the special figure 2 is extracted, prepared, and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of RWM (step A 162), and the variation pattern random number 1, the variation pattern random number 2, and the variation pattern random number 3 The data is saved in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage area of RWM (step A 163), and the special map reservation information determination process (step A 164) is performed. Thereafter, a decoration special drawing 2 holding number command corresponding to the special drawing 2 holding number to be monitored is prepared (step A 165), rendering command setting processing (step A 166) is performed, and the special drawing starting opening 2 switch processing is ended. .

  Here, the RAM 111C of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the gaming balls into the starting winning area of the starting winning opening 92 and starts the right to execute the special view fluctuation display game. The start winning storage means stores a predetermined number as the upper limit as the storage. In addition, the start winning memory storage unit (RAM 111C) stores various random number values extracted based on the game ball winning on the starting opening 2 (start winning opening 92) as a second starting memory with a predetermined number as an upper limit.

[Special map reservation information determination process]
Next, the details of the special view reserve information determination process (step A144, step A164) in the special view start port 1 switch process and the special view start port 2 switch process described above will be described using FIG. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special-image hold information determination process of the first embodiment.

  The special view reserve information determination process is a prefetch process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start storage prior to the start timing of the special view variation display game based on the corresponding start storage.

  In the special figure reservation information determination process, first, it is determined whether the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is a high probability state (during high probability) (step A172). If it is determined in step A172 that the high probability is in progress (step A172; Y), the special image holding information determination process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A172 that the high probability is not in progress (step A172; N), it is determined whether or not a big hit is in progress (step A173). If it is determined in step A173 that a big hit is in progress (step A173; Y), the special image storage information determination process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step A173 that the big hit is not in progress (step A173; N), the big hit determination process (in which the big hit is determined whether or not the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value) Step A174) is performed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the determination result of the big hit determination process is a big hit (step A175). And, if the judgment result is a big hit (step A175; Y), the jackpot symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting port switch (in other words, special figure type; special figure 1 or special figure 2 type) It sets (step A176), acquires the stop design information which corresponds to the big hit design random number which is prepared at step A140 or A160 (step A177), it moves to the processing of step A184 and does the processing after that.

  On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step A175; N), the small hit determination process (step A179) to determine whether it is a small hit by whether the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value. Do. Thereafter, it is determined whether the determination result of the small hitting determination processing is a small hit (step A180). Then, if the determination result is not a small hit (step A180; N), the stop symbol information of the removal is set (step A183), the process proceeds to step A184, and the subsequent processes are performed.

  On the other hand, if the determination result is a small hit (step A180; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set, and a small hit stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A142 or A162. Are set (step A182), and the process proceeds to step A184 to perform the subsequent processes.

  And if it transfers to step A184, the prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information acquired or set in either step A177, step A182 or step A183 is prepared (step A184), and production command setting processing (step) Do A185). Next, a special pattern information setting process (step A186) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern is performed, and a variation pattern setting process (step A187) for setting a variation mode of the special figure variation display game. Do.

  Thereafter, a prefetch variation pattern corresponding to a first half variation number indicating a first half variation pattern (variation pattern up to reach action start) and a second half variation pattern (variation pattern after reach action start) in a variation pattern of the special view variation display game A command is prepared (step A188), an effect command setting process (step A189) is performed, and the special figure hold information determination process is ended.

  The special figure information setting process in step A186 and the variation pattern setting process in step A187 are executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure routine process (special figure 1 routine process or special figure 2 routine process described later). Is similar to the That is, when the special view reserve information determination process is executed in step A144, since the special view type is special view 1, the process of steps A186 and A187 is the special view 1 information setting process and special view 1 variation described later. Since the special drawing type is the special figure 2 when the special figure holding information determination process is executed in step A164, which is the same as the pattern setting process, the process of steps A186 and A187 will be described later in the special figure 2 information. The setting process and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process are respectively the same.

  Through the above processing, the prefetch stop symbol command including the result of the special view variation display game based on the start storage of the prefetch target and the prefetch variation pattern command including information of the variation pattern in the special view variation display game based on the start storage It is prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300. Thereby, the effect control of the result related information (whether or not the big hit or the change pattern type) corresponding to the start memory is performed before the start timing of the special view change display game based on the corresponding start memory. The player can be notified of the result related information prior to the start timing of the special view variation display game by changing the decoration special view start memory display that can be notified to the device 300, in particular, displayed on the display device 41. It becomes possible to notify.

  That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as start storage in the start winning storage means (RAM 111C) before executing the variable display game based on the start storage (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained) Judgment) Make pre-judging means. It should be noted that the time when the random number value stored corresponding to the starting memory is determined in advance is not only at the starting winning combination when the starting memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is played. Good.

[Special figure 1 game processing]
Next, the details of the special view 1 game process (step S130a) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a view showing a flowchart of the special view 1 game process of the first embodiment.

  In the special figure 1 game process, monitoring of the input of the special winning opening switch 38a, control of the entire process related to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, display of the special figure 1 (identification information variably displayed in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game) Make settings for. In the special figure 1 game process, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit in the special figure 2 or small hit (big hit gaming state or small hit gaming state according to the result of the special view 2 fluctuation display game) (step A1) . When it is not in the middle hit or the small hit of the special figure 2 (step A1; N), it does large winning a prize mouth switch supervisory processing (step A2). In this special winning opening switch monitoring process, processing is performed to monitor the detection of gaming balls at the special winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variation winning device 38 and the special variation winning device 95.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit or small hit in the special figure 2 (step A1; Y) and the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is finished, the process proceeds to step A3. If the game processing timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step A3). The minimum value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the special view 1 game processing timer is "0" (step A4). If the value of the special view 1 game processing timer is “0” (step A4; Y), that is, if the time is up or the time is already up, to branch to the processing corresponding to the special view 1 game processing number The special figure 1 game sequence branch table to be referred to is set in the register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number is acquired using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure 1 game processing number (step A7).

  If the special figure 1 game processing number is “0” in step A7, the variation start of the special figure 1 variation display game is monitored, and the setting and effect setting of the variation start of the special figure 1 variation display game, and the special During special processing 1 special processing (step A8) which sets the information which is necessary in order to do processing in Figure 1 during fluctuation is done.

  At step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "1", the special figure 1 is used to set the stop display time of the special figure 1, set the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 display process, etc. (1) Perform a process during fluctuation (step A9).

  If the special figure 1 game processing number is "2" at step A7, and if the game result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is a big hit, the setting of the fanfare command according to the type of the big hit, the big of each big hit The special figure 1 display process (step A10) is performed to set the fan fare time according to the winning opening opening pattern and to set the information necessary for performing the fan fare / interval process.

  If the special processing 1 game processing number is "3" at step A7, the setting of the opening time of the special winning opening, the updating of the opening number, the setting of information necessary for performing the special winning opening opening process, etc. Perform fanfare / interval processing (step A11).

  If the special figure 1 game processing number is "4" in step A7, while the big hit round is not the final round, while setting the interval command, if it is the final round, the processing of setting the ending command, the big winning opening A special winning opening open process (step A12) is performed to set information necessary for performing the remaining ball process.

  If the special figure 1 game processing number is "5" in step A7, while the big hit round is not the final round, while setting the information necessary for performing fanfare / in-interval processing, etc., the final round For example, the process for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, the special winning opening remaining ball processing (step A13) for setting the information necessary for performing special figure 1 big hit end processing, etc. Do.

  In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "6", special figure 1 big hit end processing (step A14) is performed to set information necessary for special figure 1 normal processing.

  At step A7, when the special processing 1 game processing number is "7", the setting of the opening time and opening pattern of the predetermined big winning opening when the small hit occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, the small hit processing A small hit fanfare middle process (step A15) is performed to set information etc. necessary for the execution.

  At step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is “8”, the setting of the information necessary for performing the small hitting medium movement transition processing, the command of the small hitting end screen, the small hitting remaining ball processing, etc. The small hit middle process (step A16) is performed.

  In step A7, when the special figure 1 game process number is "9", the small hit residual ball process (step A17) is performed to set information necessary for performing the special figure 1 small hit end process.

  At step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "10", special figure 1 small hit end processing (step A18) is performed to set information etc. necessary for special figure 1 normal processing.

  Thereafter, after preparing a table for controlling the variation of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 (step A19), the symbol variation control process (step A20) related to the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 is performed, and the special figure game process is performed. Finish. On the other hand, if the value of the special view 1 game processing timer is not "0" at step A4 (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A19 and the subsequent processing Do.

  Note that the small hit is a result mode without the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device. The condition device is operated when a big hit occurs in the special view variation display game (big hit symbol stop display), and when the condition device is activated, a big hit condition occurs, for example, and it is a special special motorized role. It means that a specific flag for operating the fluctuation winning device 38 continuously is set (the character continuous operating device is operated). If the condition device does not operate, it means that the aforementioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small hit lottery, for example. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag turned on / off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch turned on / off electrically. In addition, "condition device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is required for continuous operation of a motorized accessory, and the same applies in this specification as well. It is used as a term that has a meaning.

[Special figure 2 game processing]
Next, the details of the special view 2 game process (step S130 b) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a view showing a flowchart of the special view 2 game process of the first embodiment.

  In the special figure 2 game process, the monitoring of the input of the special winning opening switch 38a, the control of the whole process concerning the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the display of the special figure 2 (identification information which is fluctuated displayed in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game) Make settings for. In the special figure 2 game process, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit or small hit of the special figure 1 (big hit gaming state or small hit gaming state according to the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game) (step A31) . When it is not in the middle hit or the small hit of the special figure 1 (step A31; N), it executes the special winning opening switch monitor processing (step A32). In this special winning opening switch monitoring process, processing is performed to monitor the detection of gaming balls at the special winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variation winning device 38 and the special variation winning device 95.

  Next, when it is determined that the big hit or small hit in the special figure 1 (step A31; Y), and when the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A32) is finished, the process proceeds to step A33. If the special processing 2 game processing timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step A33). The minimum value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special view 2 game processing timer is "0" (step A34). If the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0" (step A34; Y), that is, if the time is up or the time is already up, the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0". It is determined whether there is any (step A35). If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not "0" (step A35; N), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by "-1" (step A36). The long variation timer value (for example, 60000 msec) is saved in the special processing 2 game processing timer area which is an area for storing the value of the game processing timer (step A37), and the process proceeds to step A59.

  On the other hand, when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0" (step A35; Y), the special figure 2 game sequence branch referred to for branching to the processing corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number. A table is set in a register (step A38), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special view 2 game process number is acquired using the table (step A39). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure 2 game processing number (step A47).

  At step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "0", the variation start of the special figure 2 variation display game is monitored, and the setting of the variation start of the special figure 2 variation display game and the setting of the effect, the special Special figure 2 usual processing (step A48) which does the setting and the like of information which is necessary in order to do processing in Figure 2 fluctuation is done.

  At step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is “1”, the special figure 2 is used to set the stop display time of the special figure 2, set the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 display processing, etc. 2) Perform a process during fluctuation (step A49).

  If the special figure 2 game processing number is "2" in step A47, if the special view 2 variation display game's gaming result is a big hit, the setting of the fanfare command according to the type of big hit, the big of each big hit The special figure 2 display process (step A50) is performed to set the fan fare time according to the winning opening opening pattern and to set the information necessary to perform the fan fare / interval process.

  In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "3", the setting of the opening time of the special winning opening and the updating of the number of opening, the setting of the information necessary for performing the special winning opening opening process, etc. The fanfare / interval process to be performed (step A51) is performed.

  At step A47, when the special figure game processing number is "4", while the big hit round is not the final round, while setting the interval command, the processing of setting the ending command when the final round, the big winning opening remaining A special winning opening open process (step A52) is performed to set information required to perform ball processing.

  If the special figure 2 game processing number is "5" in step A47, while the big hit round is not the final round, while setting the information necessary for performing fanfare / in-interval processing, etc., the final round For example, the process for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, and the special winning opening remaining ball processing (step A53) for setting the information necessary for performing special figure 2 big hit end processing, etc. Do.

  At step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "6," special figure 2 big hit end processing (step A54) is performed to set information necessary for performing special figure 2 usual processing.

  At step A47, when the special processing 2 game processing number is “7”, the setting of the opening time and opening pattern of the predetermined big winning opening when the small hit occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, the small hitting middle processing A small hit fanfare middle process (step A55) is performed to set information required to perform the process.

  At step A47, if the special processing 2 game processing number is "8", the setting of the information necessary for performing the small hitting medium movement transition processing, the command of the small hitting end screen, the small hitting remaining ball processing, etc. The small hit middle process (step A56) is performed.

  At step A47, when the special figure 2 game process number is "9", the small hit residual ball process (step A57) is performed to set information necessary for performing the special figure 2 small hit end process.

  At step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "10", special figure 2 small hit end processing (step A58) is performed to set information necessary for special figure 2 normal processing.

  Thereafter, after preparing a table for controlling the variation of the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 (step A59), the symbol variation control process (step A60) related to the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 is performed, and the special figure game process is performed. Finish. On the other hand, if the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not "0" at step A34 (step A34; N), that is, if the time is not up or the process at step A37 is completed, step A59 is performed. It shifts to processing and performs processing after that.

[Special figure 1 normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 routine process (step A8) in the special figure 1 game process described above will be described using FIG. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special view 1 ordinary process of the first embodiment.

  In the special figure 1 ordinary processing, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 can start changing (that is, whether the special figure 1 variable display game can be started) (step A251). In this judgment, the game state is the period from the end of fluctuation of the hit (big hit or small hit) of the special figure 2 (start of processing during the special figure 2 display) to the end of the hit action (big hit gaming state or small hit gaming state) In the case of the state of, that is, when the special figure 2 is hit, the special figure 1 determines that the variation start is not possible, and when it is not the period, the special figure 1 determines that the variation start is possible.

  Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 can start changing (step A251; Y), whether or not the left hitting instruction has been notified (that is, the left hitting instruction notifying command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and then the right hitting instruction) It is determined whether the notification command has not been transmitted (step A252). In step A252, it is determined that the left hitting instruction notification has been completed if the left hitting instruction notification flag is set, and it is determined that the left hitting instruction not notified is not set if the left hitting instruction notification flag is not set. It may be a configuration.

  If the left hitting instruction notification has not been made (step A252; N), prepare a left hitting instruction notification command (step A253), perform rendering command setting processing (step A254), and set the left hitting instruction notification flag (step A254) A255).

  If the left-handed instruction has been notified (step A 252; Y) and if step A 255 is ended, the process proceeds to step A 256, and the number of special drawing 1 reservations (first start memory number) is “0” It is determined whether or not it is (step A256). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 reservation number is not "0" (step A256; N), a variation start probability information command corresponding to the current special condition variation display game probability state is prepared (step A257). The setting process (step A258) is performed, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A259) is performed, and the decoration special figure holding number command corresponding to the special figure 1 holding number is prepared (step A260), and the rendering command setting process (step A261) do, set information showing special map 1 fluctuation (during special figure 1 fluctuation display game) in the special drawing status area in RWM (information addition) (step A262), probability of the special drawing fluctuation display game It is determined whether the state is in high probability (step A263).

  In the special view status area, information indicating that special figure 1 is moving (during special figure 1 variable display game) and information indicating that special figure 2 is moving (during special figure 2 variable display game) This is an area to be stored independently, and the state indicated by the information set in the special view status area is the special view status. When step A 262 is executed, the special view status is either “special figure 1 in change” or “special figure 1 in change + special figure 2 in change”.

  Also, in the special figure 1 change start process (step A 259), a process of saving “1” which is a process number related to the special figure 1 during change process in the special figure 1 game process number area (steps A318 and A319 described later) Processing for saving the flag during fluctuation in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A322 described later), processing in which the fluctuation time is set as the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer (steps A307 and A497 described later), etc. are performed .

  Then, if it is not in the high probability (step A263; N), it is determined whether or not the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (step A264). If the high probability final fluctuation is not in progress (step A264; N) The fluctuation check flag in FIG. 1 is set (step A265). It is to be noted that the determination as to whether or not the high probability final fluctuation is being performed is performed by a high probability final fluctuation flag described later. That is, if the high probability final change flag is set, it is determined that the high probability final change is in progress.

  Then, when the step A265 is finished, when it is determined that the high probability is in progress (step A263; Y), and when it is determined that the high probability final variation is in progress (step A264; Y) (1) Perform a process transition setting process (step A266) during fluctuation, and end the special figure 1 ordinary process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 can not start changing (step A251; N), and when the number of reserved special figures 1 is "0" at step A256 (step A256; Y), Set “0” (Step A 267), save the processing number “0” in the special figure 1 game processing number area which is the area for storing the special figure 1 game processing number in RWM (step A 268) 1 Finish processing normally.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the determination result in step A 251 is affirmative and the special figure 1 hold count is not “0”, the special figure 1 change start process (step A 259) is executed. , Even if the special figure 2 is in the process of being changed (during the special figure 2 variable display game being executed), the special figure 1 change display game is started. That is, when the game control device 100 has the first start memory in the first start memory means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the first start memory is the variable display based on the second start memory It is a control means that can be executed simultaneously with the game.

[Special figure 2 normal processing]
Next, the details of the special view 2 routine processing (step A48) in the special view 2 game processing described above will be described using FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a flowchart of special processing 2 usual processing of the first embodiment.

  In the special figure 2 routine processing, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 can start changing (that is, whether the special figure 2 variable display game can be started) (step A271). In this judgment, the game state is the period from the end of fluctuation of the hit (big hit or small hit) of the special figure 1 (start of processing during the special figure 1 display) to the end of the hit action (big hit gaming state or small hit gaming state) In the case of the state of, that is, when the special figure 1 is hit, the special figure 2 determines that the variation start is not possible, and when the period is not, the special figure 2 determines that the variation start is possible.

  When it is determined that the special figure 2 can start changing (step A271; Y), it is determined whether the number of reserved special figures 2 (second starting memory number) is “0” (step A 272) . Then, when it is determined that the special figure 2 reservation number is not "0" (step A272; N), a variation start probability information command corresponding to the probability state of the current special figure variation display game is prepared (step A273). The setting process (step A 274) is performed, the special figure 2 change start process (step A 275) is performed, and information indicating that special figure 2 is changing (special figure 2 changing display game is being executed) is set in the special figure status area in RWM. (Information addition) (step A276), it is determined whether the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is high probability or not (step A277).

  Here, the state indicated by the information set in the special view status area (that is, the special view status) is “during special figure 2 fluctuating” and “special figure 1 fluctuating + special figure 2 fluctuating” when step A 276 is executed. It will be in one of two states.

  Also, in the special figure 2 change start process (step A 275), a process of saving “1” which is a process number related to the special figure 2 in-process process in the special figure 2 game process number area (steps A348 and A349 described later) Processing for saving the flag during fluctuation in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A 352 described later), processing in which the fluctuation time is set as the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer (steps A 337 and A 497 described later), etc. are performed .

  In addition, for example, after executing step A 275, prepare a decorative special drawing reservation number command corresponding to the special drawing 2 reservation number, and then execute a rendering command setting process, and then shift to step A 276 (namely, special drawing 2) Also in the case of (1), the decoration special drawing reservation number command may be transmitted to the effect control device 300 in the normal processing).

  Then, if it is not in the high probability (step A 277; N), it is judged whether or not the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (step A 278). If it is not in the high probability final fluctuation (step A 278; N) The fluctuation check flag is set (step A279).

  Then, when step A279 is completed, when it is determined that the high probability is in progress (step A277; Y), and when it is determined that the high probability final variation is in progress (step A278; Y), (2) Perform process transition setting process (step A280) during fluctuation, and finish the special figure 2 ordinary process.

  On the other hand, when the special figure 2 reservation number is "0" (step A272; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number is "0" (step A281), and the special figure 1 reservation number is If it is determined that it is "0" (step A281; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 is in motion (the special figure 1 variation display game is being executed) (step A282). Then, if the special figure 1 is not moving (step A282; N), it is judged whether or not the customer waiting demo has been started (step A283), and the customer waiting demo is not started (step A283; N) ) Sets the waiting for customer demonstration flag in the waiting for customer demonstration flag area (step A284). Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step A285), and a rendering command setting process (step A286) is performed. Note that a command (here, customer waiting demo command) prepared to perform the rendering command setting process is transmitted to the rendering control device 300.

  Then, when step A 286 ends, when it is determined that the special figure 2 can not start changing (step A 271; N), and when the number of special figure 1 reservations is not “0” (step A 281; N), If FIG. 1 is fluctuating (Step A 282; Y) and if the customer waiting demo has been started (Step A 283; Y), “0” is set as the processing number (Step A 287). The processing number, ie, “0” is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area, which is an area for storing the special figure 2 game processing number (step A 288), and the special figure 2 routine processing is ended.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the determination result in step A 271 is affirmative, and the special figure 2 reserve number is not “0”, the special figure 2 change start process (step A 275) is executed. Even if the special figure 1 is in the process of being changed (during the special figure 1 change display game being executed), the special figure 2 change display game is started. That is, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start memory means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the second start memory is the variable display based on the first start memory It is a control means that can be executed simultaneously with the game.

[Special figure 1 change start processing]
Next, the details of the special view 1 fluctuation start process (step A 259) in the special view 1 normal process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 21 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of the special view 1 fluctuation start process of the first embodiment; FIG. 22 is a second diagram of the flowchart of the special view 1 fluctuation start process of the first embodiment;

  The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, first, the special figure 1 information setting flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, the special figure 1) is set (step A301). A big hit flag 1 setting process (step A302) for setting shift information and big hit information to the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not it is a big hit is performed.

  Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A 303) according to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (pattern information), the special figure 1 information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern of the special figure 1 The special figure 1 fluctuation pattern which is a table in which information for setting special pattern 1 information setting processing (step A 304) to set is performed and information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game is set. A setting information table is prepared (step A305). After that, special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting processing (step A306) which sets fluctuation pattern which is fluctuation aspect in the 1st special figure fluctuation display game, is executed, fluctuation start information setting which sets information of fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game A process (step A307) is performed to determine whether the probability state of the special view variable display game is high or not (step A308).

  Then, if it is not in the high probability (step A308; N), it is determined whether or not the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (step A309), and if it is not in the high probability final fluctuation (step A309; N) It is determined whether or not FIG. 2 is changing (during special figure 2 changing display game execution) (step A310). If the special figure 2 is changing (step A310; Y), it is determined whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0" (step A311). If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not "0" (step A311; N), it is determined whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is, for example, "4" or more (step A312). If the number of repetitions of the game processing timer is not more than, for example, "4" (step A312; N), the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is calculated (step A313).

  Note that the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is in the variation start information setting process of step A 337 described later when the special figure 2 game processing timer is in a state of a time value sufficient for 2 bytes (for example, 60000 ms). It is set to "0" (see, for example, step A500 described later).

  In addition, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 (execution time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game) can be calculated from the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer (the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer area). Specifically, in step A313, the special variation 2 game processing at that time is performed on the result of multiplying the long variation timer value (for example, 60000 ms) saved in step A37 described above by the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer. The remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 can be calculated by adding the value of the timer area.

  Also, when the long fluctuation timer value is, for example, 60000 ms (= 60 seconds), the value of the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 or more, the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is 240 Seconds (= 4 × 60 seconds) or more, which is longer than the longest fluctuation time of the special figure 1. In this case, there is no need to execute step A 315 and step A 316 described later, and it is necessary to determine A312 is provided. Therefore, the numeric value "4" in step A312 is a numeric value for determining in advance by the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer whether the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 is longer than the longest variation time of the special figure 1. It is only an example of

  Next, when step A313 is completed, and when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0" (step A311; Y), the process proceeds to step A314, and the special figure 1 to be started from now on If the fluctuation time of (for example, the fluctuation time set in step A306) is the remaining fluctuation time of Tokubo 2 currently fluctuating (the calculation result of step A313 or the Toku 2 game processing timer repeat count is zero) It is determined whether it is shorter than the special figure 2 time determined by the value of the game processing timer (step A 314).

  Then, if the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is not shorter than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 (step A 314; N), prepare a command notifying that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is longer (step A 315) And effect command setting processing (step A316).

  Next, when it is in the high probability (step A308; Y), when it is in the high probability final fluctuation (step A309; Y), when the special figure 2 is not in the fluctuation (step A310; N), the special figure 2 game If the number of repetitions of the processing timer is, for example, "4" or more (step A312; Y), the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is shorter than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 (step A314; Y); If the process ends, the process moves to step A317 (FIG. 22).

  At step A317, the high probability change number update process (step A317) is performed, and “1” is set as the process number (step A318). The processing number, ie, “1” is saved in the game processing number area (step A319), and the customer waiting demonstration flag area which is an area for setting the customer waiting demonstration flag in the RWM is cleared (step A320). After that, save the signal related to the special figure 1 fluctuation start (the special symbol 1 fluctuating signal is on) in the test signal output data area (step A321) and save the fluctuating flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area of RWM ( Step A322) Save the initial value (for example, 100 ms) of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special display 1 symbol display unit 53) in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area of RWM (step A323). In the symbol number area in FIG. 1 variation, an initial value (for example, "0" corresponding to a blank symbol) is saved (step A324), and the special figure 1 variation start process is ended. Note that the reason for saving "0" in the symbol number area during special figure 1 variation in step A324 is to start the variation indication of the special figure 1 from the blank symbol.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special view 2 fluctuation start process (step A 275) in the special view 2 normal process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24. FIG. 23 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of the special view 2 variation start process of the first embodiment; FIG. 24 is a second diagram of the flowchart of the special view 2 variation start process of the first embodiment;

  The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, first, the special figure 2 information setting flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, the special figure 2) is set (step A331), and the second special figure fluctuation display game is A big hit flag 2 setting process (step A332) for setting shift information and big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not it is a big hit is performed.

  Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing (step A 333) according to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (pattern information), the special figure 2 information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern of the special figure 2 The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern which is a table in which information for setting special pattern 2 information setting processing (step A 334) to set is performed and information for referring to various information related to setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special figure fluctuation display game is set. A setting information table is prepared (step A335). After that, special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting processing (step A336) which sets the fluctuation pattern which is fluctuation aspect in 2nd special figure fluctuation display game, is executed, fluctuation start information setting which sets information of fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game A process (step A337) is performed to determine whether the probability state of the special view variable display game is high or not (step A338).

  Then, if it is not in the high probability (step A338; N), it is judged whether or not the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (step A339), and if it is not in the high probability final fluctuation (step A339; N) It is determined whether or not FIG. 1 is changing (during special figure 1 changing display game execution) (step A340). When the special figure 1 is fluctuating (step A340; Y), the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is calculated (step A343). The remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 can be calculated from the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer (the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer area).

  Next, when step A343 is completed, the process proceeds to step A344, and the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 (for example, the fluctuation time set in step A336) to be started from now is the special figure 1 currently being fluctuated. It is determined whether it is shorter than the remaining fluctuation time (the calculation result of step A343) (step A344).

  Then, if the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is not shorter than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 (step A344; N), prepare a command notifying that the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is longer (step A345). And effect command setting processing (step A346).

  Next, if it is in the high probability (step A 338; Y), if it is in the high probability final change (step A 339; Y), if the special figure 1 is not in the change (step A 340; N) If the fluctuation time is shorter than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 (step A344; Y), and if step A346 is finished, the process proceeds to step A347 (FIG. 24).

  At step A347, the high probability change number update process (step A347) is performed, and "1" is set as the process number (step A348), and the special figure 2 is an area for storing the special process 2 game process number in RWM. The processing number, ie, "1" is saved in the game processing number area (step A349), and the customer waiting demonstration flag area which is an area for setting a customer waiting demonstration flag in the RWM is cleared (step A350). After that, save the signal related to the special figure 2 fluctuation start (the special symbol 2 fluctuating signal is on) in the test signal output data area (step A351) and save the fluctuating flag in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area of RWM ( Step A352) Save the initial value (100 ms, for example) of the blinking control timer (the timer of the blinking cycle of the special symbol 2 symbol display unit 54) in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area of RWM (step A353). During the variation, the initial value (for example, "0" corresponding to a blank symbol) is saved in the symbol number area (step A354), and the special figure 2 variation start process is ended. It is to be noted that the reason for saving "0" in the symbol number area during special figure 2 variation in step A354 is to start variation indication of special figure 2 from the blank symbol.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation start information setting process (steps A307 and A337) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above will be described using FIG. 25 and FIG. FIG. 25 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of the variation start information setting process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 26 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating a flowchart of the variation start information setting process according to the first embodiment.

  In the fluctuation start information setting process, first, the information of the random number storage area of the target fluctuation pattern random number 1, the fluctuation pattern random number 2 and the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is cleared. That is, it is determined whether the information setting of the special figure 1 is being performed (step A491), and when the information setting of the special figure 1 is being performed (step A491; Y), the fluctuation pattern random number 1 of the special drawing 1, the fluctuation pattern random number 2 and the information (for holding ball 1) of the random number storage area (for holding ball 1) of fluctuation pattern random number 3 are cleared (step A491a). In addition, when the information setting in the special figure 1 is not being performed (step A 491; N), the information in the random number storage area of the variation pattern random number 1, the variation pattern random number 2 and the variation pattern random number 3 in the special figure 2 is cleared (step A491 b).

  Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (step A492), and the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (step A493). Further, the second half fluctuation time value table is set (step A494), and the second half fluctuation time value corresponding to the second half fluctuation number is acquired (step A495).

  Then, the former half fluctuation time value and the latter half fluctuation time value are added (step A 496), and the added value is the target figure game processing timer area (that is, the special figure 1 game processing timer area during information setting of While the information setting of the special figure 2 is made, the special figure 2 game processing timer area is saved (step A 497).

  Next, it is determined whether the information setting of the special figure 1 is being performed (step A 498), and when the information setting of the special figure 1 is not being performed (step A 498; N), it is determined whether the long fluctuation start of the special figure 2 is (step A499), if it is not the start of the long variation of the special figure 2 (step A499; N), the repeat count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (the area storing the repeat count of the special figure 2 game processing timer in RWM) Save 0 "(step A500).

  On the other hand, if it is the start of the long variation of the special figure 2 (step A 499; Y), “9” is saved in the repetition count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step A 501). Then, when the information setting in the special view 1 is being performed (step A 498; Y), when the processing in steps A 500 and A 501 is finished, the process proceeds to step A 502.

  It should be noted that the number of repetitions (the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer) is set in the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 in order to make the time fluctuation not sufficient with the 2-byte special figure game processing timer. If 60000 ms, for example, is set in the special view 2 game processing timer area in step A 497 as the addition result in step A 496 and “9” is saved as the number of repetitions in step A 501, timer interrupt processing (step A 33 described above) The value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is subtracted, and when the time is up, the number of repetitions of the special figure game processing timer is decremented by 1 in step A36, and 60000 ms is added to the special figure 2 game processing timer area in step A37. Is set. Therefore, in this case, as a result, the total fluctuation time of the special figure 2 becomes a fluctuation time of 10 minutes at 60000 ms × 10 in this embodiment. In fact, since it is a 4 ms timer interrupt, it can be set up to about 262 seconds with 2 bytes, but for ease of understanding, the case where it can be expressed by multiplication of 60 seconds is described as an example.

  Next, in step A502, data (MODE) of the fluctuation command corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is prepared (step A502), and data (ACTION) of the fluctuation command corresponding to the second half fluctuation number is prepared (step A503) And effect command setting processing (step A504).

  Although detailed description is omitted, in the effect command setting process, the prepared command data (MODE and ACTION) are written to the effect serial transmission buffer unless the effect serial transmission buffer is full. As a result, a rendering command composed of the prepared command data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the rendering control device 300 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A in the gaming control device 100. The same applies to the case where the effect command setting process is executed by being called in another step. Further, in the case of this flowchart, the command is transmitted in a 2-byte configuration such as "MODE" and "ACTION" like a rendering command, but it may be configured in more bytes. In those cases, a flowchart corresponding to the multi-byte configuration may be used.

  Next, when step A504 is ended, it is judged whether the information setting of the special figure 1 is being performed (step A505), and when the information setting of the special figure 1 is being performed (step A505; Y) Is updated by “−1” (step A506), the address of the random number storage area of the special figure 1 is set, the random number storage area of the address is shifted (step A507), and the information of the free area after shift is cleared. Then (step A508), the variation start information setting process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the information setting of the special figure 1 is not being performed (step A505; N), the special figure 2 reservation number is updated by “−1” (step A506a), and the address of the random number storage area of the special figure 2 is set. The random number storage area of the address is shifted (step A507a), the information on the free space after the shift is cleared (step A508a), and the variation start information setting process is ended.

  Information on the start of the special view variable display game is set by the above process. That is, the game control device 100 serves as determination means for determining various random number values stored in the start storage means (RAM 111C). Further, the game control apparatus 100 forms a variation pattern determination unit capable of determining a variation pattern of identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  Then, the information on the start of the special view variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 by the effect command setting process described above, and the effect control device 300 based on the reception of the information on the start of the special view variation display game The detailed effect contents in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game are set according to the determined fluctuation pattern, and the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is executed. As information related to the start of these special view variation display games, an ornament special drawing reservation number command including information on the number of starting memories (number of reservations), an ornament special view command including information on stop symbols, variation of the special view variation display game For example, a variation command (sometimes referred to as a variation pattern command) including information related to a pattern may be mentioned, and for example, each effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 in a predetermined order as shown in the flowchart of this embodiment. .

[High probability change frequency update processing]
Next, the details of the high probability change number updating process (steps A317 and A347) in the special view 1 change start process and the special view 2 change start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the high probability variation count update process according to the first embodiment.

  In the high probability variation number updating process, first, it is determined whether the probability state of the special figure variation display game is in the high probability (step A551), and the special figure height probability is not in the process (step A551; N) , High probability change number of times update processing ends.

  In addition, when one of the types of the special figure variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is a big hit game state, the hit probability of the other variation display game is always controlled to a low probability, but one is small In the case of a hit, the other may be in high probability.

  If the probability is high (step A551; Y), the number of times of high probability fluctuation managing the number of times of execution of the special figure fluctuation display game to be in the high probability state is updated by “-1” (step A552). It is determined whether the number is "0" (step A553).

  If the high probability fluctuation number is not "0" (step A553; N), the high probability fluctuation number updating process is ended. If the number of times of high probability change is "0" (step A553; Y), a signal regarding the end of high probability is saved in the external information output data area (step A555). Note that the signal related to the high probability end is a signal that turns off the big hit 2 signal.

  Then, a signal relating to the end of the high probability & short time (high probability & short or no high probability & short) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A 556). In addition, the signal about the end of the high probability & time short is the signal to turn off the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the signal to turn off the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal off A signal to turn on, a signal to turn off the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal, and a signal to turn off the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal. Further, even in the special figure high probability, only the probability state changes in the common drawing, so the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal and the normal electric utility 1 open extension state signal are always off.

  Then, save the number in the low probability in the gaming state display number area (step A 557), save the special figure low probability & time saving none flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step A 559), start changing symbols (special The high probability final change flag corresponding to FIG. 1 or the special figure 2) is set (step A 560), and the high probability change number update process is ended.

  The high probability final change flag includes information that can determine the type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the special figure variation display game that is the high probability final variation. In addition, since the internal probability becomes low probability at the start of fluctuation in high probability final fluctuation, the information to show that it is fluctuation started in high probability even if it is low probability now is high It is a probability final change flag. As described above, in the case of the present embodiment, in the high probability final change, the probability state (the set state in the game control apparatus 100) of the target special figure is returned to the low probability at the change start time. Thus, when the gaming ball wins the starting opening during the final round in the high probability state, it is possible to prevent the problem that the hit determination for the starting winning will be determined with high probability.

[Process during special figure 1 change]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 during fluctuation process (step A9) in the special figure 1 game process described above will be described using FIG. 28 and FIG. FIG. 28 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 1 during variation processing of the first embodiment; FIG. 29 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the special figure 1 during variation processing of the first embodiment.

  In the special figure 1 fluctuation process, first, the number of times of symbol determination number output is updated by “+1” (step A 571), and the decorative special figure 1 command area from the command area (special figure 1 including information of stop symbol about special figure 1) The command is loaded and prepared (step A572), and effect command setting processing (step A573) is performed.

  Next, the decoration special figure 1 stop command (pattern stop command about special figure 1) is prepared (step A 574), the rendering command setting process (step A 575) is performed, and the final high probability final state according to the state of high probability final variation flag It is determined whether or not there is a change (step A576). And, if it is not the high probability final change (step A 576; N), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern saved in the stop symbol pattern area in the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process The display time at the time of the high probability final change is set as the stop display time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game of the present case in the case of the high probability final change (step A576; Y). The setting is made (step A578), and the process proceeds to step A579. Here, the stop display time set in steps A577 and A578 is saved in the special view 1 game processing timer area, for example, in a step (not shown) provided immediately before step A579.

  In the case of the first embodiment, if the stop symbol pattern is a detached symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time, and the stop symbol pattern is a big hit symbol pattern. In some cases, 2000 ms is set as the display time, and 136 ms is set as the display time if the stop symbol pattern is a small hit symbol pattern. In addition, the display time of the high probability final fluctuation is set to 7000 ms.

  Next, when the process proceeds to step A579 (FIG. 29), it is determined whether or not the current (currently running) special figure 1 fluctuation display game is released based on the information determined and set in the big hit flag 1 setting processing. (Step A579), in the case of detachment (Step A579; Y), the process proceeds to Step A 594, and in the case of no detachment (Step A 579; N), the special figure 2 is also changing (special figure 2 variation display game being executed) It is determined whether there is any (step A 580).

  It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the special figure 2 is fluctuating should be made by any of the information of the special figure 2 game processing number area, the information of the special figure status area or the information of the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area Can. In other words, if "1" is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area, it may be determined that it is in the changing state. If the special figure 2 changing state is set in the special figure status area, it is determined that it is in the changing state. It may be a configuration, it may be a configuration in which it is determined that a variation flag is saved in the special figure 2 variation control flag region, or a configuration in which it is determined by a combination of these conditions.

  Then, when the special figure 2 is also changing (step A 580; Y), it is judged whether the process is being executed during the special figure 2 display (step A 581) and the special figure 2 is not being executed. In the case (step A 581; N), the number of times of symbol determination number output is updated by “+1” (step A 582).

  Next, when step A 582 is ended, and the special figure 2 display processing is being executed (step A 581; Y), the display time of the present special figure 1 (the time set in step A 577 etc.) For example, the result obtained by adding 4 ms is set as the display time of Toku-zu 2 (step A583), and the display time of Toku-zu 2 is saved in the Toku 2 game processing timer area (step A584). When the special view 2 has already started the stop display, the display time of the special view 2 is reset by the processing of steps A583 and A584. By this resetting, the display time of the special view 2 is basically extended, but in some cases it may be shortened.

  After that, a command (the decoration special figure 2 command including information on the stop symbol about the special drawing 2) is loaded from the decoration special figure 2 command area, prepared (step A585), and effect command setting processing (step A586) is performed. Next, the decoration special figure 2 stop command (pattern stop command about special figure 2) is prepared (step A 587), the rendering command setting process (step A 588) is performed, and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 (step A) Do A589).

  In addition, according to the processing of steps A579 to A589 described above, if the present special figure 1 fluctuation display game for stopping and displaying the decorative symbol is hit (big hit or small hit) from now on, the special figure being changed at the same time It will end the fluctuation display of 2 forcibly.

  Next, when step A 589 is finished and special figure 2 is not changing (step A 580; N), the command is loaded from the decorative special figure 1 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step A 590) Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game this time is a small hit (step A591).

  And when it is a big hit and not a small hit (step A591; N), in order to control the big hit game after the special figure 1 fluctuation end, information from the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area (special figure 1 round number Determine the upper limit value. Load the special figure 1 round number upper limit information), save it in the round number upper limit information area (step A 592), load information from the special figure 1 large winning opening opening information area, and open special winning opening Save in the information area (step A593).

  Next, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game of this time is disengaging (step A579; Y) and the special figure 1 fluctuation display game of this time is a small hit (step A591; Y), step A593 is ended. If it is, the process moves to step A 594. When the process proceeds to step A594, information (stop symbol number) is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol saving area, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step A594). A595) is carried out, and the special figure 1 during fluctuation processing is ended. In the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area, a predetermined stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process.

  As described above, the game control apparatus 100 functions as stop time setting means for setting the stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. Further, when the variable display game based on the first start memory has a special result (hit), the game control device 100 serves as means for ending the variable display game based on the second start memory currently being executed.

[Special figure 2 during processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 during variation process (step A49) in the special figure 2 game process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 30 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of processing during variation of the special view 2 of the first embodiment. FIG. 31 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 2 during variation processing of the first embodiment;

  In the special figure 2 fluctuation process, first, the number of times of symbol determination number output is updated by “+1” (step A601), and the special figure 2 command area from the command area (special figure 2 including stop symbol information about special figure 2) The command is loaded and prepared (step A602), and effect command setting processing (step A603) is performed.

  Next, the decoration special figure 2 stop command (pattern stop command about special figure 2) is prepared (step A604), the rendering command setting process (step A605) is performed, and the final state of the high probability final variation flag It is determined whether or not there is a change (step A606). And, if it is not the high probability final change (step A 606; N), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern saved in the stop symbol pattern area in the special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process The display time at the time of the high probability final fluctuation is set as the stop display time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the case of the high probability final fluctuation (step A606; Y). The setting is made (step A608), and the process proceeds to step A609. Here, the stop display time set in steps A 607 and A 608 is saved in the special view 2 game processing timer area, for example, in a step (not shown) provided immediately before step A 609.

  In the case of the first embodiment, if the stop symbol pattern is a detached symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time, and the stop symbol pattern is a big hit symbol pattern, for example. Even in the case where there is a display time of 600 ms, the display time is set to 600 ms even when the stop design pattern is a small hit design pattern. In addition, the display time of the high probability final fluctuation is set to 7000 ms. In addition, in the case of the first embodiment, the same display time is set for the stop symbol pattern by the removal symbol pattern, the big hit symbol pattern, and the small hit symbol pattern, but different display times may be set.

  Next, when the process proceeds to step A 609 (FIG. 31), it is determined whether or not the current (currently running) special figure 2 fluctuation display game is released based on the information determined and set in the big hit flag 2 setting process. (Step A 609), if it is dislocated (Step A 609; Y), it proceeds to Step A 624, and if it is not dislocated (Step A 609; N), currently the special figure 1 is also fluctuating (special figure 2 fluctuating display game being executed) It is determined whether there is any (step A610).

  It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the special figure 1 is fluctuating should be performed by any of the information of the special figure 1 game processing number area, the information of the special figure status area, or the information of the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area. Can. In other words, if "1" is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area, it may be determined that it is in the changing state, or if the special figure 1 in the changing state is set in the special figure status area It may be a configuration, it may be a configuration in which it is determined that a variation flag is saved in the special figure 1 variation control flag area, or a configuration in which it is determined by a combination of these conditions.

  Then, if the special figure 1 is also changing (step A610; Y), it is judged whether the special figure 1 display process is being executed (step A611) and the special figure 1 display process is not being executed. In the case (step A611; N), the number of times of symbol determination number output is updated by "+1" (step A612).

  Next, when step A 612 is ended, and when the special figure 1 display processing is being executed (step A 611; Y), the display time of the current special figure 2 (the time set in step A 607 etc.) For example, the result obtained by adding 4 ms is set as the display time of the special view 1 (step A613), and the display time of the special view 1 is saved in the special view 1 game processing timer area (step A614). When the special view 1 has already started the stop display, the display time of the special view 1 is reset by the processing of the steps A613 and A614. By this resetting, the display time of the special view 1 is basically extended, but in some cases it may be shortened.

  After that, a command (decorative special figure 1 command including information on stop symbol about special figure 1) is loaded from the decorative special figure 1 command area, prepared (step A615), and effect command setting processing (step A616) is performed. Next, a decoration special figure 1 stop command (pattern stop command for special figure 1) is prepared (step A 617), a rendering command setting process (step A 618) is performed, and a special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 (step Do A619).

  In addition, according to the processing of the steps A 609 to A 619 described above, if the present special figure 2 fluctuation display game for stopping and displaying the decorative symbol is hit (big hit or small hit) from now on, the special figure being changed simultaneously. It will end the fluctuation display of 1 forcibly.

  Next, when step A619 is finished, and special figure 1 is not changing (step A610; N), the command is loaded from the decoration special figure 2 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step A620) Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game this time is a small hit (step A621).

  And, if it is a big hit and not a small hit (step A 621; N), information from the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area to control the big hit game after the special figure 2 change end (special figure 2 round number Determine the upper limit value. Load the special figure 2 round number upper limit information), save in the round number upper limit information area (step A 622), load information from the special figure 2 large winning opening opening information area, and open the special winning opening Save in the information area (step A623).

  Next, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game of this time is disengaging (step A609; Y) and when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game of this time is a small hit (step A621; Y), step A623 is ended. In the case, the process moves to step A624. At step A624, information (stop symbol number) is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol saving area, and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step A624), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (step A625) is performed, and the special figure 2 in process of variation is ended. In the special figure 2 stop symbol evacuation area, a predetermined stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process.

  As described above, the game control apparatus 100 functions as stop time setting means for setting the stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. Further, when the variable display game based on the second start memory has a special result (hit), the game control device 100 serves as means for ending the variable display game based on the first start memory currently being executed.

[Special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the processing for setting transition to processing during special processing 1 (step A 595) in the processing during special processing 1 during the above-mentioned special processing 1 fluctuation processing will be described using FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a flowchart of processing transition setting processing 1 during display of the special view 1 of the first embodiment.

  In the special process 1 display process transition setting process 1, first, the process number "2" relating to the special figure 1 display process is set as the process number (step A631), and the special process 1 game process number area Save the number, ie "2" (step A632).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the special figure 1 fluctuation is saved in the test signal output data area (step A633). In addition, the signal regarding the special figure 1 fluctuation end is a signal which turns off the signal during special symbol 1 fluctuation.

  After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 variation display game in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, save the stop flag related to the variation stop in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 in the special figure 1 variation control flag area Step A634), special processing 1 being displayed processing transition setting processing 1 ends.

[Special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the special processing 2 during display processing transition setting processing 1 (step A 625) in the special processing 2 during fluctuation processing described above will be described using FIG. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a flowchart of processing transition setting processing 1 during a special view 2 display of the first embodiment.

  In special processing 2 display processing transition setting processing 1, first, the processing number "2" which is processing number concerning the special processing 2 display processing is set as the processing number (step A641), the special processing 2 game processing number area Save the number "2" (step A 642).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the special figure 2 fluctuation is saved in the test signal output data area (step A643). In addition, the signal regarding the special figure 2 fluctuation end is a signal which turns off the signal during special symbol 2 fluctuation.

  After that, as information for controlling the special figure 2 variation display game in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, save the stop flag related to the variation stop in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 in the special figure 2 variation control flag area ( Step A644), special processing 2 display processing transition setting processing 1 ends.

[Special figure 1 display processing transition setting process 2]
Next, details of the special processing 1 during special processing 1 display in special processing 2 during fluctuation processing described above (step A619) will be described using FIG. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a flowchart of processing transition setting processing 2 during display of the special view 1 of the first embodiment. It should be noted that when the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 is a hit when the special figure 2 variation display game which has started variation is a hit, the special figure 1 variation display game which is simultaneously changing is forcibly ended with a break It is processing to make it happen. That is, it is a process for information setting when it is forcibly stopped by having hit the other pattern.

  In the special process 1 process transition setting process 2, first, the process number "2" relating to the special figure 1 process is set as the process number (step A651), and the special process 1 game process number area Save the number "2" (step A652).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the special figure 1 fluctuation is saved in the test signal output data area (step A653). In addition, the signal regarding the special figure 1 fluctuation end is a signal which turns off the signal during special symbol 1 fluctuation.

  After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 variation display game in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, save the stop flag related to the variation stop in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 in the special figure 1 variation control flag area Step A654) The off stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (the area for storing the stop symbol pattern in the RWM) (step A655). In this stop symbol pattern area, a special stop symbol pattern (usually depending on the extracted random number in the stop symbol pattern of the hit in the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process) is usually already performed for the special view 1 fluctuation display game under execution. In some cases, the saved symbol pattern is saved, but here, even if the saved symbol pattern saved is a hit, it is forcibly rewritten to the missing symbol pattern. Similarly, in the subsequent steps A 656 to 661 of this routine, even if there is data once set in the normal step, it is cleared or reset for forced termination at the end.

  Next, clear the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area (area for storing special figure 1 round number upper limit information in RWM) (step A 656), and special figure 1 large winning opening opening information area (special figure in RWM 1) Clear the area where the big winning opening opening information is stored (step A657), and save the shift information in the small hitting flag 1 area (step A658). Deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (step A659). Here, the small hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 1 area are the small hit flag area and the big hit flag area for the special figure 1, and the information on whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is the small hit or not This is an area of the RWM for storing each item of information, and the information is normally set in the big hit flag 1 setting process, and the information is set again here.

  Next, clear the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area (step A 660), save the shift stop symbol number in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step A 661), and end the processing transition setting process 2 during special figure 1 display. .

[Special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2]
Next, the details of the special processing 2 during display processing transition setting processing 2 (step A 589) in the special processing 1 during fluctuation processing described above will be described using FIG. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a flowchart of processing transition setting processing 2 during display of the special view 2 of the first embodiment. The process transition setting process 2 during the special figure 2 display forcibly ends the special figure 2 variation display game which is simultaneously varying when the special figure 1 variation display game which has started variation is a hit. It is processing to make it happen. That is, it is a process for information setting when it is forcibly stopped by having hit the other pattern.

  In the special processing 2 display processing transition setting processing 2, first, the processing number "2" relating to the special processing 2 display processing is set as the processing number (step A671), and the processing in the special processing 2 game processing number area Save the number "2" (step A672).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the special figure 2 fluctuation is saved in the test signal output data area (step A673). In addition, the signal regarding the special figure 2 fluctuation end is a signal which turns off the signal during special symbol 2 fluctuation.

  After that, as information for controlling the special figure 2 variation display game in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, save the stop flag related to the variation stop in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 in the special figure 2 variation control flag area ( Step A674) The off stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (the area for storing the stop symbol pattern in the RWM) (step A675). In this stop symbol pattern area, a special stop symbol pattern in the special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process (usually depending on the extracted random number is a stop symbol pattern of the hit in the special symbol 2 change display game under execution). In some cases, the saved symbol pattern is saved, but here, even if the saved symbol pattern saved is a hit, it is forcibly rewritten to the missing symbol pattern. Similarly, in the subsequent steps A 676 to 681 of this routine, even if there is data once set in the normal step, they are cleared or reset for forced termination at the end.

  Next, clear the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area (area to store special figure 2 round number upper limit value information in RWM) (step A 676), and special figure 2 large winning opening opening information area (special figure in RWM 2) Clear the area where the big winning opening opening information is stored (step A677), and save the shift information in the small hitting flag 2 area (step A678). Deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area (step A679). Here, the small hit flag 2 area and the big hit flag 2 area are the small hit flag area and the big hit flag area for the special figure 2, and the information on whether the special figure 2 variation display game is the small hit or not or the big hit This is an area of the RWM for storing the respective information, and the information is normally set in the big hit flag 2 setting process, and the information is set again here.

  Next, clear the special figure 2 stop symbol evacuation area (step A 680), save the shift stop symbol number in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step A 681), and end the processing shift setting process 2 during the special figure 2 display. .

[Process while displaying special figure 1]
Next, details of the special figure 1 in-display process (step A10) in the special figure 1 game process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 36 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of a special view 1 in display processing of the first embodiment; FIG. 37 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of a special view 1 in display processing of the first embodiment; FIG. 38 is a diagram (No. 3) illustrating a flowchart of the special view 1 display processing of the first embodiment;

  In the special figure 1 display process, first, the small hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A 701), and the information of the small hit flag 1 area of RWM is It clears (step A702).

  Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A703), and the information on the big hit flag 1 area of RWM is cleared (step A704). Then, it is judged whether or not the big hit flag 1 loaded is a big hit (step A 705), and if it is determined that it is a big hit (step A 705; Y), a big hit of the first special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1) Save the signal related to the start of the big hit) in the test signal output data area of RWM (step A706), prepare the special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation command (step A707), perform the rendering command setting process (step A708) An upper limit table is set (step A709). In addition, the signal about the start of the special figure 1 big hit is a signal to turn on the signal during the condition device operation, a signal to turn on the item continuous action device operation, and a signal to turn the signal per special symbol 1 Including.

  Next, after setting the number-of-rounds upper limit table (step A709), the number-of-rounds upper limit corresponding to the number-of-rounds upper limit information (for example, “16” or “4” in the first embodiment, other, for example, “8” or “2” may be obtained and saved in the RWM round number upper limit value area (step A 710). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A711).

  Next, an ornament special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the hit symbol command area of the RWM and prepared (step A712), and effect command setting processing (step A713) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A714), and effect command setting process (step A715) is performed. .

  Next, a signal corresponding to the special winning opening open information and the probability of being hit in the common view variation display game and the special view variation display game is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A716). In the case of the first embodiment, in step A716, the big hit 2 signal and the big hit 3 signal are saved as signals corresponding to the state of the big winning opening opening information and the probability. In addition, each on / off is decided by the state of the special winning opening opening information and the probability. For example, the big hit 2 signal is turned on if it is a big hit other than 2R hit, it is turned on if it is 2R hit big in high probability, and it is turned off if it is 2R hit big hit in low probability. Also, the big hit 3 signal is turned on if it is a big hit other than 2R hit, it is turned off if it is 2R hit in high probability, and it is turned on if it is 2R hit in low probability.

  Thereafter, the big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 4700 ms, 7700 ms, or 300 ms) corresponding to the big winning opening information is set (step A717), and the set big hit fan time is saved in the special processing 1 game processing timer area Step A718) It is determined whether or not it is a big hit for opening the large winning opening (special variation winning device 38) (step A719).

  If it is a big hit of the opening of the large winning prize opening (step A719; Y), clear the information of the upper winning a prize opening illegal winning number area (step A720) Are saved (step A721), and the process proceeds to step A724.

  On the other hand, if it is not a big hit for opening the upper prize winning opening (Step A 719; N), clear the information on the lower winning prize opening fraud winning number area (Step A 722) and monitor the fraud for the lower winning prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area. The out-of-period flag is saved (step A723), and the process proceeds to step A724.

  At step A724, 3 is set as the process number (step A724), the process number, ie, "3" is saved in the special view 1 game process number area (step A725), and fanfare / interval process transition setting process (step A 726) is performed, and the special figure 1 display processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit in step A705 (step A705; N), it is judged whether the loaded small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A727), the small hit flag 1 is small When it is determined to be a hit (step A 727; Y), it is determined whether or not the high probability final change is in progress (step A 728).

  Then, when it is determined in step A728 that the high probability final fluctuation is being performed (step A728; Y), the probability of becoming a hit result in the common drawing fluctuation display game and the special drawing fluctuation display game is set to the normal probability state ( The probability information command related to the information to be in the low probability state) is prepared (step A729), and the rendering command setting process (step A730) is performed. Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area for saving the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of the power failure recovery (step A731), and the right strike instruction notification flag is cleared (step A731) A732). In addition, step A732 assumes a mode in which a right-handed command notification is made in the high probability state, and since the high-probability state is determined as the high-probability final variation, the right-handed command notification flag is cleared. It is illustrated. However, if the present embodiment is a mode that does not issue a right-handed instruction notification in the high probability state, step A732 deletes the configuration (or left-handed instruction notification in the high probability state and performs the left-handed instruction notification in step A732 There may be an aspect in which the flag is cleared).

  Next, when step A732 ends and high probability final fluctuation is not in progress (step A728; N), the command is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared (step A733), rendering command setting processing (step A733) Do A734). Subsequently, a small hit fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A735), and the effect command setting process (step A736) It is determined whether or not the gaming state is a predetermined state to be hit to the left (for example, a state which is not in the general power support state, the big hit or the special mode) (step A737).

  If it is determined in step A737 that the predetermined state is to be left-handed (step A737; Y), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A738). The signal relating to the left-handed command is, for example, a signal for turning off the shooting position designation signal 1. Next, in order to extinguish the display LED in the right strike, the number in the left strike state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A739), and the process proceeds to step A742.

  On the other hand, when it is not determined that the predetermined state is to be left-handed (step A737; N), the signal regarding the right-handed command is saved in the test signal output data area (step A740). The signal relating to the right-handed command is, for example, a signal that turns on the emission position designation signal 1. Next, in order to light the display LED in the right strike, the game state display number 2 area is saved with the number in the right strike state (step A741), and the process proceeds to step A742.

  If it transfers to step A742, it will be determined whether it is a small hit which opens upper large winning a prize opening (special change winning a prize device 38) (step A742). If it is a small hit of the opening of the large winning prize opening (step A742; Y), clear the information of the upper winning a prize opening fraud winning number area (step A743), outside the fraud monitoring period in the upper winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area The flag is saved (step A744), and the process goes to step A747.

  On the other hand, if it is not a small hit of opening the upper large winning a prize opening (step A742; N), clear the information of the lower large winning a prize opening incorrect winning number area (step A745) The out-of-monitoring period flag is saved (step A746), and the process proceeds to step A747.

  When the process proceeds to step A747, the special figure 1 small hit fanfare medium middle process transition setting process (step A747) is performed, and the special figure 1 display process is ended. In the special figure 1 small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process, a process to save "7" as a process number in the special figure 1 game process number area, small hit fanfare time in the special figure 1 game process timer area (for example, 4 ms) Processing etc) to save

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A727 that the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step A727; N), it is determined whether or not the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (step A748).
Then, when it is determined in step A 748 that the high probability final fluctuation is being performed (step A 748; Y), the probability of becoming a hit result in the common drawing fluctuation display game and the special drawing fluctuation display game is the normal probability state ( A probability information command relating to information to be in the low probability state) is prepared (step A 749), and rendering command setting processing (step A 750) is performed. Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area for saving the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of the power failure recovery (step A751), and the right-handed command notification flag is cleared (step A 752), it is determined whether or not the special view 2 variation display game is middle hit (middle hit or middle hit) (step A 753). Note that step A 752 is just an example that assumes an aspect in which a right-handed indication is issued in the high probability state, as in the above-described step A 732.

  Next, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation display game is not hitting (step A 753; N), the signal relating to the left hitting instruction (fire position designation signal 1 is off) is saved in the test signal output data area ( Step A754) In order to turn off the display LED in the right strike, save the number in the left strike state in the gaming state display number 2 area (Step A755). In the present embodiment, when the special figure 2 variable display game is middle hit (middle hit or small hit middle), the upper prize winning opening (special variation winning device 38) opened at that time is aimed at and right Since it is in a state to be hit, when the special figure 2 is hit (step A753; Y), it passes step A754 and A755 and shifts to step A756. In addition, also when step A755 ends, it moves to step A756.

  Then, when it moves to step A756, it clears (subtracts information) information showing that special figure 1 is moving in the special figure status area in RWM (during special figure 1 fluctuation display game) (step A756), special figure 1 game The process number relating to the special figure 1 normal process, ie, "0" is saved in the process number area (step A757), and the special figure 1 display process is ended. When step A 756 is executed, the special view status is in a state in which only the special view 2 is in a change state, or in a state in which neither the special view 1 nor the special view 2 is in a change state.

[Process during special figure 2 display]
Next, details of the special figure 2 in-display process (step A50) in the special figure 2 game process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 39 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of processing during display of a special view 2 of the first embodiment. FIG. 40 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the special view 2 in display processing of the first embodiment; FIG. 41 is a diagram (No. 3) showing a flowchart of the special view 2 in display processing of the first embodiment;

  In the special figure 2 display process, first, the small hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A 761), and the information of the small hit flag 2 area of RWM is It clears (step A762).

  Next, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special view 2 variation start process is loaded (step A 763), and the information on the big hit flag 2 area of RWM is cleared (step A 764). Then, it is judged whether or not the big hit flag 2 loaded is a big hit (step A 765), and when it is determined that it is a big hit (step A 765; Y), the big hit of the second special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 2) Save the signal related to the start of the big hit) in the test signal output data area of RWM (step A766), prepare the special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation command (step A767), perform the rendering command setting process (step A768) An upper limit table is set (step A769). In addition, the signal about the start of the special figure 2 big hit is the signal which turns on the signal during condition device operation, the signal which turns on the character continuous operation device operation signal, and the signal which turns on the special symbol 2 signal. Including.

  Next, after setting the round number upper limit table (step A769), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information (in the case of the first embodiment, for example, “16” or “4”, others, for example) “8” or “2” may be obtained and saved in the RWM round number upper limit value area (step A 770). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A 771).

  Next, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the hit special drawing command area of the RWM, prepared (step A772), and effect command setting processing (step A773) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special view 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A774), and effect command setting process (step A775) is performed. .

  Next, a signal corresponding to the special winning opening open information and the probability of being hit in the common view variation display game and the special view variation display game is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A776). In the case of the first embodiment, in step A776, the big hit 2 signal and the big hit 3 signal are saved as signals corresponding to the state of the big winning opening opening information and the probability. In addition, each on / off is decided by the state of the special winning opening opening information and the probability. For example, the big hit 2 signal is turned on if it is a big hit other than 2R hit, it is turned on if it is 2R hit big in high probability, and it is turned off if it is 2R hit big hit in low probability. Also, the big hit 3 signal is turned on if it is a big hit other than 2R hit, it is turned off if it is 2R hit in high probability, and it is turned on if it is 2R hit in low probability.

  Thereafter, the big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 4700 ms, 7700 ms, or 300 ms) corresponding to the big winning opening information is set (step A 777), and the set big hit fan fare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area Step A778) It is judged whether or not it is a big hit to open the top prize winning opening (special variation winning device 38) (step A779).

  If it is a big hit for opening the big winning opening (step A 779; Y), clear the information on the upper winning opening fraudulent winning number area (step A 780), flag over fraudulent monitoring period flag area for upper winning prize opening fraud flag Are saved (step A 781), and the process proceeds to step A 784.

  On the other hand, if it is not a big hit for opening the upper prize winning opening (step A 779; N), clear the information on the lower winning prize opening incorrect winning number area (step A 782) and monitor illegally in the lower winning prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area. The out-of-period flag is saved (step A783), and the process proceeds to step A784.

  At step A784, 3 is set as the process number (step A784), and the process number, ie, "3" is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step A785), fanfare / interval process transition setting process (step A786) is performed, and the special figure 2 display processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit in step A765 (step A765; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A787) and the small hit flag 2 is small When it is determined to be a hit (step A 787; Y), it is determined whether or not the high probability final change is in progress (step A 788).

  Then, if it is determined in step A 788 that the high probability final fluctuation is being performed (step A 788; Y), the probability of becoming a hit result in the common drawing fluctuation display game and the special drawing fluctuation display game is the normal probability state ( The probability information command related to the information to be in the low probability state) is prepared (step A 789), and the rendering command setting process (step A 790) is performed. Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area for saving the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of the power failure recovery (step A791), and the right-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step A 792). In addition, step A 792 assumes a mode in which a right-handed command notification is made in the high probability state, and since the high-probability state is determined as the high-probability final variation, the right-handed command notification flag is cleared. It is illustrated. However, if the present embodiment is a mode that does not issue a right-handed command notification in the high probability state, step A792 deletes the configuration (or left-handed command notification in the high probability state and performs the left-handed command notification in step A792 There may be an aspect in which the flag is cleared).

  Next, when step A 792 is finished and when the high probability final change is not in progress (step A 788; N), the command is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared (step A 793), effect command setting processing (step Do A794). Subsequently, a small hit fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special view 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A795), and the effect command setting process (step A796) It is determined whether or not the gaming state is a predetermined state to be hit to the left (for example, a state that is not in the general power support state, the jackpot, or the special mode) (step A 797).

  If it is determined in step A 797 that the predetermined state is to be left-handed (step A 797; Y), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A 798). The signal relating to the left-handed command is, for example, a signal for turning off the shooting position designation signal 1. Next, in order to extinguish the display LED in the right strike, the number in the left strike state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A799), and the process proceeds to step A802.

  On the other hand, when it is not determined that the predetermined state is to be left-handed (step A 797; N), the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A 800). The signal relating to the right-handed command is, for example, a signal that turns on the emission position designation signal 1. Next, in order to light the display LED in the right strike, the game state display number 2 area is saved with the number in the right strike state (step A801), and the process proceeds to step A802.

  If it transfers to step A802, it will be determined whether it is a small hit which opens upper large winning a prize opening (special change winning a prize device 38) (step A802). If it is a small hit of the opening of the large winning prize opening (step A802; Y), clear the information of the upper winning a prize opening fraud winning number area (step A803), outside the fraud monitoring period in the upper winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area The flag is saved (step A804), and the process proceeds to step A807.

  On the other hand, if it is not a small winning of the opening of the large winning opening (step A802; N), clear the information of the lower winning opening unfair winning number area (step A805), incorrect in the lower winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area The out-of-monitoring period flag is saved (step A806), and the process proceeds to step A807.

  If it transfers to step A807, special figure 2 small hitting fanfare medium middle processing migration processing setting processing (step A807) is done, the special figure 2 display processing is ended. In the special figure 2 small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process, a process to save "7" as the process number in the special figure 2 game process number area, small hit fanfare time in the special figure 2 game process timer area (for example, 4 ms) Processing etc) to save

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A787 that the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step A787; N), it is determined whether or not the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (step A808).
Then, if it is determined in step A808 that the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (step A808; Y), the probability of becoming a hit result in the common drawing fluctuation display game and the special drawing fluctuation display game is a normal probability state ( The probability information command related to the information to be in the low probability state) is prepared (step A809), and the rendering command setting process (step A810) is performed. Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area for saving the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of the power failure recovery (step A811), and the right-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step A812), it is determined whether or not the special view 1 fluctuation display game is a big hit (step A813). Note that step A 812 is merely an example assuming a mode in which a right-handed indication is issued in the high probability state, as in the above-described step A 792.

  Next, when it is determined that the special view 1 variation display game is not a big hit (step A 813; N), the signal related to the left hitting instruction (fire position designation signal 1 is off) is saved in the test signal output data area ( Step A814) In order to turn off the display LED during the right hitting, the number in the left hitting state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A815). In the present embodiment, when the special view 1 variation display game is in the middle of a big hit, it will be in a state to hit the upper large winning opening (special variation winning device 38) opened at that time If the special figure 1 is a big hit (step A 813; Y), it passes steps A 814 and A 815 and shifts to step A 816. Further, in the present embodiment, when the special view 1 variation display game is in a small hit, it is in a state to hit the left with the lower large winning opening (special variation winning device 95) opened at that time. If the special figure 1 is not big hit (step A813; N) (including the case where the special figure 1 is small hit), the process proceeds to step A816 after performing steps A814 and A815. However, the processing content regarding such a right-handed-left-handling changes depending on the board configuration and game characteristics of the gaming machine, and is merely an example. Here, also when step A815 ends, the process proceeds to step A816.

  And if it transfers to step A816, the information which shows during special figure 2 fluctuation (special figure 2 fluctuation display game being executed) in the special figure status area in RWM is cleared (information subtraction) (step A816), special figure 2 game The process number relating to the special figure 2 normal process, that is, "0" is saved in the process number area (step A817), and the special figure 2 display process is ended. When step A 816 is executed, the special view status is in a state in which only the special view 1 is in a change state, or the special view 1 or the special view 2 is not in a change state.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S134) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 42 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of the external information editing process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 43 is a second diagram of the external information editing process according to the first embodiment.

  In the external information editing process, the payout command transmission process (step S125), winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step S128), magnet fraud monitoring process (step S132) and board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S133) Based on the information collecting terminal, external equipment such as the game arcade internal control device, and information to be output to the test shot testing device are created and set in the output buffer.

  In the external information editing process, first, information is set in accordance with an error state or a security state. In the process of setting information according to the error state or the security state, the door / frame is in the process of setting the glass frame opening error (step C71; Y) or when the main body frame opening error is being generated (step C72; Y) The on data of the release signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C73), and the on data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step C74). That is, the occurrence of the glass frame opening error and the body frame opening error is output as external information and a test signal.

  On the other hand, when neither glass frame open error nor main frame open error occurs (steps C71 to C72; N), the off data of the door / frame open signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C75) Save the off data of the security signal in the external information output data area (step C76).

  Next, if the security signal control timer, which measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by the operation of the initialization switch, etc. is not "0", the "-1" is updated. (Step C77). The minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step C78).

  If the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step C78; N), that is, if the time is not up, the on data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C79). On the other hand, if the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step C78; Y), that is, if the time is up, the process of step C79 is passed. That is, from the time when the security signal control timer saves the initial value (for example, 256 ms) to the initialization of the data stored in the RAM in the main process described above and until the security signal control timer times out The on data of the security signal is output as external information.

  Next, during magnet fraud (step C80; Y), during board radio wave fraud (step C81; Y), during frame radio wave fraud (step C82; Y), during big winning opening fraud (step C83; Y) Or when special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurs (step C84; Y), save ON data of security signal in external information output data area (step C85), test signal output of ON data of gaming machine error status signal Save in the data area (step C86). Even in the case where the common electric power is fraudulent, similarly, the on data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C85), and the on data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area. (Step C86) It is good also as composition.

  On the other hand, if none of the magnet fraud, board radio wave fraud, frame radio wave fraud, common electric power fraud, big winning prize fraud, or special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation has occurred (step C80 to C84; N), switch abnormality 1 or It is judged whether the switch abnormality 2 of switch abnormality 2 is occurring or not (step C87). If no switch abnormality is occurring (step C87; N), the off data of the gaming machine error state signal is output as a test signal Save in the data area (step C88).

  Then, if any switch abnormality is occurring (step C87; Y), the on data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step C86). Here, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation, switch abnormality and the like are abnormalities monitored in the winning opening switch / state monitoring process in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, after finishing step C86 or C88, in the external information editing process, the winning signal (starting opening 1 signal) of starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36 which is the starting winning opening of special figure 1 and normal fluctuation winning device 37) Start opening 1 signal editing process (step C89) to edit the winning signal (starting opening 2 signal) of starting opening 2 (starting winning opening 92 which is the starting winning opening of special figure 2) starting opening 2 A signal editing process (step C90) is performed. Subsequently, main prize ball signal editing processing (step C91) is performed to edit the main prize ball signal related to the prize ball number to be paid out, and the symbol determination number signal is generated based on the symbol determination number output number (pattern determination number signal output number). The symbol determination frequency signal editing process (step C92) is performed to edit the, and the external information editing process is ended.

[Main processing]
Next, the main processing of the effect control device 300 will be described using FIG. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a flowchart of main processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment.

The main process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300 when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is started.
[Step D11] The control unit prohibits an interrupt.

[Step D12] The control unit performs initial setting of the CPU 311.
[Step D13] The control unit initializes the VDP 312.
[Step D14] The control unit permits an interrupt.

  [Step D15] The control unit permits display data generation. That is, the control unit accesses a display circuit (not shown) in the VDP 312 to a VRAM (not shown) in the VDP 312 and permits generation of display data.

  [Step D16] The control unit sets a random number seed. This is processing for setting a pseudo-random number generation sequence using, for example, the srand function. Here, the control unit may use a fixed value such as 0 (zero) as an argument given to the srand function, or uses a value created based on the ID value of the CPU etc. so as to be different for each gaming machine. You may

  [Step D17] The control unit is an area to be initialized in the RWM (for example, the RAM 322) of the effect control apparatus 300 (for example, a flag area for effect (storage area used as various flags described later in the control process of the effect control apparatus 300)). Save the initial value at power on.

[Step D18] The control unit clears WDT (watchdog timer).
[Step D19] The control unit executes effect button input processing. The effect button input process is a process for performing editing when the effect button (the selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b) is operated when it is activated. In addition, since the effect button is not turned on and off at high speed, the control unit may perform processing for detecting input of the effect button within the effect button input processing, or may be performed within a short-period timer interrupt (not shown). Good.

  [Step D20] The control unit executes hall / player setting mode processing. The hall / player setting mode process is a process for receiving operations such as setting of changeable ranges such as the brightness of the LED and the display device 41 and the volume, and changing the brightness and volume of the LED and the display device 41 by the player.

  [Step D21] The control unit executes a random number update process. The random number update process is, for example, a process of updating the pseudo random number at least once in each control cycle of the main process using the rand function. Since the rand function generates random numbers based on the specified generation sequence each time recalculation is performed, the control unit can obtain random numbers only by executing the rand function. In addition, you may use the counter which increments by "1" like a main board | substrate (game control apparatus 100) as a random number.

[Step D22] The control unit executes reception command check processing. The reception command check process will be described later with reference to FIG.
[Step D23] The control unit executes effect display editing processing. The effect display editing process is a process of setting various commands for instructing the VDP 312 to draw contents on the display device 41 and parameters thereof. For example, the control unit sets commands in a table in the effect display editing process.

  [Step D <b> 24] The control unit performs setting for ending drawing command preparation. The drawing command preparation end setting is a process of setting that preparation of all the commands to the VDP 312 set in the effect display editing process is ended.

  [Step D25] The control unit determines whether or not it is frame switching timing, and if it is frame switching timing, the process proceeds to Step D26, and if it is not frame switching timing, it waits for frame switching timing. Here, the frame switching timing is a time corresponding to the processing cycle (for example, 1/30 seconds3333.333 ms) created based on the cycle (for example, 1/60 seconds) of the V blank interrupt (also referred to as V sync interrupt). It is the timing which arrives at a regular interval. The V blank interrupt is generated each time one scan of the entire screen for drawing is completed by the VDP 312. The generation cycle of this V blank interrupt is, for example, 1/60 seconds, as described above. In the case of this embodiment, when the same drawing is repeated twice and the V blank interrupt is generated twice, frame switching is performed, and the frame switching timing cycle is twice the cycle of the V blank interrupt (for example, 1/60 seconds). (For example, 1/30 seconds ≒ 33.33 ms). However, the present invention is not limited to this aspect, and the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed. For example, frame switching (image updating) may be performed in a cycle of 1/30 seconds or more, or less than 1/30 seconds Frame switching may be performed in a cycle.

  As a result of the frame switching timing determination processing, the subsequent processing (steps D26 to D30 and subsequent steps D18 to D24) is performed at the frame switching timing for each processing cycle. In addition, time management which needs to be synchronized with the effect contents is performed in units of this frame (that is, in units of the processing cycle). In the case where the processing cycle is 1/30 seconds, for example, it becomes 100 ms in 3 frames. This is the same as the main board (game control device) managing time values in units of 4 ms of the timer interrupt cycle.

  [Step D26] The control unit instructs the VDP 312 to draw a screen in accordance with the command set in step D23. For example, the control unit sequentially transmits commands set in a table form, and instructs the VDP 312 to draw a screen.

  [Step D27] The control unit executes a sound control process. The sound control process is a process related to volume control of audio from the speakers (upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b).

[Step D28] The control unit executes a decoration control process. The decoration control process is a process of controlling various LEDs and the like such as the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18.
[Step D29] The control unit executes movable body control processing. The movable body control process is a process of controlling a movable body (for example, the board effect device 44) including various motors and SOL (solenoid).

  [Step D30] The control unit executes a firing information control process. The launch information control process sets launch related information based on the launch state flag, and effects according to the special view rotation state (the number of special figure fluctuations per game for a predetermined amount of money (that is, a predetermined number of lent balls)). Is a process for performing mode correction of

  After performing step D30, the control unit returns to step D18, and thereafter repeatedly executes the processes of steps D18 to D30. That is, steps D18 to D30 constitute loop processing (sometimes referred to as main loop processing) that is repeatedly executed in the above processing cycle after activation of the effect control device 300.

  The control unit executes the processing of step D27 to step D29 in the main loop processing in order to match the effect of the screen, but the signals and data generated or set by these control processing (in particular, various LEDs and motors) The process of actually outputting the drive control signal etc.) to the port is performed within a short-period timer interrupt (not shown). However, when using an IC specialized for control of various devices, there is also a case where the output of a signal or the like is not performed by a timer interrupt only by instructing by serial communication or the like.

[Receive command check process]
Next, the reception command check process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a flowchart of reception command check processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The reception command check process is a process executed by the control unit in step D22 of the main process.

  The reception command (rendering command) is configured to include MODE data (1 byte) and ACTION data (1 byte), and the game control device (main board) 100 sends a rendering command to the rendering control device 300. Are sent sequentially. Below, such data which comprises a command is called data of command or command data.

  Further, the processing of command reception from the main board is performed by "command reception interrupt processing" (not shown). That is, in the serial communication of this example, transmission / reception is automatically performed by hardware (by the function of the CPU itself), and when reception of a command is completed, an interrupt (command reception interrupt) is generated and notified. It is only necessary to take out from the buffer, but in the above-mentioned "command reception interrupt processing", every time there is a command reception interrupt, the command is loaded from the serial reception buffer, and after checking the loaded command data for abnormality, the relevant command Data (MODE and ACTION data) is stored in the command buffer, and updating is performed to increase the value of the command reception counter by “1” by the stored amount. In the description of the control process, simply “store” means to readably store in a predetermined storage area so as to be used for the later control process (the same applies to the following). The command buffer is, for example, a ring buffer. The command buffer is constituted of, for example, a storage area in the RAM 311 a (or the RAM 322) of the CPU 311. The capacity of the command buffer may be equal to or more than the number of commands that may be transmitted from the main board in a system control cycle (the above-mentioned processing cycle; for example, 1/30 seconds).

  [Step D41] The control unit loads the value of the command reception counter as the number of command receptions. The command reception counter is set in the RWM (the RAM 322 or the RAM 311 a). Since the command reception counter is cleared to "0" in principle in step D43, the command reception counter stores the number of commands received during one frame (1/30 seconds) (time for one cycle of the above processing cycle).

  [Step D42] The control unit determines whether the number of received commands is not “0 (zero)”. If the number of received commands is not “0”, the process proceeds to Step D43, and the number of received commands is “0”. For example, the reception command check process ends. In the present application, “loading data” in the control processing means extracting data from the RAM (the RAM 322 or the RAM 311 a in the effect control device 300 of this example) as in the step D41.

[Step D43] The control unit subtracts the content of the command reception counter area (that is, the value of the command reception counter) by the number of command receptions.
Here, assuming that A: the value of the command reception counter and B: the number of received commands, “A = B” immediately after the execution of step D41. Then, it is a normal movement that “A = A−B = 0” immediately after execution of step D43, but in the aspect of this example, the effect control device 300 interrupts the command reception from the game control device (main substrate) 100. Since the priority is given to the highest priority without disabling the interrupt, there is a possibility that the value of A increases between the process of step D41 and the process of step D43. Therefore, if the process in step D43 is set to “A ← 0” (that is, the process for setting the value of the command reception counter to zero), the command count is shifted, so in step D43, the subtraction process “A−B” is performed. I am doing. However, when serial communication is used to transmit / receive a command from the main board as in this embodiment, the value of A is not increased between the processing of step D41 and the processing of step D153 by disabling interrupts. Then, the processing content of step D43 may be "A.rarw.0".

  [Step D44] The control unit determines the contents of the reception command buffer (corresponding to a command buffer, hereinafter may be simply referred to as a command buffer) (that is, command data stored in an address corresponding to the read pointer of the command buffer). Copy to a command area (sometimes called a command storage area). The command area is, for example, in a storage area in the RAM 322 or RAM 311a, and is a so-called FIFO (first-in first-out) buffer.

  [Step D45] Since the controller reads the data in the command buffer, the controller increments the value of the command read index, which is a pointer for reading the command buffer, by, eg, 1 in the range of 0 to 31. Do. Here, the range of “0” to “31” corresponds to the capacity of the command buffer (for example, “32”).

  [Step D46] The control unit determines whether copying of the command for the number of received commands has been completed (ie, whether steps D44 and D45 have been repeatedly executed for the number of received commands). The control unit proceeds to step D47 when copying of the command for the number of received commands is completed, and proceeds to step D44 when the copying is not completed.

  [Step D47] The control unit loads (that is, reads) the contents of the command area (the first stored data among the unread data in the command area, that is, the data to be read next) Do.

  [Step D48] The control unit executes reception command analysis processing. The received command analysis process is a process of analyzing data of a loaded command (hereinafter, referred to as a current command). The received command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Step D49] The control unit updates the address of the command area (the address of the data to be read next).
[Step D50] The control unit determines whether analysis of the command for the number of received commands has been completed (that is, whether steps D47 to D49 have been repeatedly executed for the number of received commands). The control unit proceeds to step D47 when the analysis of the command reception number has not been completed, and ends the reception command check process when the analysis is completed.

[Receive command analysis process]
Next, the received command analysis process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a flowchart of received command analysis processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The received command analysis process is a process executed by the control unit in step D48 of the received command check process.

  [Step D51] The control unit separates the upper byte of the data of the current command loaded in Step D47 of the received command check process into MODE, and stores the lower byte into ACT. In the case of a variable system command instructing a variation pattern of a special figure, the upper byte data stored as MODE commands a first half variation pattern, and the lower byte data stored as ACT commands a second variation pattern It is a thing.

  [Step D52] The control unit determines whether or not the value of MODE separated in Step D51 is in the normal range. The control unit proceeds to step D53 when the value of MODE is in the normal range, and ends the received command analysis process when the value of MODE is not in the normal range. Note that the value of MODE is not defined and may not be used, and if it is such an unused value, it is determined in step D52 that the value is not within the normal range.

  [Step D53] The control unit determines whether the value of ACT separated in Step D51 is within the normal range. The control unit proceeds to step D54 when the value of ACT is in the normal range, and ends the received command analysis process when the value of ACT is not in the normal range.

  Further, whether or not the value of ACT separated in step D51 in step D53 is in the normal range is performed, for example, as follows. That is, the effective ACT value is different for each MODE, and the upper limit to the lower limit of the effective value of this ACT are defined in a predetermined ACTION check table (not shown). It is checked whether the value of the ACT is within the range, and if it is within the range, it is determined that the range is normal (at this point in time, the missing part check described later has not been completed).

  [Step D54] The control unit determines whether or not the value of ACT separated from the value of MODE separated is a correct combination. The control unit proceeds to step D55 if the value of ACT is a correct combination, and ends the received command analysis process if the combination is not a correct combination. The determination of whether or not the value of ACT is a correct combination can be made, for example, using a match check table. In the match check table, all valid ACT values (action values) for the value of MODE are registered in order from the top address, and are provided for each value of MODE. Then, if there is a value of ACT separated in the match check table corresponding to the value of MODE, it can be determined that the combination is correct, and if there is no value of ACT separated in the match check table, it is correct It can be determined that it is not a combination.

  The determination as to whether or not the value of ACT is a correct combination is executed including a missing tooth check as to whether or not the combination of ACT is a normal combination of ACT. Because there is a plurality of valid ACTs for one MODE, but their values are not continuous (that is, values that do not exist discontinuously or have missing values), the command We are comparing and checking if is a valid value. Then, since only valid values are defined in the match check table, one of them is compared and checked one by one.

  [Step D55] The control unit determines whether or not the data of MODE is within the variation system command range. The control unit executes variable system command processing (details omitted) when the value of MODE is within the variation system command range (step D56), and proceeds to step D57 when the data of MODE is not within the variation system command range. .

  Here, the data of MODE is data of MODE stored separately in step D51 (the same applies to step D57 described later). A variation system command (also referred to as a variation command or variation pattern command) is a command for instructing a variation pattern of a special figure, and the range that can be taken by data of this variation command is a variation system command range.

  [Step D57] The control unit determines whether or not the data of MODE is within the big hit system command range. The control unit executes big hit system command processing (details omitted) when the data of MODE is within the big hit system command range (step D58), and proceeds to step D59 when the data of MODE is not within the big hit system command range. . The big hit system command is a command for instructing an operation (a display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) relating to a big hit medium effect, and the range which can be taken by the data of the big hit system command is a big hit system command range.

  [Step D59] The control unit determines whether or not the data of MODE is within the symbol system command range. The control unit executes symbol system command processing (details omitted) when the value of MODE is within the symbol system command range (step D60), and proceeds to step D61 when the data of MODE is not within the symbol system command range. . A symbol system command (sometimes referred to as a symbol command or a decoration special figure command) is a command for instructing information on a special figure symbol (for example, what to make the stop figure of the special figure, etc.), this symbol command The range that the data of can take is the symbol system command range.

  [Step D61] The control unit determines whether or not the data of MODE is within the one-shot system command range. The control unit executes one-shot system command processing (details omitted) when the value of MODE is within the one-shot system command range (step D62), and proceeds to step D63 when the data of MODE is not within the one-shot system command range. . In addition, unlike a command that makes sense in combination like a symbol command and a variable system command, a command that stands alone is referred to as a one-shot system command. The one-shot commands (sometimes referred to as single-shot commands) include a wait for customer demonstration command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / illegal command, a model specification command, and the like. The range that can be taken by the data of this one-shot command is the one-shot system command range.

  [Step D63] The control unit determines whether or not the data of MODE is within the prefetch symbol system command range. The control unit executes pre-reading symbol system command processing (details omitted) when the data of MODE is within the pre-reading symbol system command range (step D64), and when the data of MODE is not within the pre-reading symbol system command range Go to D65.

  [Step D65] The control unit determines whether or not the data of MODE is within the prefetch change command range. The control unit executes the prefetch variation system command processing (details omitted) when the data of MODE is within the prefetch variation system command range (step D66), and receives the data when the mode data is not within the prefetch variation system command range. Terminates command analysis processing.

  The pre-reading symbol system command and the pre-reading fluctuation system command are commands for pre-reading effect. In addition, when the process in any one of steps D56, D58, D60, D62, D64, and D66 ends, the reception command analysis process ends.

  Here, the pre-reading effect (also referred to as pre-reading notice or pre-reading notice effect) is a variable display game corresponding to start winning memory (no start winning memory hold or just hold) for which the variable display game of the special drawing is not executed. In order to inform the player in advance with a predetermined degree of reliability whether or not it will be a big hit when it is subsequently executed (or what fluctuation pattern it will be), the display of start winning memory storage etc. And so on. And the pre-reading system command (pre-reading fluctuation system command and pre-reading symbol system command) is the command which notifies beforehand the fluctuation pattern and the stop design which correspond to the retention of the starting winning a prize memory which becomes the object of pre-reading effect It is transmitted from the control device 100 to the effect control device 300. In addition, the normal variation system command and symbol system command which are not pre-read are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the time of the variation display start.

Second Embodiment
In the second embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is provided with a sub display device (movable combination) whose position can be switched (movable), and performs display effects using the sub display device.

  First, the sub-display device of the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 47 is a front view showing an example of a gaming board of the gaming machine of the second embodiment. FIG. 48 is a diagram illustrating an example of a sub display device according to the second embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 47 (1) and 47 (2), the game board 500 includes a display device 41, a board effect device 44 (movable role thing), and a sub display device 501 (movable role thing).
The sub display device 501 is movably switchable to the position shown in FIG. 47 (1) (first position) or the position shown in FIG. 47 (2) (second position). The second position is a position closer to the center of the display device 41 than the first position. That is, the visibility of the sub display device 501 at the second position is higher than the visibility of the sub display device 501 at the first position. Further, the sub display device 501 is provided on the front side (player side) of the display device 41 (main display device).

  The sub display device 501 is configured to include five seven-segment LEDs of a display unit 501a, a display unit 501b, a display unit 501c, a display unit 501d, and a display unit 501e, and a movable mechanism 501f.

  The movable mechanism 501 f takes charge of movement (movable switching) of the position of the sub display device 501. The movable mechanism 501 f includes a motor or the like (not shown), and performs movable switching of the position of the sub display device 501 by driving the motor or the like.

  Note that the movable mechanism 501 f can also movably switch the position of the sub display device 501 not only to the first position and the second position but also to another position (for example, a position between the first position and the second position). it can. For example, the movable mechanism 501f is not limited to movably switching the sub display device 501 to a position shifted in the vertical direction, but can also movably switch to a position shifted in the horizontal direction.

  Further, the movable mechanism 501 f is not limited to the movable switching of the position of the sub display device 501, and can also switch the movable of the inclination. For example, the movable mechanism 501f can tilt the sub display device 501 such that the right side is inclined upward (left side is downward), or the upper portion of the sub display device 501 is inclined forward (the lower side is backward). You can also In addition, it is preferable that the gaming machine 10 movably switch the sub display device 501 to such a position that the visibility of the small symbol group, the special figure 1 reservation number display, and the special figure 2 reservation number display described later is not impaired.

  The display unit 501 a to the display unit 501 e are electrically connected to the effect control device 300, and the display unit 501 a to the display unit 501 e are controlled by the effect control device 300. The effect control device 300 outputs a control signal of the display unit 501 e to the sub display device 501 from the display unit 501 a.

  Further, the motor or the like of the movable mechanism 501 f is electrically connected to the effect control device 300, and the movable mechanism 501 f is controlled by the effect control device 300. The effect control device 300 outputs a control signal of the movable mechanism 501 f to the sub display device 501.

Next, the configuration of the display screen in the display device 41 of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the display device of the second embodiment.
The display screen 502 shown in FIG. 49 (1) is the display content of the display device 41 when the variable display game is in symbol variation and the sub display device 501 is at the first position.

The display screen 502 includes, in the display content, two sets of decorative symbols, a special figure 1 pending number indication 505, a special figure 2 pending number indication 506, a pending indication 507, and a pending decision indication 508.
The two decorative patterns have a large symbol group 503 as a first decorative symbol and a small symbol group 504 as a second decorative symbol. The large symbol group 503 is in charge of game effects for the purpose of improving interest. Therefore, the large symbol group 503 is displayed large at the approximate center of the display device 41. Large symbol group 503 includes left symbol 503L, middle symbol 503C and right symbol 503R. The left symbol 503L, the middle symbol 503C, and the right symbol 503R of the display screen 502 indicate that the corresponding special figure variation display game is in the symbol variation state.

  Generally, the large symbol group 503 starts changing in the order of the left symbol 503L, the right symbol 503R, and the middle symbol 503C, and stops (including temporary stop) in the order of the left symbol 503L, the right symbol 503R, and the middle symbol 503C. Therefore, in the large symbol group 503, in many cases, the left symbol 503L and the right symbol 503R form a reach aspect, and it is possible to wait for the stop of the middle symbol 503C to form the big hit aspect.

The symbols (the left symbol 503L, the middle symbol 503C, and the right symbol 503R) that constitute the large symbol group 503 are mainly based on decorative symbols having high designability.
The small symbol group 504 is in charge of reporting of the variable display state for the purpose of improving the ease of grasping the gaming state of the player. Therefore, the small symbol group 504 does not interfere with the display effect by the large symbol group 503, so that the peripheral portion of the display device 41 is secured (if the sub display device 501 is at either the first position or the second position). Even if it does not overlap, it is displayed small. The small symbol group 504 includes a left symbol, a middle symbol and a right symbol. The left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol in the small symbol group 504 of the display screen 502 all indicate that the corresponding special figure variation display game is in the symbol variation state.

  In general, the large symbol group 503 is displayed larger than the small symbol group 504, the degree of freedom of the display position is high, and the display mode can be largely changed. On the contrary, the small symbol group 504 is displayed smaller than the large symbol group 503, and the degree of freedom of the display position is low (for example, position fixing).

  As a result, the gaming machine 10 can ensure visibility of the small symbol group 504 while securing a variety of display effects for the large symbol group 503, and can easily grasp the gaming state of the player.

  The special figure 1 reservation number display 505 displays the number of pending storages (starting number of memories) of the special figure 1 game. For example, the retention storage of the special view 1 game is generated triggered by a winning on the start winning opening 36. A special figure 2 pending number display 506 displays the number of pending storages of the special figure 2 game. For example, the reserve storage of the special figure 2 game is generated triggered by the prize winning on the normal variation prize winning device 37. The special figure 1 pending number display 505 and the special figure 2 pending number display 506 are displayed in portions that do not overlap even when the sub display device 501 is at the second position.

  The hold display 507 can clearly indicate the number of held memories of the special view variable display game and notify of the degree of expectation for the game result for each held memory according to the display mode. The number of pending storages displayed by the pending display 507 is either the number of pending storages displayed by the special view 1 pending count display 505 or the number of pending storages displayed by the special view 2 pending number display 506 according to the gaming state It corresponds to the total number of both.

  The number of pending storages displayed by the pending display 507 is a value from “0” to “4”, and the number of pending storages exceeding this is excluded from the display target. The gaming machine 10 can secure the accurate display of the number of pending storages by the special view 1 pending number display 505 and the special view 2 pending number display 506 even when the pending display 507 excludes a part of the pending storage.

  The holding and digest display 508 can indicate that the special view variable display game is in the variable display state and notify of the degree of expectation for the game result by the display mode. That is, the gaming machine 10 can perform the on-hold notice effect by using the on-hold display 507 and the on-hold digest display 508. The reserved advance presentation effect is an aspect of the prefetched presentation effect performed using the held display 507 and the held digest display 508.

  In the display screen 502, the number of pending storages of the special view 1 game indicated by the special view 1 pending number display 505 is "1", and the number of pending storages of the special view 2 game indicated by the special view 2 pending number display 506 is "0." Therefore, the number of pending storages indicated by the pending indication 507 is also “1”. In addition, the display screen 502 indicates that the special-image variation display game is in symbol variation by means of the holding and digest display 508.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 can make the variation mode in the variation display different for the large symbol group 503 and the small symbol group 504. For example, the gaming machine 10 can easily distinguish between the large symbol group 503 and the small symbol group 504 when vertically scrolling the large symbol group 503. In addition, even when the gaming machine 10 may update the symbols asynchronously between the large symbol group 503 and the small symbol group 504, it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player.

The display screen 509 shown in FIG. 49 (2) is the display content of the display device 41 when the variable display game is in symbol change and the sub display device 501 is at the second position.
When the sub display device 501 is at the second position, the sub display device 501 is disposed at a position corresponding to the hold display 507 and the hold termination display 508 on the display screen 502. Therefore, in the display screen 509, among the display elements of the display screen 502, the hold display 507 and the hold digest display 508 are removed. Even in this case, the special figure 1 pending number display 505 and the special figure 2 pending number display 506 are displayed in portions that do not overlap even when the sub display device 501 is at the second position. The gaming machine 10 can secure the accurate display of the number of pending storages by the special view 1 pending number display 505 and the special view 2 pending number display 506.

  As described above, when the display device 41 displays the display screen from which the display element in the portion overlapping with the sub display device 501 is removed, the gaming machine 10 can not see a part of the display element in the overlapping portion (a part) Can reduce the discomfort caused by Furthermore, by displaying the display screen from which the display element of the portion where the display device 41 overlaps with the sub display device 501 is removed, the gaming machine 10 can improve the visibility of the sub display device 501.

  Next, the effects of the variable display game executed by the gaming machine 10 using the sub display device 501 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 50 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of an effect mode in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. FIG. 51 is a second diagram showing an example of an effect mode in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. FIG. 52 is a third diagram showing an example of an effect mode in the gaming machine of the second embodiment.

  The effect mode 511 shown in FIG. 50 (1) shows the state at the time of the start of the variable display (the state where the variable display game is started). In the effect mode 511, the sub display device 501 is at the first position, the panel effect device 44 is stopped, and the display device 41 displays the display screen 502 of the configuration when the sub display device 501 is at the first position. ing.

  The effect mode 512 shown in FIG. 50 (2) is an aspect after the effect mode 511, and the effect using the sub display device 501 (corresponding to the duration time at the second position, the numeral from "0" The aspect after starting the count production | presentation which carries out a count up display is shown. The count effect is an example of an effect in which the sub display device 501 displays a display corresponding to the continuous time located at the second position.

  In the effect mode 512, the sub display device 501 is movably switched from the first position to the second position as the counting effect is started. Then, the display device 41 displays the display screen 509 having a configuration in which the sub display device 501 is at the second position in response to the sub display device 501 being movably switched from the first position to the second position. There is.

  The effect mode 513 shown in FIG. 50 (3) is an aspect after the effect mode 512, and counts up the numbers from "0" corresponding to the duration time at which the sub display device 501 is positioned at the second position in the count effect. Indicates the state of starting display.

In the effect mode 513, the sub display device 501 indicates that the number is being counted up and the current count number is “0” (immediately after the start).
The sub display device 501 displays the number (count number) in the count-up display by the three three-segment LEDs (display section) in the middle during the count-up display, and the two 7-segment LEDs on both sides Explicitly indicate that the count-up display is in progress.

  That is, the two 7-segment LEDs on both sides of the sub display device 501 are in charge of reporting the execution state of the count-up display, and the three 7-segment LEDs in the middle of the sub display device 501 indicate the count-up display. Responsible for notification of numbers.

  For example, the sub-display device 501 clearly indicates that the count-up display is continuing by lighting any one of the two 7-segment LEDs on both sides while changing the lighting part in a predetermined order. For example, in the count effect, the sub display device 501 counts up the number up to "100".

  Further, an expected degree (reliability) corresponding to the result mode of the variable display game is set to the count number at the end of the count-up in the count effect, that is, the count-up result (count result). , Count up so that the count result according to the degree of expectation. That is, the gaming machine 10 clearly indicates the degree of expectation corresponding to the result mode of the variable display game according to the count result of the sub display device 501.

  As described above, in order to count up so that the count result corresponds to the degree of expectation, the gaming machine 10 increases the player's interest in the effect contents (count result) of the count effect of the sub display device 501, It is possible to make the effect performed by the sub display device 501 look more closely. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can improve the player's interest by the effect that the sub display device 501 executes.

  The degree of expectation is set, for example, to be higher as the count result becomes larger. By setting the degree of expectation in this manner, the degree of expectation also increases as the time (duration time) located at the second position becomes longer, and the gaming machine 10 is configured such that the sub display device 501 (movable role) Value (meaning) can be given to the time (duration time) of waiting at two positions. That is, the gaming machine 10 can maintain and improve the interest even after the movable role is displaced. Further, the degree of expectation is not limited to that corresponding to the jackpot possibility, and may correspond to the development stage of the variable display effect such as reach and super reach.

  In the gaming machine 10, the increase speed of the count number in the count effect is not limited to a fixed speed, and may be a variable speed. For example, the gaming machine 10 may change the increase speed of the count number in synchronization with the display on the display screen (for example, in synchronization with the rotation speed of the large symbol group). It is also possible to set high speed (high frequency of updating the count number) and low speed (low frequency of updating the count number) when the count is close to the end. By this, the gaming machine 10 can adjust the time of the count effect regardless of the count result, and for example, the time of the count effect is made the same in the case where the count result is large and the case where the count result is small. It can also be done.

  Further, the increment value of the count in the count effect is not limited to being fixed, but may be a variable value. For example, the gaming machine 10 may count up by “5” when it is immediately after the start of counting, and may count up by “1” when it is close to the end of counting. By this, the gaming machine 10 can adjust the time of the count effect regardless of the count result, and for example, the time of the count effect is made the same in the case where the count result is large and the case where the count result is small. It can also be done.

  In the gaming machine 10, a message (for example, the relationship between the count number and the degree of expectation) is displayed on the display screen at a predetermined count number (for example, the count numbers "20", "40", "60", "80"). May be displayed). By displaying the fact that the count is related to the expectation as a message in this way, the gaming machine 10 can easily understand the content of the effect (the increase of the count being related to the expectation). .

The effect mode 514 shown in FIG. 51 (1) is an aspect after the effect mode 513 and indicates a state in which the sub display device 501 is counting up and displaying numbers in the count effect.
In the effect mode 514, the sub display device 501 clearly indicates that the count-up is continued by lighting any one of the two 7-segment LEDs on both sides. In addition, the sub display device 501 indicates that the current count number is “20” by the three three-segment LEDs in the middle.

  The effect mode 515 shown in FIG. 51 (2) is an aspect after the effect mode 514, and shows a state after the sub display device 501 ends the count-up display of numbers in the count effect.

  In the effect mode 515, the sub display device 501 clearly indicates that the count-up display has ended by turning off the two 7-segment LEDs on both sides. Further, the sub display device 501 indicates that the counting result is “30” by the three three-segment LEDs in the middle.

The effect mode 516 shown in FIG. 52 (1) is the mode after the effect mode 515 and shows the mode after the end of the count effect using the sub display device 501.
In the effect mode 516, the sub display device 501 is movably switched from the second position to the first position with the end of the count effect. Then, the display device 41 displays the display screen 502 of the configuration when the sub display device 501 is at the first position in response to the sub display device 501 being movably switched from the second position to the first position. There is.

The effect aspect 517 shown in FIG. 52 (2) is an aspect after the effect aspect 516, and shows an aspect in which the display device 41 is executing an effect corresponding to the count result.
In the effect mode 517, the display device 41 displays the display screen 518. In addition to the display elements displayed on display screen 502, display screen 518 further includes an effect display 519 for displaying an effect corresponding to the count result.

  The effect display 519 displays the effect (conduction line effect) of the display mode according to the count result. The effect display 519 displays an effect of a display mode in which the flame displayed on the other end side of the squib at a position where one end thereof corresponds to the board effect device 44 approaches the board effect device 44. The effect display 519 displays the flame of the display mode according to the count result. In other words, the effect display 519 clearly indicates the degree of expectation corresponding to the result mode of the variable display game according to the display mode of the flame.

  Here, the relationship between the display mode of the flame, the count result, and the degree of expectation will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a view showing an example of the relationship between the display mode of the flame, the count result, and the expectation in the second embodiment.

  There are 11 patterns of flame from P1 to P11. The pattern P1 is a white flame of a small size (first size). Pattern P2 is a small sized blue flame. Pattern P3 is a small sized green flame. The pattern P4 is a green flame of medium size (second size larger than the first size). Pattern P5 is a medium sized yellow flame. Pattern P6 is a medium sized orange flame. The pattern P7 is an orange flame of a large size (third size larger than the second size). Pattern P8 is a large sized red flame. Pattern P9 is a large sized cherry flame. The pattern P10 is a cherry-colored flame having a shape in which a large-sized flame and a medium-sized flame overlap (a shape in which the third size and the second size are combined). The pattern P11 is an iridescent flame having a shape in which a large-sized flame and a medium-sized flame are superimposed.

  The display mode of the flame of the pattern P1 corresponds to the count results "0" to "9" of the count effect. That is, when the counting result of the counting effect is “0” to “9”, the gaming machine 10 performs the lead-line effect accompanied by the flame of the pattern P1.

  The display mode of the flame of the pattern P2 corresponds to the counting result of the counting effect of "10" to "19". That is, when the counting result of the counting effect is "10" to "19", the gaming machine 10 performs the lead-line effect accompanied by the flame of the pattern P2.

  The display mode of the flame of the pattern P3 corresponds to “20” to “29” as the counting result of the counting effect. That is, when the counting result of the counting effect is "20" to "29", the gaming machine 10 performs the lead-line effect accompanied by the flame of the pattern P3.

  The display mode of the flame of the pattern P4 corresponds to "30" to "39" as the counting result of the counting effect. That is, when the counting result of the counting effect is "30" to "39", the gaming machine 10 performs the lead-line effect accompanied by the flame of the pattern P4.

  The display mode of the flame of the pattern P5 corresponds to “40” to “49” as the counting result of the counting effect. That is, when the counting result of the counting effect is "40" to "49", the gaming machine 10 performs the lead-line effect accompanied by the flame of the pattern P5.

  The display mode of the flame of the pattern P6 corresponds to “50” to “59” as the counting result of the counting effect. That is, when the counting result of the counting effect is “50” to “59”, the gaming machine 10 performs the lead-line effect accompanied by the flame of the pattern P6.

  The display mode of the flame of the pattern P7 corresponds to “60” to “69” as the counting result of the counting effect. That is, when the counting result of the counting effect is "60" to "69", the gaming machine 10 performs the lead-line effect accompanied by the flame of the pattern P7.

  The display mode of the flame of the pattern P8 corresponds to “70” to “79” as the counting result of the counting effect. That is, when the counting result of the counting effect is “70” to “79”, the gaming machine 10 performs the lead-line effect accompanied by the flame of the pattern P8.

  The display mode of the flame of the pattern P9 corresponds to “80” to “89” as the counting result of the counting effect. That is, when the counting result of the counting effect is "80" to "89", the gaming machine 10 performs the lead-line effect accompanied by the flame of the pattern P9.

  The display mode of the flame of the pattern P10 corresponds to “90” to “99” as the counting result of the counting effect. That is, the gaming machine 10 performs the lead-line effect accompanied by the flame of the pattern P10 when the count result of the count effect is “90” to “99”.

  In the display mode of the flame of the pattern P11, the count result of the count effect corresponds to "100". That is, when the counting result of the counting effect is “100”, the gaming machine 10 performs the convective line effect accompanied by the flame of the pattern P11.

  The gaming machine 10 sets the lowest expectation to the pattern P1, sets the highest expectation (for example, big hit confirmation) to the pattern P11, and sets the expectation to increase stepwise from the pattern P1 to the pattern P11 . Note that the gaming machine 10 may set, for example, specific expectations from 0% to 100% in the patterns P1 to P11, and for example, “low”, “medium”, “high” As such, the size of a rough expectation may be set.

  The gaming machine 10 may more specifically set the degree of expectation for each of the count results corresponding to each pattern. For example, the gaming machine 10 sets the degree of expectation so as to increase gradually as the count number increases (the count result "39" sets the degree of expectation higher than the count result "30"). The above is the relationship between the display mode of the flame, the count result, and the degree of expectation. Referring back to FIG. 52 (2), the description will be continued.

  For example, when the effect display 519 ends the effect (ends the variable display game), it displays an effect (a flame does not reach the position corresponding to the board effect device 44) in which a part of the convective line is burned, When the effect is continued (developed), the effect that all the squibs burn out (the effect that the flame reaches the position corresponding to the board effect device 44) is displayed. According to such an effect, the player can grasp the end timing of the effect by the length of the squib. That is, the connecting wire takes charge of specifying the end timing of the effect.

  For example, when the gaming machine 10 displays an effect in which a part of the driving wire is burned, the effect is ended (the large symbol group is temporarily stopped in a mode of losing), and the variation display game is ended. On the other hand, when the game machine 10 displays the effect that the entire squib line burns out, the game continues (advances) the production and shifts to the production mode shown in Fig. 52 (3). When the result mode of the display game is "off", the effect is ended, and when the result mode of the variable display game is "big hit", the effect is continued (transition to the effect mode of FIG. 52 (3)).

  In addition, although the aspect of a flame was demonstrated as making it into an aspect corresponding to a count result, it is not restricted to this. For example, the gaming machine 10 may set the length of the squib line to a mode corresponding to the count result. In this case, for example, the gaming machine 10 may be configured to have a longer lead wire as the count result is smaller, or may be set to be longer as the count result is larger. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can also set the display mode (for example, the shape, the color, the pattern, etc.) of the squib line to the mode corresponding to the count result.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 can set the shortening speed of the squib to a fixed speed or a variable speed. As a result, even when the length of the squib is made to correspond to the count result, the gaming machine 10 can arbitrarily adjust the time of presentation by the shortening speed of the squib. For example, in the gaming machine 10, the duration of the fuse-line effect can be the same between the case where the fuse is long and the case where the fuse is short. In the game machine 10, the shortening speed of the squib may be set as an aspect corresponding to the count result, and the time of the effect may be adjusted arbitrarily according to the length of the squib.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 counts down the count result (“30” in the figure) displayed by the sub display device 501 so as to coincide with the termination timing of the convective effect, and clearly indicates the termination timing of the convective effect. May be In this case, the gaming machine 10 may movably switch the position of the sub display device 501 to the second position so that the countdown by the sub display device 501 can be more easily viewed.

  The effect mode 520 shown in FIG. 52 (3) is an aspect after the effect mode 517, and is used to provide an effect (big hit notification effect) to notify that the variation display result is a big hit using the panel effect device 44. Shows an aspect of the moving state.

  In the effect mode 520, the display device 41 displays the display screen 502 in response to the end of the convective effect. Further, in the effect mode 520, the board effect device 44 operates downward (in the center of the display device 41) to notify that the variation display result is a big hit.

  In the effect mode 520, the sub display 501 performs an effect of clearly showing the jackpot symbol. The sub-display 501 clearly indicates that it is changing by turning on any one of the two 7-segment LEDs on both sides, and configured the big hit mode to the middle 3 7-segment LEDs The combinations (“111”, “222”, “333”, “444”, “555”, “666”, “777”) are displayed in order. Then, the sub-display device 501 turns off the two 7-segment LEDs on both sides at a predetermined timing, and displays one of the combinations forming the big hit mode on the three 7-segment LEDs in the middle, It clearly indicates that the displayed combination is a jackpot symbol.

  That is, the two 7-segment LEDs on both sides of the sub display device 501 are in charge of reporting that the big hit symbol is continuing to change in the big hit notification effect, and the three 7 segment LEDs in the middle of the sub display device 501 Is in charge of notification of the combination of jackpot symbols.

  Next, the execution timings of the count effect, the connecting line effect, and the big hit notification effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a timing chart showing an example of execution timings of the count effect, the squib effect and the big hit notification effect in the second embodiment.

  The gaming machine 10 starts an N-th variation display game at timing t1 (FIG. 50 (1)). The gaming machine 10 starts counting effects at a timing t2 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the Nth variable display game, and movably switches the sub display device 501 from the first position to the second position (FIG. 50). (2)).

  The gaming machine 10 movably switches the sub display device 501 to the second position, and then starts count-up display using the sub display device 501 from timing t3 after a predetermined time has elapsed (FIG. 50 (3), FIG. 51 (1). When the gaming machine 10 is executed for a predetermined time, counting up is finished at timing t4 (FIG. 51 (2)).

  The gaming machine 10 displays the count result for a predetermined time after the end of the count-up, and then, at timing t5, movably switches the sub display device 501 from the second position to the first position and ends the count effect (see FIG. 52 (1)). The gaming machine 10 starts conducting line effect at timing t6 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the counting effect (FIG. 52 (2)).

When the gaming machine 10 executes the conductor rendering for a predetermined time, the gaming effect ends at timing t7, and the jackpot notification rendering starts (FIG. 52 (3)).
Next, an effect mode determination process at the time of count effect execution will be described. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect mode determination processing at the time of count effect execution of the second embodiment. The effect mode determination process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The effect mode determination process is a process executed by the control unit in step D23 (see FIG. 44) of the main process.

[Step D71] The control unit acquires the variation result of the target variation display game based on the reception command.
[Step D72] The control unit determines an aspect (count result) of the counting effect based on the reception command. For example, the control unit determines the count result using the lottery table based on the received command.

  [Step D73] The control unit determines an aspect of the convective line effect based on the variation result (reception command) and the count result. The control unit determines the success or failure of the effect (whether or not to continue the effect) based on the variation result (reception command), and determines the display mode of the flame based on the count result.

  [Step D74] The control unit determines whether the convective effect is successful and the effect continues. If the control unit determines that the effect does not continue (the variation result is not a big hit), it ends the presentation mode determination processing, and if it is determined that the effect continues (if the variation result is a big hit), the process proceeds to step D75. move on.

  [Step D75] The control unit determines an aspect of the jackpot notification effect based on the received command. For example, the control unit determines a jackpot symbol indicated by the sub display device 501 in the jackpot notification effect based on the reception command.

  In the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine 10 reports the degree of expectation corresponding to the result mode of the variable display game in the variable display game using the sub display device 501, but the present invention is not limited thereto.

  For example, the gaming machine 10 can also notify the degree of expectation corresponding to the result mode of the variable display game across the variable display game. For example, the gaming machine 10 changes the expectation corresponding to the result mode of the variable display game of the start memory (start memory corresponding to the icon displayed on the hold display) during the digestion standby from the digestion standby to after the start of digestion You may carry out using the sub display apparatus 501 continuously. In this case, the gaming machine 10 notifies, for example, the degree of expectation corresponding to the result mode of the variable display game of the start memory corresponding to the icon by turning on the icon displayed in the hold display. Clarify that.

  In the above embodiment, the sub-display device 501 has been described as performing an effect corresponding to the time during which the sub-display device 501 is located at the second position. For example, the gaming machine 10 is between the first position and the second position when the movement limit (moving limit) from the first position is the second position. It is also possible to produce an effect corresponding to the duration of the state in the third position not including the first position. Here, the third position is a position including the second position.

The gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a first display means (display device 41), a second display means (sub display device 501), and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The first display means can display the variable display game. The second display means is movable between the first position (FIG. 47 (1)) and the second position (FIG. 47 (2)), and can display a predetermined effect display. The control means changes the display mode of the effect display according to the duration of the state in which the second display means is at the third position which is between the first position and the second position and does not include the first position. Count up display) to display information (expected degree) on the result mode of the variable display game on the second display means.

(2) The information on the result mode of the variable display game of (1) is the degree of expectation that the special variable display game derives the special result mode (big hit).
(3) The control means of (1) changes the display mode of the display element for notifying information on the result mode of the variable display game according to the duration.

  (4) The control means of (1) displays the information corresponding to the information on the result aspect of the variable display game notified by the second display means after the display of the information on the result aspect of the variable display game by the second display means is finished The display effect (conduction line effect) of the mode (display mode of flame) is performed on the first display means.

  (5) The second display unit of (1) is disposed on the front side of the first display unit, and the control unit is configured to display the display mode of the first display unit according to the position of the second display unit (display screen 502 , Change the display screen 509).

(6) The control means of (5) changes the display mode of the first display means so that the display element is not arranged in the portion located on the back side of the second display means.
Third Embodiment
The gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment can change the attitude of the sub display device 501, and can perform variable display of symbols in accordance with the attitude of the sub display device 501. First, the posture state of the sub display device 501 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing an example of the attitude state of the sub display device of the third embodiment.

  The gaming machine 10 can change the sub display device 501 into four attitude states. FIG. 56 (1) shows a posture state (standard posture state) which is a standard of the sub display device 501. FIG. The sub display 501 includes a 5-digit 7-segment display arranged in a row. The standard posture state of the sub display device 501 is a posture state in which the 5-digit 7-segment display device is in the horizontal direction on the front surface of the display device 41 (main display device). The sub display 501 projects to a position on the front of the display 41 where a 5-digit 7-segment display can be easily viewed by the player. For example, the sub display device 501 protrudes from the lower end of the display area of the display device 41 by a distance d1 into the display area.

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can ensure good visibility of the sub display device 501 in the standard posture state. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can make the visibility of the sub display device 501 superior to the display device 41.

  FIG. 56 (2) shows a posture state (retraction posture state) in which the sub display device 501 is at least partially retracted from the front surface of the display device 41. The retreating posture state of the sub-display device 501 is a posture state in which the 5-digit seven-segment display in the front surface of the display device 41 is in the horizontal direction. However, the sub display device 501 retracts from the front of the display device 41 to a position where the 5-digit 7-segment display can not be easily viewed by the player. For example, a part of the sub display device 501 is accommodated in the center case (game effect structure) 40, and protrudes from the lower end of the display region of the display device 41 into the display region by a distance d2 (d2 <d1).

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can ensure good visibility of the display device 41 in the retracted posture state. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can make the visibility of the sub display device 501 inferior to the display device 41.

  FIG. 56 (3) shows a state in which the sub display device 501 is tilted to the left (left tilt state). The left inclined posture state of the sub display device 501 is a posture state in which the 5-digit 7-segment display device is inclined downward to the left on the front surface of the display device 41. The sub display device 501 protrudes to a position where the 5-digit seven-segment display can be easily viewed by the player while leaning leftward on the front surface of the display device 41. For example, the sub display device 501 projects from the lower end of the display area of the display device 41 into the display area at a left inclination of the angle α.

  As a result, the gaming machine 10 can ensure good visibility of the sub display device 501 in the left inclined posture state. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can make the visibility of the sub display device 501 superior to the display device 41.

  FIG. 56 (4) shows an attitude state in which the sub display device 501 is inclined to the right (right inclination state). The right inclination posture state of the sub display device 501 is a posture state in which the 5-digit 7-segment display is inclined downward to the right on the front surface of the display device 41. The sub display device 501 protrudes to a position where the 5-digit seven-segment display can be easily viewed by the player while being inclined to the right on the front surface of the display device 41. For example, the sub display device 501 projects from the lower end of the display area of the display device 41 into the display area at the right inclination of the angle α.

  Thus, the gaming machine 10 can ensure good visibility of the sub display device 501 in the right inclined posture state. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can make the visibility of the sub display device 501 superior to the display device 41.

First, the configuration of the display screen of the display device 41 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of a display screen in the display device according to the third embodiment.
FIG. 57A shows the display contents of the display device 41 and the sub display device 501 while the symbol is stopped in the variable display game. Although the gaming machine 10 can share the display content in the variable display game between the display device 41 and the sub display device 501, the display device 41 shown in FIG. 57 (1) displays the display in the variable display game. Only share. The display device 41 includes two sets of decorative symbols, a special figure 1 pending number indication 603, a special figure 2 pending number indication 604, and a game guide 610 in the display content of the variable indication game while the symbols are stopped.

  The two decorative patterns have a large symbol group 601 as a first decorative symbol and a small symbol group 602 as a second decorative symbol. The large symbol group 601 takes charge of game effects for the purpose of improving interest. Therefore, the large symbol group 601 is displayed large at the approximate center of the display device 41. Large symbol group 601 includes left symbol 601L, middle symbol 601C and right symbol 601R. The left symbol 601L, the middle symbol 601C and the right symbol 601R all indicate that the corresponding special view variation display game is in the symbol stop state.

  Generally, the large symbol group 601 starts changing in the order of the left symbol 601L, the right symbol 601R, and the middle symbol 601C, and stops (including temporary stop) in the order of the left symbol 601L, the right symbol 601R, and the middle symbol 601C. Therefore, in the large symbol group 601, in many cases, the left symbol 601L and the right symbol 601R form a reach aspect, and it is possible to wait for the stop of the middle symbol 601C to form a hitting aspect.

  The small symbol group 602 is in charge of reporting of the variable display state for the purpose of improving the ease of grasping the gaming state of the player. Therefore, the small symbol group 602 is smallly displayed on the peripheral portion of the display device 41 so as to ensure visibility without disturbing the display effect by the large symbol group 601. The small symbol group 602 includes a left symbol, a middle symbol and a right symbol. The left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol in the small symbol group 602 of the display screen 600 all indicate that the corresponding special figure variation display game is in the symbol stop state.

  In general, the large symbol group 601 is displayed larger than the small symbol group 602, the degree of freedom of the display position is high, and the display mode can be largely changed. On the contrary, the small symbol group 602 is displayed smaller than the large symbol group 601, and the degree of freedom of the display position is low (for example, position fixing).

  The special figure 1 reservation number display 603 displays the number of pending storages (starting number of memories) of the special figure 1 game. A special figure 2 pending number display 604 displays the number of pending storages of the special figure 2 game. The display device 41 displays the number of reserved memories "0" of the special figure 1 game on the special figure 1 number of reservations display 603, and displays the number of reserved memories of special figure 2 game "0" on the special figure 2 number of reservations display 604. .

  The game guide 610 is a display for guiding the player of the game state. For example, the game guide 61 guides the player that the game state is the game state corresponding to the right strike (more specifically, the power transmission support state or the like) by the message "right strike".

  The display device 41 may include the hold display and the hold digest display in the display content. The hold display can clearly indicate the number of held memories of the special view variable display game and notify of the degree of expectation for the game result for each held memory according to the display mode. The number of pending storages displayed by the pending display corresponds to the sum of the number of pending storages displayed by the special view 1 pending count display 603 and the number of pending storage displayed by the special view 2 pending number display 604. With the display mode, it is possible to indicate that the special view variable display game is in the variable display state and to notify the degree of expectation for the game result.

  In addition, although the gaming machine 10 has the large symbol group 601 and the small symbol group 602 each composed of three-digit symbols, it may have any number of digits as long as it includes one or more symbols. Also, in the gaming machine 10, the numbers of digits of the symbols are aligned in the large symbol group 601 and the small symbol group 602, but the numbers of digits of symbols in the large symbol group 601 and the small symbol group 602 are different. It is also good.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 changes the transparency of the symbols for the large symbol group 601 during the variable display and the stop display, or even during the variable display (for example, changing the transparency from 0% to 50%), For the small symbol group 602, the transparency of the design can be fixed (for example, fixed to 0% transparency). Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can ensure visibility of the small symbol group 602 while securing a variety of display effects for the large symbol group 601, and can easily grasp the gaming state of the player.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 changes the color of the symbols for the large symbol group 601 (for example, changing from red to blue) during the variable display and the stop display, or during the variable display, the small symbol group The color of the symbol can be fixed (for example, fixed to red) for 602. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may change the color saturation (for example, change the color saturation from 100% to 0%) of the large symbol group 601 during variable display and stop display, or during variable display. Also, for the small symbol group 602, the saturation of the symbol can be fixed (for example, fixed to 100% saturation). In addition, the gaming machine 10 changes the lightness of the symbols for the large symbol group 601 (for example, changing the lightness from 100% to 10%) during variable display and stop display, or during variable display, For the small symbol group 602, the lightness of symbols can be fixed (for example, fixed to 100% of lightness). In addition, the gaming machine 10 may change the size of the symbols for the large symbol group 601 (for example, change from the standard size to the enlargement (reduction) size) during the variable display and the stop display, or during the variable display. Even if it is, the size of the symbol can be fixed for the small symbol group 602. In addition, the gaming machine 10 changes the display position of the symbols for the large symbol group 601 (during change, for example, from the center of the screen to the upper left of the screen) during variable display and stop display, or during variable display, The display position of the symbol can be fixed (for example, fixed to the lower right of the screen) for the small symbol group 602. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may change the design of the symbol for the large symbol group 601 (for example, from rectangular to circular or from numeric to character) during variable display and stop display, or during variable display. Even if it is, the design of the symbol can be fixed (for example, fixed to a number) for the small symbol group 602. Further, even if the gaming machine 10 changes the variation display mode of the symbols for the large symbol group 601 (for example, changing from vertical scrolling to horizontal scrolling) during the variable display, the variation display mode of the symbols for the small symbol group 602 Can be fixed (for example, fixed to shaft rotation fluctuation).

  Also with these features, the gaming machine 10 can ensure visibility of the small symbol group 602 while securing a variety of display effects for the large symbol group 601, and can make it easy for the player to grasp the gaming state.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 can make the variation mode in the variation display different for the large symbol group 601 and the small symbol group 602. For example, when vertically scrolling the large symbol group 601, the gaming machine 10 can easily distinguish the large symbol group 601 and the small symbol group 602. In addition, even when the gaming machine 10 updates the symbols asynchronously between the large symbol group 601 and the small symbol group 602, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort given to the player.

  The sub display device 501 is a 5-digit display consisting of five 7-segment LEDs. Since each 7-segment LED functions as one display unit, the sub display device 501 includes five display units 501a, 501b, 501c, 501d, and 501e. The sub display device 501 can display the display content related to the variable display game or the display content independent from the variable display game by the display units 501a, 501b, 501c, 501d, and 501e. For example, the sub-display device 501 can display the number of acquired game balls, the cumulative number of fluctuations, the number of consecutive big hits, etc., and can display a lively display, an error notification, and the like. For example, the sub display device 501 shown in FIG. 57 (1) performs a lively display in which the display portions 501a, 501b, 501c, 501d, and 501e sequentially light up one by one in synchronization.

  FIG. 57 (2) shows the display contents of the display device 41 and the sub display device 501 during symbol variation in the variation display game. The display device 41 shown in FIG. 57 (2) shares the display in the variable display game with only the display device 41.

  The display device 41 displays the number of reserved memories "0" of the special figure 1 game on the special figure 1 number of reservations display 603, and displays the number of reserved memories of special figure 2 games "4" on the special figure 2 number of reservations display 604. . Further, the left symbol 601L, the middle symbol 601C, and the right symbol 601R displayed by the display device 41 indicate that the corresponding special figure variation display game is in the symbol variation state. Further, the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol in the small symbol group 602 displayed by the display device 41 indicate that the corresponding special figure variation display game is in the symbol variation state.

  Since many players are interested in forming the reach aspect when the gaming machine 10 starts symbol variation from symbol stop, the left symbol 601L and the right symbol 601R that form the reach aspect in the process of forming the reach aspect are The display is larger than the middle symbol 601C.

  The sub display device 501 performs the same display as during symbol stop. The sub display device 501 may perform different display during symbol change and symbol stop. For example, the sub display device 501 displays a bustling display as display content independent of the variable display game while symbols are stopped, and displays the number of acquired game balls and the cumulative number of fluctuations as display content related to the variable display game.

  Next, a display example in which the sub display device 501 shares part of the display content in the variable display game will be described using FIG. FIG. 58 is a second diagram illustrating an example of a display screen in the display device according to the third embodiment.

  FIG. 58 (1) shows the display device 41 during symbol variation in the variable display game and the display contents of the sub display device 501 in the standard posture state. The display device 41 displays the small symbol group 602, the special figure 1 pending number indication 603, the special figure 2 pending number indication 604, the game guide 610, and the effect indication 611 as the display contents during the symbol variation of the variable indication game. Including. The sub display device 501 includes a large symbol group 601s in the display content during symbol variation of the variation display game.

  That is, the gaming machine 10 can display the large symbol group 601s on the sub display device 501 in place of the large symbol group 601 (see FIGS. 57 (1) and (2)) displayed on the display device 41. . The large symbol group 601 s displayed by the sub display device 501 corresponds to the small symbol group 602 in the same manner as the large symbol group 601.

  The sub display device 501 displays symbols using three arranged in the center of the display portions 501b, 501c, and 501d in the standard posture state, and displays decoration using two located at the end portions of the display portions 501a and 501e. . The display portions 501b, 501c, and 501d display the left symbol 601L, the middle symbol 601C, and the right symbol 601R, respectively, and display symbol variations due to symbol switching. The symbol variation due to symbol switching will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The display device 41 displays the effect display 611 instead of the large symbol group 601. The effect display 611 includes the character 612, the background 613, and the like. Thus, the display device 41 can perform display effects using a large display area by leaving the display of the large symbol group 601 to the sub display device 501. Further, the display device 41 can eliminate the interference between the large symbol group 601 and the display effect by leaving the display of the large symbol group 601 to the sub display device 501.

  FIG. 58 (2) shows the display device 41 during symbol fluctuation in the variable display game and the display contents of the sub display device 501 in the left inclined posture state. The sub display device 501 displays symbols using five of the display portions 501a, 501b, 501c, 501d, and 501e in the left inclined posture state. The display units 501a, 501b, 501c, 501d, and 501e display symbol variations due to horizontal scrolling. The symbol variation due to the horizontal scroll will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The display device 41 changes the display content according to the attitude of the sub display device 501. The display device 41 changes the display content of the effect display 611 corresponding to the attitude of the sub display device 501. For example, the character 612 is slide displayed to the left corresponding to the tilt of the sub display device 501. In addition, the background 613 is inclined corresponding to the inclination of the sub display device 501, and clearly indicates the correspondence between the attitude of the sub display device 501 and the effect display 611.

  In addition, the display device 41 has display contents independent of the posture of the sub display device 501 for the small symbol group 602, the special figure 1 pending number indication 603, the special figure 2 pending number indication 604, and the game guide 610. Thereby, the display device 41 secures easy grasp of the gaming state by the player even if there is an effect according to the attitude of the sub display device 501.

  Although the display content of the display device 41 when the sub display device 501 is in the left tilt posture state has been described, the same applies to the display content of the display device 41 when the sub display device 501 is in the right tilt posture state. it can. For example, when the sub display device 501 is in the right inclination posture state, the display device 41 slides the character 612 to the right corresponding to the inclination of the sub display device 501.

  Next, symbol variation due to symbol switching in the sub display device 501 will be described using FIG. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example of symbol variation due to symbol switching in the sub display device of the third embodiment.

  The sub display device 501 shown in FIG. 59 (1) is displaying the large symbol group 601s while the symbols are changing due to symbol switching. The sub display device 501 shown in FIG. 59 (1) uses three in a line at the center of the display portions 501b, 501c, and 501d to switch and display symbols, and uses two located at the end portions of the display portions 501a and 501e. Display the decoration (for example, the G segment lights on, other lights off). In the sub-display device 501 shown in FIG. 59 (1), the display 501b switches the left symbol 601L, the display 501c switches the middle symbol 601C, and the display 501d switches the right symbol 601R at high speed by cross hatching. Show. That is, the sub display device 501 shown in FIG. 59 (1) indicates that the left symbol 601L, the right symbol 601R, and the middle symbol 601C are being changed by symbol switching.

  The sub display device 501 shown in FIG. 59 (2) indicates that the display portion 501b is in the stop display (including the temporary stop) with the left symbol 601L at “1” by a black filled number. Further, in the sub display device 501 shown in FIG. 59 (2), the display portion 501c indicates that the middle symbol 601C is being displayed, and the display portion 501d indicates that the right symbol 601R is being symbol switched by cross hatching.

  In the sub display device 501 shown in FIG. 59 (3), the display unit 501b is displaying the left symbol 601L at "1" for stop display, and the display unit 501c is displaying the middle symbol 601C at "1" for stop display Show that with black filled numbers. Further, the sub display device 501 shown in FIG. 59 (3) indicates by cross hatching that the display portion 501d is switching the right symbol 601R. That is, the sub display device 501 shown in FIG. 59 (3) shows a state in which the reach is being changed.

  In the sub display device 501 shown in FIG. 59 (4), the display portion 501b is displaying the left symbol 601L at “1” for stop display, and the display portion 501c is displaying the middle symbol 601C at “1” for stop display. The fact that the display portion 501d is in the stop display of the right symbol 601R with "7" is indicated by black-filled numerals. That is, the sub-display device 501 shown in FIG. 59 (4) shows the out-of-stop state after reach change.

  In the sub display device 501 shown in FIG. 59 (5), the display unit 501b is displaying the left symbol 601L at "1" for stop display, and the display unit 501c is displaying the middle symbol 601C at "1" for stop display. The fact that the display portion 501d is in the stop display of the right symbol 601R with "1" is indicated by a black-filled number. That is, the sub display device 501 shown in FIG. 59 (5) shows the hit stop mode after the reach change.

  In this manner, the gaming machine 10 can perform symbol variation by symbol switching using the sub display device 501. The sub display device 501 can display symbols by making it possible to distinguish between the stop state and the temporary stop state according to the lighting mode (for example, the color of the symbol, the brightness, the blinking cycle, etc.).

  Next, symbol variation due to horizontal scrolling in the sub display device 501 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of symbol variation due to horizontal scrolling in the sub-display device of the third embodiment.

  The sub display device 501 sets a symbol array 615 in which symbols are arranged in the horizontal direction when performing symbol variation by horizontal scroll. The symbol array 615 repeatedly arranges three symbols and two decoration displays (for example, G segment lighting, other lights off) located on both sides thereof. For example, the symbol array 615 is a partial symbol array "-, 1, 1, 2-", "-, 1, 1, 1,-", "-, 1, 1, 2-", including a decorative display, "-, 1, 1, 2,-" and "-, 1, 1, 1,-" are arranged in order from the left.

  The gaming machine 10 performs horizontal scrolling while changing the posture state of the sub display device 501. First, the sub display device 501 displays a partial symbol array “−, 1, 1, 2, −” shown in FIG. 60A in the standard posture state as a large symbol group 601 s.

  Next, the gaming machine 10 changes the attitude of the sub display device 501 from the standard attitude to the right inclination attitude. The gaming machine 10 moves the large symbol group 601 s to the left on the symbol array 615 when the posture state of the sub display device 501 is the right inclination posture state. That is, the sub display device 501 displays the symbol variation in which the large symbol group 601s horizontally scrolls in the right direction.

  When the sub display device 501 horizontally scrolls in the right direction by one unit (one digit) from the partial symbol array "-, 1, 1, 2,-" (see FIG. 60 (1)), the partial symbols in the large symbol group 601s The array "-,-, 1, 1, 2" (see FIG. 60 (2)) is displayed.

  Similarly, when the sub display device 501 horizontally scrolls in the right direction by 4 units (4 digits) from the partial symbol array "-,-, 1, 1, 2" (see FIG. 60 (2)), the large symbol group A partial symbol array "-, 1, 1, 1,-" (see FIG. 60 (3)) is displayed at 601s.

  Then, when the sub display device 501 reaches the end of the symbol array 615 and displays the partial symbol array "-, 1, 1, 2,-" (see FIG. 60 (4)) on the large symbol group 601s, the sub display device The posture state of 501 is changed from the right inclined posture state to the standard posture state. At this time, the gaming machine 10 can set the partial symbol arrangement being displayed on the large symbol group 601s as the stop symbol. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can re-variate the partial symbol array being displayed on the large symbol group 601s as a temporary stop symbol.

  For example, the gaming machine 10 changes the attitude state of the sub display device 501 from the standard attitude state to the left inclined attitude state. The gaming machine 10 moves the large symbol group 601s to the right in the symbol array 615 when the posture state of the sub display device 501 is the left slant posture state. That is, the sub display device 501 displays the symbol variation in which the large symbol group 601s horizontally scrolls in the left direction.

  When the sub display device 501 horizontally scrolls in the left direction by one unit (one digit) from the partial symbol array "-, 1, 1, 2,-" (see FIG. 60 (4)), the partial symbols in the large symbol group 601s The array "1, 1, 2,-,-" (see FIG. 60 (5)) is displayed.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 can change the posture state of the sub display device 501, and can perform symbol variation according to the posture state of the sub display device 501. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can perform a novel display effect on the player, and can further improve the interest. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can improve the interest of the player in the posture state (operation state) of the sub display device 501.

  In addition, although the symbol arrangement 615 set only three symbols included in the partial symbol arrangement as "1, 1, 1" and "1, 1, 2, 2-", the symbol combination is not limited thereto. . Further, although the symbol array 615 has the same partial symbol array in an overlapping manner, it may have a partial symbol array having no overlap.

  Next, display effect determination processing for determining a display effect corresponding to the posture state of the sub display device 501 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a flowchart of display effect determination processing in the effect control device of the third embodiment.

  The display effect determination process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The display effect determination process is a process executed by the control unit in step D23 (see FIG. 44) of the main process.

  [Step D81] The control unit determines the presence or absence of the variable display effect in the sub display device 501. When there is no variable display effect in the sub display device 501, that is, when the display in the variable display game is shared by only the display device 41, the control unit proceeds to step D82. The control unit proceeds to step D83 when there is a variable display effect in the sub display device 501, that is, when sharing the display in the variable display game between the display device 41 and the sub display device 501.

  [Step D82] Since the control unit shares the display in the variable display game with only the display device (main display device) 41, the control unit sets the variable display effect by the display device 41, and ends the display effect determination process.

  [Step D83] The control unit determines whether or not there is a change in attitude of the sub display device 501. The control unit proceeds to step D84 when there is a posture change in the sub display device 501, and proceeds to step D88 when there is no posture change.

  [Step D84] The control unit determines whether the posture change in the sub display device 501 is in the left inclined posture state. The control unit proceeds to step D85 if the posture change in the sub display device 501 is in the left tilt posture state, and proceeds to step D86 if it is not in the left tilt posture state.

  [Step D85] The control unit sets the left tilt fluctuation display effect by the display device (main display device) 41 and the sub display device 501. The left tilt fluctuation display effect in the display device 41 includes the effect display 611 according to the left tilt posture state of the sub display device 501 in the display content. In addition, the left tilt fluctuation display effect in the sub display device 501 includes symbol fluctuation due to horizontal scrolling using the display units 501a, 501b, 501c, 501d, and 501e.

  [Step D86] The control unit determines whether or not the posture change in the sub display device 501 is a right tilt posture state. The control unit proceeds to step D87 when the posture change in the sub display device 501 is the right inclination posture state, and proceeds to step D88 when the posture change in the sub display device 501 is not the right inclination posture state.

  [Step D87] The control unit sets the right tilt fluctuation display effect by the display device (main display device) 41 and the sub display device 501. The right tilt fluctuation display effect in the display device 41 includes the effect display 611 according to the right tilt posture state of the sub display device 501 in the display content. In addition, the right tilt fluctuation display effect in the sub display device 501 includes symbol fluctuation due to horizontal scrolling using the display units 501a, 501b, 501c, 501d, and 501e.

[Step D88] The control unit sets, among the variable display effects, variable display effects (partial change display effects) not shared by the sub display device 501.
[Step D89] The control unit sets, among the variable display effects shared by the sub display device 501, a variable display effect (partial change display effect) that does not involve a posture change, and ends the display effect determination process.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can perform display effects according to the posture state of the sub display device 501 with the display device 41 and the sub display device 501.
Next, posture change of the sub display device 501 based on the player's operation received from the push button 25 will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 and 63. FIG. First, the push button (option setting unit) 25 provided in the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a diagram illustrating an exemplary arrangement of push button LEDs and touch sensors in the push button according to the third embodiment.

  The push button 25 includes a push button LED, a touch sensor, and a push button SW. The push button LEDs are nine full color LEDs. The touch sensor can detect the player's touch operation at eight places. The push button SW can detect pressing operation of the push button 25.

  The effect control device 300 and the push button 25 are electrically connected. The effect control device 300 outputs a control signal of the push button LED to the push button 25, and inputs a detection signal of the touch sensor and a detection signal of the push button SW from the push button 25.

  Here, the selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b described with reference to FIG. 4 will be described again. The selection button switch 25 a and the determination button switch 25 b are signals detected by a combination of a detection signal of the touch sensor and a detection signal of the push button SW. For example, a state in which the touch sensor detects the touch operation at the left and right positions corresponding to the selection operation and the push button SW detects the pressing operation of the push button 25 corresponds to the ON state of the selection button switch 25a. A state in which the touch sensor detects the touch operation at the center position corresponding to the determination operation and the push button SW detects the pressing operation of the push button 25 corresponds to the ON state of the determination button switch 25 b.

  The push button 25 has a cylindrical shape in which the approximate shape of the surface, which is the upper surface when the player crawls, is substantially circular. The push button 25 has nine small circular portions 250 to 258 about the size of a fingertip on its upper surface, a small circular portion 250 at the center of the upper surface, and eight on the circumference surrounding the small circular portion 250. Place the two small circles 251-258.

  The small circle portion 250 arranges one push button LED and one touch sensor (TSW4) within its circumference. The small circle portion 251 is located in the left direction of the small circle portion 250, and arranges one push button LED and one touch sensor (TSW1) within its circumference. The small circle portion 252 is positioned in the upper left direction of the small circle portion 250, and arranges one push button LED and one touch sensor (TSW2) within its circumference. The small circle portion 253 is located in the upper direction of the small circle portion 250, and arranges one push button LED and one touch sensor (TSW3) within its circumference. The small circle portion 254 is positioned obliquely upward to the right of the small circle portion 250, and arranges one push button LED and one touch sensor (TSW5) within its circumference. The small circle portion 255 is located to the right of the small circle portion 250, and arranges one push button LED and one touch sensor (TSW6) within its circumference. The small circle portion 256 is located obliquely downward to the right of the small circle portion 250, and arranges one push button LED and one touch sensor (TSW7) within its circumference. The small circle portion 257 is located downward of the small circle portion 250, and arranges one push button LED and one touch sensor (TSW8) within its circumference. The small circle portion 258 is positioned diagonally downward to the left of the small circle portion 250, and arranges one push button LED within its circumference. The small circle portion 258 has a star-shaped polygonal design so as to be easily distinguishable from the small circle portions 250-257 in which the touch sensor is disposed because the touch sensor is not disposed. Further, since the small circle portion 258 does not arrange a touch sensor, it can be a home position when the player operates eight touch sensors. When the push button 25 is at the center of the gaming machine 10 and the operation unit 24 is on the right side, the small circle portion 258 is positioned on the front left side among the small circle portions 251 to 258 when viewed from the player side. , Makes it easy for the player to treat the small circle portion 258 as a home position.

  Although the push button 25 does not arrange a touch sensor in the small circle portion 258, a touch sensor may be arranged in the same manner as the small circle portions 250-257. Further, the push button 25 may be provided with a touch panel capable of detecting position coordinates of a touch operation of a player, instead of the touch sensor. In that case, the effect control device 300 can detect the touch operation of the small circle portions 250 to 258 from the coordinates corresponding to the small circle portions 250 to 258 and the position coordinates detected by the touch panel.

  Next, the relationship between the push button operation and the attitude change state of the sub display device will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the push button operation according to the third embodiment and the attitude change state of the sub display device.

  The control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300 can detect a predetermined touch operation from the detection signal of the touch sensor of the push button 25. The control unit can change the posture state of the sub display device 501 located on the front surface of the display device 41 according to the detected touch operation.

  For example, the control unit can detect a counterclockwise touch operation as shown in (1A) from the detection signal of the touch sensor of the push button 25 and detects the counterclockwise touch operation of the push button 25. The posture state of the sub display device 501 can be changed from the standard posture state to the left inclined posture state as shown in (1B).

  Further, the control unit can detect a clockwise touch operation as shown in (2A) from the detection signal of the touch sensor of the push button 25 and detects the clockwise touch operation of the push button 25 to display the sub display The posture state of the device 501 can be changed from the standard posture state to the right inclined posture state as shown in (2B).

  Further, since the gaming machine 10 can perform symbol variation display according to the posture state of the sub display device 501, it is possible to perform an effect that the player operation intervenes in the symbol variation display. Such a gaming machine 10 can improve the interest of the player in the posture state (operation state) of the sub display device 501.

  In the gaming machine 10, although the sub display device 501 is a 5-digit display composed of five 7-segment LEDs, a dot matrix display or an LCD display may be used. In addition, although the gaming machine 10 receives the player's operation from the detection signal of the touch sensor of the push button 25, the present invention is not limited to the touch operation, and pressing operation of the button SW, lever operation or stick operation, input operation by gesture or voice Or the like.

Although not shown, the gaming machine 10 can change and control the attitude of the sub display device 501 by the operation of one or more actuators (such as a motor and a solenoid).
Modification 1 of Third Embodiment
The gaming machine 10 of the first modification of the third embodiment is capable of changing the posture state of the sub display device 501 in the front-rear direction, and performing variation display of symbols corresponding to the posture state of the sub display device 501. it can. The posture state of the sub display device 501 of the first modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing an example of the posture change state and the fluctuation display of the sub display device of the modification 1 of the third embodiment. The views shown in FIGS. 64 (1A), (2A), and (3A) are image views of the display device 41 and the sub display device 501 as viewed from the side. The views shown in FIGS. 64 (1B), (2B), and (3B) illustrate the variation display mode in the sub display device 501. FIG. The gaming machine 10 can change the sub display device 501 to, for example, three attitude states.

  The drawing shown in (1A) shows a posture state (standard posture state) which is a standard of the sub display device 501. The sub display device 501 is on the front of the display device 41 (main display device). The standard posture state of the sub display device 501 is a posture state in which the display surface of the display device 41 and the display surface of the sub display device 501 are substantially parallel, and in the posture state in which the display surface of the sub display device 501 faces the front. is there. At this time, the gaming machine 10 performs symbol variation display by symbol switching in the sub display device 501 ((1B)).

  The drawing shown in (2A) shows a posture state in which the sub display device 501 is tilted backward (backward tilt state). The sub display device 501 is on the front of the display device 41. The backward tilt posture state of the sub display device 501 is a posture state in which the display screen upper end side of the sub display device 501 is closer to the display surface of the display device 41 compared to the display screen lower end side, and the display surface of the sub display device 501 is It is a posture that turns diagonally upward. At this time, the gaming machine 10 performs symbol variation display by vertical scrolling downward on the sub display device 501 ((2B)).

  The figure shown to (3A) shows the attitude | position state (forward inclination attitude | position state) which the sub display apparatus 501 leaned forward. The sub display device 501 is on the front of the display device 41. The forwardly inclined posture state of the sub display device 501 is a posture state in which the lower end side of the display surface of the sub display device 501 is closer to the display surface of the display device 41 as compared with the upper end side of the display surface It is in the posture that turns diagonally downward. At this time, the gaming machine 10 performs symbol variation display by vertical scroll upward in the sub display device 501 ((3B)).

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 can perform symbol variation display in accordance with the attitude state of the sub display device 501. Further, the gaming machine 10 may change the posture state of the sub display device 501 in response to the player's operation, or may perform an effect in which the player intervenes in the symbol change display. Such a gaming machine 10 can improve the interest of the player in the posture state (operation state) of the sub display device 501.

[Modification 2 of the third embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 of the second modification of the third embodiment is capable of changing the posture state of the sub display device 501 in the left and right direction, and performing variation display of symbols corresponding to the posture state of the sub display device 501. it can. The posture state of the sub display device 501 of the modified example 2 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a view showing an example of the posture change state and the fluctuation display of the sub display device of the modified example 2 of the third embodiment. The diagrams shown in FIGS. 65A, 65A, and 65A are image diagrams of the display device 41 and the sub display device 501 viewed from above. The diagrams shown in FIGS. 65 (1B), (2B), and (3B) illustrate the variation display mode in the sub display device 501. FIG. The gaming machine 10 can change the sub display device 501 to, for example, three attitude states.

  The drawing shown in (1A) shows a posture state (standard posture state) which is a standard of the sub display device 501. The sub display device 501 is on the front of the display device 41 (main display device). The standard posture state of the sub display device 501 is a posture state in which the display surface of the display device 41 and the display surface of the sub display device 501 are substantially parallel, and in the posture state in which the display surface of the sub display device 501 faces the front. is there. At this time, the gaming machine 10 performs symbol variation display by symbol switching in the sub display device 501 ((1B)).

  The drawing shown in (2A) shows a posture state in which the sub display device 501 is inclined backward to the right (right inclination posture state). The sub display device 501 is on the front of the display device 41. The right-tilt posture state of the sub display device 501 is a posture state in which the right end side of the display surface of the sub display device 501 is closer to the display surface of the display device 41 compared to the left end side of the display surface It is a posture that turns to the right. At this time, the gaming machine 10 performs symbol variation display by rightward horizontal scroll on the sub display device 501 ((2B)).

  The drawing shown in (3A) shows a posture state in which the sub display device 501 is tilted backward to the left (left tilt posture state). The sub display device 501 is on the front of the display device 41. The left inclined posture state of the sub display device 501 is a posture state in which the left end side of the display surface of the sub display device 501 is closer to the display surface of the display device 41 as compared with the right end side of the display surface It is a posture state that turns to the left. At this time, the gaming machine 10 performs symbol variation display by horizontal scroll in the left direction on the sub display device 501 ((3B)).

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 can perform symbol variation display in accordance with the attitude state of the sub display device 501. Further, the gaming machine 10 may change the posture state of the sub display device 501 in response to the player's operation, or may perform an effect in which the player intervenes in the symbol change display. Such a gaming machine 10 can improve the interest of the player in the posture state (operation state) of the sub display device 501.

[Modification 3 of the third embodiment]
The symbol array 615 of the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment repeatedly arranges three symbols and two decoration displays located on both sides thereof, but the gaming machine 10 according to the third modification of the third embodiment is a decoration Repeatedly arrange only the design without the indication. The symbol variation due to the horizontal scroll in the sub-display device 501 of the third modification of the third embodiment will be described using FIG. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing an example of variable display in the sub display device of the modification 3 of the third embodiment.

  The sub display device 501 sets a symbol array 616 in which symbols are arranged in the horizontal direction when performing symbol variation by horizontal scroll. The symbol array 616 repeatedly arranges combinations of hit symbols (for example, “1, 1, 1”, “2, 2, 2”, etc.).

  The gaming machine 10 performs horizontal scrolling while changing the posture state of the sub display device 501. First, the sub display device 501 displays the partial symbol arrays “4, 4 and 5” shown in FIG. 66 (1) as the large symbol group 601s in the standard posture state.

  Next, the gaming machine 10 changes the attitude of the sub display device 501 from the standard attitude to the right inclination attitude. The gaming machine 10 moves the large symbol group 617 to the left on the symbol array 616 when the sub display device 501 is in the right inclination posture state. That is, the sub display device 501 displays the symbol variation in which the large symbol group 617 horizontally scrolls in the right direction.

  When the sub display device 501 horizontally scrolls in the right direction by one unit (one digit) from the partial symbol array “4, 4, 5” (see FIG. 66 (1)), the partial symbol array “4, "4, 4" (see FIG. 66 (2)).

  Similarly, when the sub display device 501 horizontally scrolls in the right direction by one unit (one digit) from the partial symbol array “4, 4, 4” (see FIG. 66 (2)), the partial symbols in the large symbol group 617 The array "3, 4, 4" (see FIG. 66 (3)) is displayed.

  Then, when the sub display device 501 reaches the end of the symbol array 616 and displays the partial symbol array "7, 1, 1" (see FIG. 66 (4)) in the large symbol group 617, the posture state of the sub display device 501. Is changed from the right inclined posture state to the standard posture state. At this time, the gaming machine 10 can set the partial symbol arrangement being displayed in the large symbol group 617 as a stop symbol. Further, the gaming machine 10 can re-variate the partial symbol array being displayed on the large symbol group 617 as a temporary stop symbol.

  For example, the gaming machine 10 changes the attitude state of the sub display device 501 from the standard attitude state to the left inclined attitude state. The gaming machine 10 moves the large symbol group 617 to the right by the symbol array 616 when the posture state of the sub display device 501 is the left inclination posture state. That is, the sub display device 501 displays the symbol variation in which the large symbol group 617 horizontally scrolls in the left direction.

  When the sub display device 501 horizontally scrolls in the left direction by one unit (one digit) from the partial symbol array “7, 1, 1” (see FIG. 66 (4)), the partial symbol array “1, 1” 1, 1 ”(see FIG. 66 (5)).

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 can change the posture state of the sub display device 501, and can perform symbol variation according to the posture state of the sub display device 501. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may display a symbol combination that becomes a hit or a symbol combination that becomes an "off" by simply moving the large symbol group 617 on the symbol array 616 by repeatedly arranging combinations of hit symbols. it can.

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can perform a novel display effect on the player, and can further improve the interest. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can improve the interest of the player in the posture state (operation state) of the sub display device 501.

  Although the gaming machine 10 is capable of changing the attitude state of the sub display device 501 based on the display device 41, it has an aspect that the attitude state of the sub display device 501 can be changed based on the gaming board 30.

[Modification 4 of the third embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 of the fourth modification of the third embodiment can produce double reach using a 5-digit display (sub display device 501) composed of five 7-segment LEDs. Double reach produced using the sub display device 501 will be described using FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. FIG. 67 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of variable display in the sub display according to the fourth modification of the third embodiment; FIG. 68 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of the variable display in the sub display according to the fourth modification of the third embodiment;

  The sub display device 501 shown in FIG. 67 (1) is displaying the large symbol group 618 during symbol variation due to symbol switching. The sub display device 501 shown in FIG. 67 (1) switches and displays symbols using three arranged in the center of the display portions 501b, 501c, and 501d, and uses two located at the end portions of the display portions 501a and 501e. Display the decoration (for example, the G segment lights on, other lights off). In the sub-display device 501 shown in FIG. 67 (1), the display 501b switches the left symbol 601L, the display 501c switches the middle symbol 601C, and the display 501d switches the right symbol 601R at high speed by cross hatching. Show. That is, the sub display device 501 shown in FIG. 67 (1) indicates that the left symbol 601L, the right symbol 601R, and the middle symbol 601C are being changed by symbol switching.

  The sub display device 501 shown in FIG. 67 (2) indicates that the display portion 501b is in the stop display (including the temporary stop) of the left symbol 601L with "4" by black filled numerals. Further, in the sub-display device 501 shown in FIG. 67 (2), the display portion 501c indicates that the middle symbol 601C is being displayed, and the display portion 501d indicates that the right symbol 601R is being symbol switched by cross hatching.

  In the sub display device 501 shown in FIG. 67 (3), the display unit 501b is displaying the left symbol 601L at "4" for stop display, and the display unit 501d is displaying the right symbol 601R at "5" for stop display Show that with black filled numbers. Further, the sub display device 501 shown in FIG. 67 (3) indicates by cross hatching that the display portion 501c is in the middle of the symbol 601C in symbol switching. That is, the sub display device 501 shown in FIG. 67 (3) shows a state in which the sub display device 501 is not reaching.

  Then, when the sub display device 501 shown in FIG. 67 (3) does not derive the reach, the sub display device 501 displays the middle symbol 601C in the stop state, and becomes the "outage stop mode". For example, the sub display device 501 shows the “falling stop mode” as shown in FIG. 68 (6). In the sub display device 501, the display portion 501b is displaying the left symbol 601L at "4" for stop display, the display portion 501c is displayed at the middle symbol 601C for "6", and the display portion 501d is displayed. The fact that the right symbol 601R is stopped and displayed at "5" is indicated by a black filled number.

  On the other hand, when the sub display device 501 shown in FIG. 67 (3) derives the reach, the decorative display of the display portions 501a and 501e is switched to the symbol display before the middle symbol 601C is stopped and displayed. At this time, the sub display device 501 also displays the symbol displayed by the display unit 501b on the display unit 501a. The sub display device 501 also displays the symbol displayed by the display unit 501d on the display unit 501e.

  As a result, the sub display device 501 shows a display mode as shown in FIG. The sub display device 501 shown in FIG. 67 (4) is a display mode for producing a double reach. The sub display device 501 indicates that the display units 501a and 501b are displaying the stop at "4" and that the display units 501d and 501e are displaying the stop at "5" by black-filled numerals. The cross hatching indicates that the display unit 501c is switching symbols.

  The sub display device 501 sets two large symbol groups 619 and 620 instead of the large symbol group 618. Thus, the sub display device 501 produces a double reach consisting of the reach by the large symbol group 619 and the reach by the large symbol group 620.

  Large symbol group 619 includes three symbols aligned from the left end of display portions 501a, 501b, and 501c as left symbol 601L, middle symbol 601C, and right symbol 601R. Large symbol group 620 includes three symbols arranged from the right end of display portions 501c, 501d, and 501e as left symbol 601L, middle symbol 601C, and right symbol 601R. That is, display portion 501a displays left symbol 601L in large symbol group 619, display portion 501b displays middle symbol 601C in large symbol group 619, and display portion 501c with right symbol 601R in large symbol group 619. The left symbol 601L in the large symbol group 620 is displayed, the display unit 501d displays the middle symbol 601C in the large symbol group 620, and the display unit 501e displays the right symbol 601R in the large symbol group 620.

  Thereby, the sub display device 501 displays reach for waiting for the stop of the right symbol 601R in the large symbol group 619, and displays reach for waiting for the stop of the left symbol 601L in the large symbol group 620.

  Then, when the sub display device 501 derives the hit stop mode in the large symbol group 619, as shown in FIG. 68 (1), the sub display 501 stops and displays "4" on the display unit 501c. Thereby, the sub display device 501 displays the hit stop mode with the large symbol group 619 and displays the “disengagement stop mode” with the large symbol group 620. Then, as shown in FIG. 68 (2), the sub display device 501 is based on the large symbol group 619 derived from the stop pattern of the large symbol group 619 and the stop pattern of the large symbol group 620 and derived from the stop pattern. The stop mode in the large symbol group 618 is displayed.

  Further, when the sub display device 501 derives the hit stop mode in the large symbol group 620, as shown in FIG. 68 (3), the sub display 501 stops and displays "5" on the display unit 501c. Thereby, the sub display device 501 displays the hit stop mode with the large symbol group 620 and displays the “disengagement stop mode” with the large symbol group 619. Then, as shown in FIG. 68 (4), the sub display device 501 is based on the large symbol group 620 derived from the stop pattern of the large symbol group 619 and the stop pattern of the large symbol group 620 and derived from the stop pattern. The stop mode in the large symbol group 618 is displayed.

  In addition, when the sub display device 501 derives the “disengagement stop mode” in the large symbol group 620, as shown in FIG. 68 (5), for example, “6” is stopped and displayed on the display unit 501c. As a result, the sub display device 501 displays the “disengagement stop mode” in the large symbol groups 619 and 620. Then, based on the stop mode of large symbol group 619 and the stop mode of large symbol group 620, sub display device 501 displays the stop mode in large symbol group 618 as shown in FIG. 68 (6).

Thus, the gaming machine 10 can produce double reach using the sub display device 501.
The gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment (including the modification) described above has the following features in one aspect.

  (1) The gaming machine 10 includes a display device (sub display device 501) and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display device can change its posture. The control means causes the display device to display the first display effect (for example, horizontal scroll in the left direction) when the display device is changed to the first posture (for example, left inclined posture state), and causes the display device to be in the second posture. The second display effect (for example, horizontal scroll in the right direction) is displayed on the display device when the display device is changed to (for example, right inclined posture state).

  (2) The gaming machine 10 of (1) includes the rear display device (display device 41) at a position overlapping the display device on the rear surface side of the display device (sub display device 501). Furthermore, when the display device is changed to the first posture, the control means of (1) performs a third display effect (for example, a background 613 inclined according to the inclination of the sub display device 501) on the back side display device The character 612 slidingly displayed on the left side is displayed, and when the display device is changed to the second posture, a fourth display effect (for example, a background inclined according to the inclination of the sub display device 501) on the back side display device 613, to display a character 612) which is slide-displayed on the right side.

  (3) The gaming machine 10 includes display means (sub display device 501) and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display means can display the variable display game by arranging five displays (7-segment type LEDs) capable of displaying symbols respectively in a row. The control means is capable of displaying the variable display game on the first effective line (large symbol group 618) formed by three of the five displays (see FIG. 67 (3)) , And a second effective line (large symbol group 619) formed by three displays from one side end of the five displays, and formed by three displays from the other side end of the five displays. The second state (see FIG. 67 (4)) in which the variable display game can be displayed on the third effective line (large symbol group 620) to be displayed can be switched and controlled.

Fourth Embodiment
The gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment has a playability that can display the special view 1 and the special view 2 simultaneously in a variable manner. The game characteristics of the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 shows a game state transition diagram of the fourth embodiment and an example of the probability fluctuation state.

  A state transition diagram regarding the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 is shown in FIG. The gaming machine 10 sets the normal state St1, the big hit state St2, the specific state 1St3 and the specific state 2St4 as main game states.

  The normal state St1 is a main gaming state, and both the special view 1 variation display game and the special view 2 variation display game have low probability states, and is a gaming state in which there is no power transmission support. The normal state St1 is a gaming state in which the player is guided to the left strike game. In the left-handed game, the gaming ball flows down the lower left side of the center case 40 in the gaming area 32 of the gaming machine 10. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 has the game property of making the gaming ball win the prize mainly in the start winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) in the normal state St1 and waiting for the occurrence of the big hit. That is, the gaming machine 10 has the game property of waiting for the occurrence of the big hit derived by the special view 1 variable display game in the normal state St1. The gaming machine 10 sets the transition condition Tr12 from the normal state St1 to the big hit state St2 as the occurrence of a big hit.

  The jackpot state St2 is a gaming state including a jackpot state derived by the special view 1 fluctuation display game and a jackpot state derived by the special view 2 fluctuation display game. In the big hit state, the gaming machine 10 is a special variation winning device (a big winning opening, a big winning opening 2) by a big hit derived by a special figure 1 variable display game and a big hit derived by a special figure 2 variable display game. Convert 38 to the open state.

  In the gaming machine 10, the end of the jackpot is a transition condition from the jackpot state St2 to another gaming state, and the gaming state after the jackpot end is low probability and there is no general power support transition condition from the jackpot state St2 to the normal state St1. Tr21, and the gaming state after the big hit end is high probability and with the general power support transition condition Tr23 from the big hit state St2 to the specific state 1 St3 and the gaming state after the big hit is high probability without the general power support big hit state St2 As a transition condition Tr24 from the specific state 2St4.

  The specific state 1St3 is a high probability state in which both the special view 1 variation display game and the special view 2 variation display game are in a high probability state, and is a gaming state in which there is a power transmission support. The specific state 1St3 is a gaming state in which the player is guided to the right-handed game. In the right-handed game, the gaming ball flows down the right side of the center case 40 in the gaming area 32. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 has the game property of winning the gaming ball in the normal variation winning device 37 (starting opening 1) mainly in the specific state 1St3 and waiting for the occurrence of a big hit. That is, the gaming machine 10 has the game property of waiting for the occurrence of the big hit derived by the special view 1 variable display game in the specific state 1St3. The gaming machine 10 sets the transition condition Tr32 from the specific state 1St3 to the big hit state St2 as the occurrence of a big hit. Further, the gaming machine 10 sets the transition condition Tr34 from the specific state 1St3 to the specific state 2St4 as the termination of the power transmission support. For example, in the specific state 1St3, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are variably displayed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), the gaming machine 10 ends the power transmission support.

  The specific state 2St4 is a gaming state in which both the special view 1 variation display game and the special view 2 variation display game are in high probability states, and there is no power transmission support. The specific state 2St4 is a gaming state in which the player is guided to the right-handed game. In the right-handed game, the gaming ball flows down the right side of the center case 40 in the gaming area 32. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 has the game property of winning the gaming ball mainly in the start winning opening 92 (starting opening 2) in the specific state 2St4 and waiting for the occurrence of a big hit. That is, the gaming machine 10 has the game property of waiting for the occurrence of the big hit derived by the special view 2 variable display game in the specific state 2St4. The gaming machine 10 sets the transition condition Tr42 from the specific state 2St4 to the big hit state St2 as the occurrence of a big hit.

  Here, the probability fluctuation state of the special view 1 variation display game and the special view 2 variation display game shown in FIG. 69 (2) will be described. The special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can derive small hits in addition to the big hit. The gaming machine 10 converts the special fluctuation winning device 38 into the open state by the occurrence of the big hit in the special view 1 variable display game and the special view 2 variable display game. On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 converts the special variation winning device 95 into the open state by the occurrence of the small hit of the special view 1 variation display game, and the special variation winning device 38 by the occurrence of the small hitting of the special view 2 variation display game. Convert to open state. The small hit of the special figure 2 variable display game is a relatively high value small hit because there are more prize balls obtainable than the small hit of the special figure 1 variable display game.

  In the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, both the big hit probability and the small hit probability are set low probability in the low probability state, the high probability is set to the big hit probability in the high probability state, and the low probability is set to the small hit probability. For example, in the special view 1 variation display game, the jackpot probability is set to 1/250 in the low probability state and 1/50 in the high probability state. Further, in the special view 1 variation display game, the small hit probability is set to 1/10000 (low probability state).

  In the special figure 2 variation display game, both the big hit probability and the small hit probability are set low probability in the low probability state, and the high probability is set both the big hit probability and the small hit probability in the high probability state. For example, in the special view 2 variation display game, the jackpot probability is set to 1/250 in the low probability state and 1/50 in the high probability state. In the special figure 2 variation display game, the small hitting probability is set to 1/10000 in the low probability state, and 9999/10000 in the high probability state.

Thus, the gaming machine 10 has the game property of increasing the number of winning balls by small hit in the specific state 2St4, in addition to the game of increasing the number of winning balls by the big hit in the big hit state St2.
Here, the configuration of the display screen in the display device 41 in the specific state 2St4 will be described using FIGS. 70 to 72. FIG. FIG. 70 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of a display screen in the display device of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 71 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating an example of the display screen in the display device according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 72 is a diagram (part 3) illustrating an example of the display screen in the display device according to the fourth embodiment.

  The display contents of the display device 41 and the sub display device 501 in the specific state 2St4 are shown in FIG. 70 (1). The display content of the display device 41 shown in FIG. 70 (1) indicates that the symbol is being changed in the variable display game. The display device 41 includes a small symbol 625, a special figure 1 pending number display 603, a special figure 2 pending number display 604, and a game guide 610 in the display contents of the variable display game while the symbol is stopped. The small symbol 625 is one of the decorative symbols, and is displayed small on the peripheral portion of the display device 41. The small symbol 625 is displayed as a single digit symbol variation.

  Further, the display device 41 sets an effect area 622 and displays an effect display 623. For example, the effect display 623 produces a match between two characters (main character (left) and enemy character (right)).

  Further, the gaming machine 10 causes the sub display device 501 to appear on the front surface of the display device 41 in the specific state 2St4, and displays on the sub display device 501 the cumulative winning prize ball number acquired during the specific state 2St4. The cumulative winning number of balls is reset at the normal state St1. For example, the sub-display device 501 indicates that the accumulated winning number of balls is "410". The cumulative winning number of balls may be the cumulative number of winning balls obtained in the big hit state St2, the specific state 1St3, and the specific state 2St4.

  The display content of the display device 41 shown in FIG. 70 (2) shows the state at the time of symbol stop in the variable display game. The display device 41 displays “o” as a small hit symbol of the small symbol 625. Further, the display device 41 sets the effect area 622 and displays the effect display 624. For example, the effect display 624 produces a victory of the main character (left) of the two characters (the main character (left) and the enemy character (right)). Thereby, the gaming machine 10 guides the small hit occurrence with the small symbol 625 and the effect area 622.

  The display content of the display device 41 shown in FIG. 71 (1) shows the state of a small hit in the variable display game. The display device 41 displays “o” as a small hit symbol of the small symbol 625. Further, the display device 41 displays a large symbol 626 in the effect area 622. The large design 626 is one of the decorative patterns, and is displayed large at the central portion of the effect area 622. The large symbol 626 is displayed with the symbol variation omitted. The display device 41 displays, for example, white “7” (hereinafter “white 7”) as a small hit symbol of the large symbol 626. Therefore, the large symbol 626 is a symbol for notifying that the result of the variable display game is a small hit.

  The display content of the display device 41 shown in FIG. 71 (2) also shows the state of a small hit in the variable display game. The display device 41 displays “o” as a small hit symbol of the small symbol 625. Further, the display device 41 displays a large symbol 627 in the effect area 622. The large design 627 is one of the decorative patterns, and is displayed large at the central portion of the effect area 622. The large symbol 627 is displayed with no symbol variation. The display device 41 displays, for example, “7” (hereinafter, “gold 7”) of gold (indicated by hatching) as a small hit symbol of the large symbol 627. Therefore, the large symbol 627 is also a symbol notifying that the result of the variable display game is a small hit.

  However, the gaming machine 10 does not display the large pattern 627 only when the result of the variable display game is a small hit. The gaming machine 10 displays the large symbol 627 with a predetermined probability when the result of the variable display game is a small hit and the specific state 2St 4 continues a predetermined number of times.

  For example, in the case where there is no start memory for deriving a big hit in the stored start memory, the gaming machine 10 replaces the large symbol 626 (i.e., "white 7") with the large symbol 627 (i.e., "gold 7"). It can be displayed. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can inform the player that there is no start memory for deriving a big hit among the start memories on hold. For example, the display device 41 shown in FIG. 71 (2) displays “4” in the special view 2 reservation number display 604, and thus can guide that no big hit is included in any of the four start memories. it can.

  In the specified state 2St4, the gaming machine 10 can indicate that the specified state 2St4 continues until at least the pending start memory is digested by displaying "gold 7". Since the gaming machine 10 has the gaming property of increasing the number of award winning balls by a small hit in the specific state 2St4, displaying "gold 7" can improve the interest that the player can perceive.

  Further, the display device 41 shown in FIG. 71 (2) displays a state guidance display 628 in the effect area 622. The state guidance display 628 is a band-shaped message display, which is vertically arranged on both sides of the effect area 622, displays the message "absolute invincibility", and guides the continuation of the specific state 2St4. By simultaneously displaying “gold 7” and the state information display 628, the gaming machine 10 can further improve the interest that the player can feel.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 updates the cumulative winning prize ball count while displaying the large symbol 626 (i.e., "white 7") and the large symbol 627 (i.e., "gold 7"). For example, the sub-display device 501 indicates that the accumulated winning number of balls is "420".

  FIG. 72 (1) shows the display contents of the display device 41 for the next fluctuation after displaying "gold 7". The display device 41 shown in FIG. 72 (1) shows a state in which the symbol is being changed in the variable display game. The display device 41 continues to display the state guidance display 628 in the effect area 622 while displaying “gold 7” and continuing the specific state 2St 4 a predetermined number of times. Thereby, even when the display of "gold 7" is not performed, the gaming machine 10 can guide the continuation of the specific state 2St4 by the display of the state guidance display 628. In addition, the gaming machine 10 updates the accumulated winning number of balls even during symbol change after displaying "Fri 7". For example, the sub-display device 501 indicates that the accumulated winning number of balls is “440”.

  The display content of the display device 41 shown in FIG. 72 (2) shows the state at the time of symbol stop in the variable display game. The display device 41 displays “o” as a small hit symbol of the small symbol 625. The display device 41 continues to display the state guidance display 628 in the effect area 622 while the specific state 2St4 continues only a predetermined number of times during the symbol stop of the small symbol 625 as well as during the symbol change of the small symbol 625 Do. Thereby, even when the display of "gold 7" is not performed, the gaming machine 10 can guide the continuation of the specific state 2St4 by the display of the state guidance display 628. In addition, the gaming machine 10 updates the cumulative winning prize ball count even while the symbol is stopped after displaying the "gold 7". For example, the sub-display device 501 indicates that the accumulated winning number of balls is "450".

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70 (1) or FIG. 70 (2), the gaming machine 10 displays a large symbol 626 (i.e., "white 7") or a large symbol 627 (i.e., "gold 7"). Although the case where the gaming machine 10 derives a small hit has been described, in the case of deriving a big hit or "off", the corresponding variable display is performed to derive a corresponding result.

The large symbols 626 and 627 are displayed as decorative symbols, but may be displayed as effect display during a small hit.
Although the large symbol 627 is displayed when there is no starting memory for deriving a big hit in the pending starting memory, the starting memory for deriving a specific result aspect in the pending starting memory is It may be displayed when there is no. For example, the large symbol 627 may be displayed when there is no start memory for deriving a jackpot without probability fluctuation among the pending start memories.

Next, the display mode of the large symbol selected at the time of a small hit will be described using FIG. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example of a condition-specific large symbol display mode at the time of a small hit according to the fourth embodiment.
When the special figure 2 reservation number display 604 is “1” or more, in addition to the start memory of “1” or more, when the jackpot is not derived in all of the start memories during digestion, small The display mode of the large symbol selected at the time of hitting is either "gold 7" or "white 7". For example, the gaming machine 10 selects "gold 7" with a probability of 10%, and selects "white 7" with a probability of 90%.

  When "gold 7" is selected, the gaming machine 10 can reserve the selection of "gold 7" for small hits in the variable display after the next time within the range of the number of start memories. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can realize continuous selection of "gold 7". For example, the gaming machine 10 may select "gold 7" for five consecutive times including start memory during digestion when the special figure 2 hold number display 604 is "4".

  In addition, when special figure 2 reservation number indication 604 is “1” or more, when there is a case that the big hit is derived with the starting memory of “1” or more, the big symbol of the big symbol which is selected at the time of small hit The display mode is set to "White 7". When special figure 2 reservation number indicator 604 is “0”, “white symbol display mode of the large symbol selected at the time of small hit is“ white regardless of whether or not the big hit is derived in starting memory during digestion 7 ”.

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can guide the continuation of the specific state 2St4 by setting the display pattern of the large symbol to "gold 7". In addition, the gaming machine 10 can guide the possibility of continuation of the specific state 2St4 even when the display mode of the large symbol is set to "white 7".

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 selects "gold 7" with a probability of 10% when the display mode of the large symbol is either "gold 7" or "white 7", and "white 7" with a probability of 90%. Although the selection probability may be made to differ according to the number of starting memories.

  For example, the gaming machine 10 selects "gold 7" with a probability of 10% when the special figure 2 reserve number display 604 is "4", selects "white 7" with a probability of 90%, and selects special figure 2 When the number-of-retentions display 604 is "1", "gold 7" may be selected with a probability of 30%, and "white 7" may be selected with a probability of 70%. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can increase the appearance rate of the “gold 7” in a state where the number of start memories stored by the player is small, while suppressing the appearance rate of the “gold 7” as a whole. In addition, the gaming machine 10 selects “gold 7” with a probability of 10% when the special figure 2 reserve number display 604 is “4”, selects “white 7” with a probability of 90%, and selects the special figure 2 When the number-of-retentions display 604 is “1”, “gold 7” may be selected with a probability of 1%, and “white 7” may be selected with a probability of 99%. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can improve the operation rate by giving a benefit to a state in which the number of start memories is large, while suppressing the appearance rate of the “gold 7” as a whole.

  Next, a small hit design determination process for determining the display pattern (small hit design) of the large design displayed at the time of the small hit in the specific state 2St4 will be described using FIG. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a flowchart of small hitting symbol determination processing in the effect control device of the fourth embodiment.

  The small hit symbol determination process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The small hitting symbol determination process is a process executed when the control unit is in the specific state 2St4 in step D23 (see FIG. 44) of the main process.

  [Step D91] The control unit determines whether or not the result mode derived by any of the special view 1 change display game and the special view 2 change display game is “off”. The control unit proceeds to step D101 if the result mode derived by any of the special view 1 change display game and the special view 2 change display game is "disengagement", and proceeds to step D92 if not.

  [Step D92] The control unit determines whether the number of informing symbol reservations is "1" or more. The control unit proceeds to step D98 when the number of informing symbol reservations is "1" or more, and proceeds to step D93 when it is less than "1" (i.e., "0"). Note that the number of informing symbol reservations is the number of starting memories (number of reservations) in which the selection of “gold 7” (informing symbol) is reserved for small hits in the subsequent variable display within the range of the number of starting memories.

  [Step D93] The control unit acquires information (starting memory number information) relating to the special view 1 change display game and the start view storage of the special view 2 change display game. The start storage number information includes the start view storage numbers of the special view 1 fluctuation display game and the special view 2 change display game, and the result mode derived from the respective start storages.

  [Step D94] The control unit determines whether or not there is a specific result mode (specific result) in the starting memory number information. The control unit proceeds to step D100 when there is a specific result in the start memory number information, and proceeds to step D95 when there is no specific result. Note that the specific result may be set as a big hit, a big hit without probability fluctuation, or the like.

[Step D95] The control unit performs a notification lottery.
[Step D96] The control unit determines whether the result of the notification lottery is a win or a win. The control unit proceeds to step D97 if the result of the notification lottery is a winning, and proceeds to step D100 if the result is a failure.

  [Step D97] The control unit sets the number of times of informing symbol reservation. Note that the control unit may set the start storage number as the notification symbol reservation number, or may set the number determined with the start storage number as the upper limit as the notification symbol reservation number.

[Step D98] The control unit sets a notification symbol, that is, sets "gold 7".
[Step D99] The control unit decrements the number of informing symbol reservations by "1" and ends the small hit symbol determination process.

[Step D100] The control unit sets a non-informing symbol, that is, sets "White 7", and ends the small hitting symbol determination process.
[Step D101] The control unit cancels the display of the small hit symbol because it does not derive a small hit as a result of the variable display.

[Step D102] The control unit decrements the number of informing symbol reservations by "1" and ends the small hit symbol determination process.
In this manner, the gaming machine 10 can determine the display mode of the large symbol displayed at the time of the small hit in the specific state 2St4 according to the result mode derived from the start memory. In addition, when “gold 7” is selected, the gaming machine 10 can reserve the selection of “gold 7” for a small hit in the variable display after the next time within the range of the number of starting memories.

  Thus, the gaming machine 10 can inform the player that there is no start memory for deriving a specific result mode (for example, a big hit) among the start memories on hold. Such a game machine 10 has an aspect that it can increase the player's interest in the hold notification effect.

Next, a selection example of the small hit design when the small hits continue will be described using FIG. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example of pending storage and a small hit symbol according to the fourth embodiment.
The pending start memory 630 represents the number of start memories for the pending start memory by the number of circle displays, represents the start memory for deriving the specific result by hatching display, and indicates the start memory for not deriving the specified result by white outline Show. The in-digestion starting memory 631 represents the presence or absence of the starting memory for the starting memory in the digestion by the presence or absence of the circular display, represents the starting memory for deriving the specific result with hatching display, and displays the starting memory for not deriving the specific result in white Show. A bold circle indicates that a notification symbol is reserved, and a thin circle indicates that a notification symbol is not reserved.

  Since the small hit symbol selection example shown in FIG. 75 (1) has a starting memory for deriving a specific result in the third of the pending start memories 630, the gaming machine 10 derives a starting memory 631 during digestion As a result, a large symbol 626 (ie, "White 7") is displayed.

  In the small hit symbol selection example shown in FIG. 75 (2), neither the pending start memory 630 nor the digesting start memory 631 has a starting memory for deriving a specific result. The gaming machine 10 displays the large symbol 626 as a result derived by the digesting start memory 631 when it is disqualified in the notification lottery of step D95 of the small hitting symbol determination processing.

  In the small hit symbol selection example shown in FIG. 75 (3), there is no starting memory for deriving a specific result in any of the pending start memory 630 and the digesting start memory 631. When the gaming machine 10 wins in the notification lottery of step D95 of the small hitting symbol determination process, the gaming machine 10 displays a large symbol 627 (that is, "gold 7") as a result derived by the starting memory during digestion 631. At this time, the gaming machine 10 reserves a notification symbol within the range (for example, three) of the number of memories stored in the starting memory 631 during digestion.

  The selection example of the small hit symbol shown in FIG. 75 (4) is the next variation of the selection example of the small hit symbol shown in FIG. 75 (3). In the small hit symbol selection example shown in FIG. 75 (4), since the notification symbol is reserved, the large symbol 627 is displayed as a result derived from the in-digestion start memory 631.

  The selection example of the small hitting symbol shown in FIG. 75 (5) is the next variation of the selection example of the small hitting symbol shown in FIG. 75 (4). In the small hit symbol selection example shown in FIG. 75 (5), since the notification symbol is reserved, the large symbol 627 is displayed as a result derived from the in-digestion starting memory 631.

  The selection example of the small hit symbol shown in FIG. 75 (6) is the next variation of the selection example of the small hit symbol shown in FIG. 75 (5). In the small hit symbol selection example shown in FIG. 75 (6), since the notification symbol is reserved, the large symbol 627 is displayed as a result derived from the in-digestion start memory 631. In addition, in the selection example of FIG. 75 (5) and the selection example of FIG. 75 (6), although new start memory has occurred in pending start memory 630, new start memory is reserved as a notification symbol. Absent. Also, in the case where the new start-up memory is not a start-up memory that derives a specific result but is a start-up memory that derives a specific result, the new start memory is large in the selection example of FIG. 75 (5) and the selection example of FIG. The symbol 627 may be replaced by a large symbol 626.

The gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 is a gaming machine capable of storing a plurality of start memories as the right of execution of the variable display game, and includes control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). When the control means causes the display means (display device 41) to display predetermined identification information corresponding to the result mode of the variable display game, the control means is specified as a result of the variable display game in the starting memory stored as the execution right The first identification information (for example, "gold 7") is displayed on the display means when there is nothing to derive the result mode (big hit), and as a result of the variable display game in the starting memory stored as the execution right The second identification information different from the first identification information (e.g., other symbols including "White 7") is displayed on the display means when there is one that derives a specific result aspect.

  (2) The control means of (1) may derive a specific result mode as a result of the variable display game among the starting memories stored as the execution right, and the result mode of the variable display game is a specific result When the predetermined identification information is displayed on the display means when the aspect is not derived, the third identification information (for example, "white 7") different from the first identification information (for example, "gold 7") is displayed Display on the means.

  (3) The control means of (1) displays the first display effect (with the state guidance display 628) on the display means when the first identification information (for example, "gold 7") is displayed on the display means. When the second identification information (for example, other symbols including "white 7") is displayed on the display means, the second display effect (without the state guide display 628) is displayed on the display means.

  (4) The control means of (3) derives the result mode corresponding to the starting memory stored at least as the execution right when the first identification information (for example, "gold 7") is displayed on the display means In the meantime, the first display effect (with the state guidance display 628) is continuously displayed on the display means.

Fifth Embodiment
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is different in that a gaming board is provided instead of the gaming board 30 provided in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. In the description of the fifth embodiment, the same reference numerals are given to the same configuration as that of the first embodiment and the description will be omitted.

First, the gaming board provided in the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a front view showing an example of a game board according to the fifth embodiment.
A substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 is formed on the surface of the game board 3000. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases and guide rails 31 respectively provided at four corners of the game board 3000. In the game area 32, a center case 40 provided with a display device (variable display device) 41 substantially at the center is disposed. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 40. In the upper part of the center case 40, there are provided an effect lamp 540 capable of changing the display mode, and board effect devices 550 and 551 for effecting a game by operating.

  Below the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is provided a start winning opening 36 (first start winning opening, start winning area) for giving a start condition of the special figure variation display game. The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

  In addition, on the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (common drawing start gate) 34 is provided which gives a start condition of the common drawing variation display game. The game ball that has won the common drawing start gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).

  Further, below the start winning opening 36, a normal change winning device 37 (second start winning opening, start winning area) for giving a start condition of the special view variable display game is provided. The normal fluctuation winning device 37 is provided with a movable member 37b which can be opened to allow the game ball to easily flow in by opening in the direction in which the upper end side falls to the right, and the movable member 37b is always a game It holds a closed state (a disadvantage for the player) in which the ball can not flow. Then, when the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the game ball easily flows into the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 by the common electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a drive device. It can be changed to a state (a state advantageous to the player). The game ball that has won the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is detected by the starting opening 2 switch 92a (see FIG. 3).

In addition, below the normal fluctuation winning device 37, an out port 30a is provided for collecting gaming balls that did not win a prize port or the like.
Furthermore, on the lower right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32 and below the common drawing start gate 34, it is converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easily accepted. A possible special fluctuation winning device (big winning opening) 38 is provided.

  The special variation winning device 38 has an opening / closing member (opening / closing door) 38c, and the opening / closing member 38c is closed as a result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. In the closed state, the opening / closing member 38 c retracts to convert the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area 32 into an open state (a state advantageous to the player) which can be received. That is, the special variation winning device 38 has a special winning opening which is opened and closed by the opening / closing member 38c driven by the special winning opening 2 solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a drive device. During the big hit game state (the first special game state, the second special game state) as a result of the variable display game, the flow of the game ball into the big winning opening by converting the big winning opening from the closed state to the opened state To give the player a predetermined gaming value (prize ball). In the inside of the special winning opening (winning area), a special winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3) is disposed as a detecting means for detecting the gaming ball having entered the special winning opening. .

  Further, a general winning opening (not shown) is disposed on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the gaming area 32, and one general winning opening 351 is disposed on the right side of the center case 40. The game ball that has won the general winning opening 351 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

  Further, the game ball detected by the winning opening switch 35a is a collection flow path (not shown) for collecting the game ball by the distribution gate 353 disposed immediately below and a production flow path for reusing the game ball for effect And 354 are distributed. The distribution gate makes it possible to switch the distribution state by an actuator (for example, a solenoid, a motor or the like) controlled by the effect control device 300. The effect control device 300 receives the command to be transmitted based on the fact that the game control device 100 detects the game ball by the winning opening switch 35a, and the game ball of the game ball based on the switching state of the sorting gate 353. The flow down of the effect channel 354 can be detected.

  The effect flow path 354 is a flow path continuing from the lower part of the general winning opening 351 to the effect start memory display 355 located below the center case 40, and is formed of a tubular transparent member, for example. Make the gaming ball visible. The effect channel 354 is a form of a collecting channel of game balls, and isolates the game ball flowing down the effect channel 354 and the game ball flowing down the game area 32.

  The effect start memory display 355 is a display device for displaying start memory (effect start memory) of the effect game in which the right to execute is obtained by the game ball flowing down the effect channel 354. The sub display device 530 displays the effect game based on the effect start memory displayed by the effect start memory display 355.

  The effect control device 300 can use the reception of a command to be transmitted based on the detection of the game ball by the game control device 100 by the winning opening switch 35a as an occurrence trigger of the effect start storage. Further, the effect control device 300 receives a command of occurrence trigger of the effect start memory under predetermined conditions (for example, when the game state is predetermined, or when the number of effect start memories is equal to or less than the predetermined upper limit number) It may be limited at times.

Next, the sub display device 530 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 is a diagram illustrating an example of the sub display device according to the fifth embodiment.
The sub display unit 530 includes three matrix display units 530L, 530C, and 530R. In the matrix display sections 530L, 530C, and 530R, 56 petal-shaped dot display sections 531 are arranged in eight rows and seven columns, and each dot display section 531 can be displayed by gradation control (for example, 256 gradations). The matrix display units 530L, 530C, and 530R are control targets of the effect control device 300.

  The sub display device 530 can display 3-digit symbol variation in the effect game, the matrix display unit 530L takes charge of the variation display of the left symbol, the matrix display unit 530C takes charge of the variation display of the middle symbol, and the matrix The display unit 530R is in charge of variable display of the right symbol.

  The sub display device 530 can use the three matrix display units 530L, 530C, and 530R as one matrix display device of 8 rows and 21 columns. Further, the sub display device 530 can perform display other than symbol variation, and can perform realistic character display or the like using gradation control, for example.

  Next, display modes of the effect start memory display 355 and the effect start memory display 355 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing an example of the effect start memory display of the fifth embodiment and an example of its display mode.

  An overview of the effect start memory display 355 is shown in FIG. 78 (1). The effect start memory display 355 has five display parts 355a, 355b, 355c, 355d and 355e on the petals. The five display units 355a, 355b, 355c, 355d, and 355e are, for example, full-color LEDs, and can switch on, off, and blink, and can also light in any color. The display units 355a, 355b, 355c, 355d, and 355e share one changing start storage display and four on hold storage displays. The display units 355a, 355b, 355c, 355d, and 355e can change the sharing of one changing start storage display and four on hold start storage displays at any time. The display units 355a, 355b, 355c, 355d, and 355e are control targets of the effect control device 300.

  An example of a display mode of the effect start memory display 355 is shown in FIG. 78 (2). The effect start memory display 355 turns off all the display portions 355a, 355b, 355c, 355d, and 355e when the change state is “stop” and the number of start memories is “0”.

  The effect start memory display 355 shown in the display example 1 lights the display portion 355a as an initial state when the change state is “stop” and the number of start memories is “1”. At this time, the display unit 355a takes charge of the first pending start storage display.

  The display example 2 is a display example following the display example 1. The effect start storage display 355 shown in the display example 2 lights the display portion 355a as an initial state when the change state is “stop” and the start storage number is “1”. At this time, the display unit 355a takes charge of the first pending start storage display.

  The display example 3 is a display example following the display example 2. The effect start storage display 355 shown in the display example 3 blinks the display unit 355a when the change state is "variation" and the number of start memories is "0". At this time, the display unit 355a takes charge of start-up memory display during fluctuation.

  The display example 4 is a display example following the display example 3. The effect start memory display 355 shown in the display example 4 blinks the display portion 355a and lights the display portion 355b when the change state is "variation" and the number of start memories is "1". At this time, the display unit 355a takes charge of the start-up memory display during variation, and the display unit 355b takes charge of the first hold-up start memory display.

  The display example 5 is a display example following the display example 4. The effect start memory display 355 shown in the display example 5 turns off the display 355a and lights the display 355b when the change state is “stop” and the number of start memories is “1”. At this time, the display unit 355b takes charge of the first pending start storage display.

  The display example 6 is a display example following the display example 5. The effect start memory display 355 shown in the display example 6 blinks the display portion 355b when the change state is "variation" and the number of start memories is "0". At this time, the display unit 355b takes charge of start-up storage display during variation. That is, even if the effect start memory display 355 is in the change state “change” and the start memory number “0”, as in the display example 3 and the display example 6, different display modes can be taken depending on the previous state. .

  The display example n is a display example in which four start memories are generated after the display example 6. The effect start memory display 355 shown in the display example n blinks the display unit 355b and lights all the display units 355a, 355c, 355d, and 355e when the change state is "variation" and the number of start memories is "4". At this time, the display unit 355b takes charge of the start-up memory display during fluctuation, the display unit 355c takes charge of the first holding start-up memory display, and the display unit 355d takes charge of the second hold-up start memory display, The display unit 355e is responsible for the third pending start storage display, and the display unit 355a is responsible for the fourth pending start storage display.

  As a result, the effect start memory display 355 does not require shift display, and realizes one in-duration start memory display and four on-hold start memory displays. Since such effect start memory display 355 does not require the player to grasp the correspondence between the display unit before the shift and the display unit after the shift, the start memory display that can be easily understood by the player can be realized. .

  Note that the display portions 355a, 355b, 355c, 355d, and 355e may be able to change the display color, and the display color can be used to produce an expectation and the like. Further, the effect start memory display 355 may fix in advance the person in charge of one moving start memory display and four pending start memory displays in the display portions 355a, 355b, 355c, 355d, and 355e.

  Further, the effect start memory display 355 is a hold standby display (for example, the hold display 507 shown in FIG. 49 (1)) and the hold digest display (for example, the hold digest display 508 shown in FIG. 49 (1)) in the special view game. The target of the on-hold standby display or the on-hold digest display may be made switchable between the special drawing game and the effect game according to the game state, the effect mode, and the like. For example, the gaming machine 10 can set the target of the hold on standby display and the hold on display in the effect start memory display 355 as a special view game in the left-handed game state and as an effect game in the right-handed game state. Further, the gaming machine 10 can set the target of the hold on standby display or the hold on display in the effect start memory display 355 as the effect game in the general power support gaming state, and as the special view game in the non-general power support gaming state.

  Next, the structure of the effect lamp 540 and the display mode of the effect lamp 540 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an example of the structure and display mode of the effect lamp according to the fifth embodiment.

  The structure of the effect lamp 540 is shown in FIG. 79 (1). The effect lamp 540 includes a projection lens 541, a display content selection board 542, and a light source 543. The light source 543 is, for example, a full color LED, and can switch on, off, and blink, and can also turn on in any color. The display content selection board 542 is disk-shaped and can be rotated in the circumferential direction by an actuator. The display content selection board 542 is provided with small circular display plates 544 to 549 which can transmit the irradiation light of the light source 543 in the circumferential direction (FIG. 79 (2)). The effect lamp 540 is a control target of the effect control device 300.

  The display plates 544 to 549 have predetermined images. For example, the display plate 544 has the message "super heat" on the transmission surface as a fixed image. Further, the display plate 546 has the character "Tora" on the transmission surface as a fixed image. In addition, the display plates 545, 547, 549 have the required pieces of the animation image on the transparent surface. In addition, the display plate 548 has a plain transparent surface. The display plate 548 is a standard transmission surface that is displayed from the normal time, and may not necessarily be plain and may have a predetermined pattern on the transmission surface. For example, the display plate 548 may have a background display (such as the moon or a mountain river) along the game theme on the transparent surface.

  The light source 543 can irradiate one of the display plates 544 to 549, and the display content selection board 542 can switch the display plate to be irradiated by rotation. The projection lens 541 magnifies and projects the transmitted light of one of the display plates 544-549 on the projection surface. Thereby, the effect lamp 540 can project a predetermined display on the projection lens 541 by the combination of the light emission mode of the light source 543 and the display plates 544 to 549.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 79 (3), the effect lamp 540 displays a message "super heat" corresponding to the display plate 544 as a fixed image display, or displays a character "tra" corresponding to the display plate 546. Can be Also, the effect lamp 540 can display an animation in which a petal dances by switching and displaying the display plates 545, 547, 549 as an animation display. At this time, the effect lamp 540 can realize animation display by rotating the display content selection board 542 at a constant speed and controlling the light emission timing of the light source 543. In addition, the effect lamp 540 can also change the aspect which a petal dances, changing the display order of the display boards 545,547,549 by switching of a light emission timing. For example, the effect lamp 540 can be switched and displayed using two of the display boards 545, 547, 549, or in the order of the display boards 545, 547, 549 or in the order of the display boards 549, 547, 545. It can also be switched and displayed.

  The animation display on the effect lamp 540 may be in cooperation with the display performed on other display units. For example, the animation display in the effect lamp 540 may have the same display mode as the animation display performed in the hold on standby display or the hold on display in the display device 41 or the effect start storage display 355. At this time, the gaming machine 10 can perform a display effect with a sense of unity by synchronizing the animation display in the effect lamp 540 with the animation display in the display device 41 and the effect start storage display 355. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can perform display effect with continuity by taking over the animation display in the effect lamp 540 by the display device 41 and the animation display in the effect start memory display 355. Further, the game machine 10 can perform display effects having various presentation opportunities by making the animation display in the effect lamp 540 asynchronous with the animation display in the display device 41 and the effect start memory display 355.

  Also, the effect lamp 540 can perform color change display such as white, blue, red, green, yellow, cherry color, rainbow color, etc. by switching the light emission color of the light source 543 on the display plate 548.

Next, the operation mode of the panel effects devices 550 and 551 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing an example of an operation mode of the board rendering device of the fifth embodiment.
FIG. 80 (1) shows the non-operating state of the panel effects devices 550, 551. The board effect device 550 is located on the lower left side of the effect lamp 540, and the board effect device 551 is located on the lower right side of the effect lamp 540. The board effect device 550 has the character "flower" in the disc-like structure, and the board effect device 551 has the character "snow" in the disc-like structure. Thereby, the non-operating state of the board rendering devices 550, 551 displays the characters "flower, snow".

  FIG. 80 (2) shows the non-operating state of the panel rendering device 550 and the operating state of the panel rendering device 551. The operating state of the board effect device 551 is a state in which the movable member 551a hidden behind is moved directly below the effect lamp 540. The movable member 551a has the character "blow" in the disk-like structure. Thus, the characters "flower, blow, snow" and left read, "flower blowing" are displayed as the non-operating state of the panel rendering device 550 and the operating state of the panel rendering device 551.

  FIG. 80 (3) shows the non-operating state of the panel rendering device 551 and the operating state of the panel rendering device 550. The operating state of the board rendering device 550 is a state in which the movable member 550 a hidden behind the back side has moved immediately below the rendering lamp 540. The movable member 550a has the character "moon" in the disk-like structure. Thus, the characters “flower, moon, snow” and “Sukigetsuhana” are displayed as the right reading of the non-operating state of the panel rendering device 551 and the operating state of the panel rendering device 550.

  As a result, the board effect devices 550 and 551 can produce a sense of expectation for the player by the characters displayed according to the operation mode or the operation mode. The board effect devices 550 and 551 can switch the operation state of the movable members 550 a and 551 a by the actuators controlled by the effect control device 300.

  Although the board effect devices 550 and 551 arrange the movable member 551a on the back side of the board effect device 551, the movable member 551a may be arranged on the front side of the board effect device 551. In this case, the panel effect device 550 displays the character "flower", the movable member 551a displays the character "blow", and the panel effect device 551 displays the character "snow", so that the panel effect device 550, 551 is displayed. The characters "flower, blow" are displayed in the non-operation state, and the characters "flower, blow, snow" are displayed in the operation state of the board production device 550, 551. Similarly, in the panel effect devices 550 and 551, the movable member 550 a is disposed on the back side of the panel effect device 550, but the movable member 550 a may be disposed on the front side of the panel effect device 550. In this case, the panel effect device 550 displays the character "flower", the movable member 550a displays the character "month", and the panel effect device 551 displays the character "snow", so that the panel effect device 550, 551 is produced. The characters "Month, Snow" are displayed in the non-operating state, and the characters "Flower, Moon, Snow" are displayed in the operating state of the board production device 550, 551.

  Next, an effect game performed by the sub display device 530 will be described. FIG. 81 is a view showing an example of a pattern of an effect game played by the sub display device of the fifth embodiment. The sub display device 530 performs a rendering game of a pattern (aspect) corresponding to the special view variation display game simultaneously executed on the display device 41 (main display device). The sub display device 530 plays an effect game of a pattern corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game when the special figure fluctuation display game derives a reach effect.

  In the effect game executed by the sub display device 530, the result aspect (combination of symbols) corresponding to the result aspect (combination of symbols) of the special view variation display game simultaneously executed by the display device 41 is derived and displayed.

As patterns of the effect game executed by the sub display device 530, there are five patterns of pattern 1, pattern 2, pattern 3, pattern 4, and pattern 5.
Pattern 1 is a pattern of an effect game that is executed when the remaining time of the special figure variation display game is 29 seconds or more and the result mode of the variation display is a hit. Pattern 1 includes reach derivation display for 5 seconds, reach effect display for 22 seconds, 3 symbol temporary stop display for 2 seconds, and swing display for n seconds until the special figure variation display game is ended. Configured Therefore, the rendering time in pattern 1 is 29 seconds + n seconds.

  In the reach derivation display, the sub-display device 530 temporarily stops the two symbols in order (for example, the order of the left symbol and the middle symbol) from the state in which the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are changed at high speed. A display for deriving a combination of the reach derived in the figure variable display game and the corresponding reach is performed.

  In the reach effect display, the sub display device 530 temporarily stops the remaining one symbol (the third symbol) in the fluctuation after performing the lively effect (aim whether to derive a hit or not, to improve the interest) And a display for deriving a combination of symbols corresponding to the result mode (combination of symbols) of the special figure variation display game.

  In the 3 symbol temporary stop display, the sub display device 530 displays 3 symbols in a state of temporary stop (combination of symbols resulting from the special view variation display game (combination of symbols and symbols)). In the swing display, the sub display device 530 displays the three symbols temporarily stopped in the combination of the hits while swinging the sub display device 530.

  Pattern 2 is a pattern of an effect game that is executed when the remaining time of the special view variation display game is 29 seconds or more and the result mode of the variation display is out. The pattern 2 includes a reach derivation display of 5 seconds, a reach effect display of 22 seconds, and a 3 symbol temporary stop display of 2 seconds. Therefore, the rendering time in pattern 2 is 29 seconds.

  Pattern 3 is a pattern of an effect game that is executed when the remaining time of the special figure variation display game is less than 29 seconds and 9 seconds or more. The pattern 3 is configured to include 7 symbol temporary stop derivation display for 7 seconds and 3 symbol temporary stop display for 2 seconds. Therefore, the rendering time in pattern 3 is 9 seconds.

  In the 3 symbol temporary stop derivation display, the sub display device 530 sequentially arranges three symbols from the state in which the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol are changed at high speed (for example, the order of the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol) The temporary stop is performed, and a display for deriving a combination of symbols corresponding to the result aspect (combination of symbols) of the special view variation display game is performed.

  The pattern 4 is a pattern of an effect game to be executed when the remaining time of the special figure variation display game is less than 9 seconds and not less than 3 seconds. Pattern 4 is n seconds excluding 2 seconds for performing 3 symbol temporary stop display times from the remaining time of the special figure variation display game (for example, 4 in the case where the remaining time of the special figure variation display game is 6 seconds 2 symbol temporary stop derivation display and 2 symbol 3 symbol temporary stop display are configured.

  Pattern 5 is a pattern of an effect game that is executed when the remaining time of the special figure variation display game is less than 3 seconds and not less than 2 seconds (more than the time necessary to perform 3 symbol temporary stop display). The pattern 5 is configured to include three symbol temporary stop display for two seconds.

  Next, specific examples of the reach derivation display, the reach effect display, the swing display, and the three symbol temporary stop derivation display will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing an example of the reach derivation display in the sub display device of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 83 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of reach effect display in the sub display device of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 84 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating an example of the reach effect display in the sub display device of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an example of rocking display in the sub display device of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing an example of 3 symbol temporary stop derivation display in the sub display device of the fifth embodiment.

  In addition, in the following, it is a special figure change display game which display 41 displays, after reaching reach whose reach eye (design for deriving a hit) is “treasure”, each of left symbol, middle symbol and right symbol A specific example corresponding to the case of executing reach effect of temporarily stopping at "treasure" and deriving a hit will be described.

First, a specific example of the reach derivation display will be described with reference to FIG.
In the reach derivation display, the sub display device 530 starts the left symbol in the special symbol variation display game result pattern and the left symbol from the state where three symbols are fluctuating rapidly (high speed vertical scroll variation) (FIG. 82 (a1)). Make a temporary stop state with the corresponding symbol ("treasure") (Fig. 82 (a2)), and then stop temporarily with the middle symbol in the special pattern variation display game result pattern ("treasure") corresponding to the middle symbol (FIG. 82 (a3)), the combination of the reach derived in the special view variation display game and the corresponding reach (a reach for which the symbol for deriving a hit is “treasure”) is derived.

Next, a specific example of reach effect display will be described using FIGS. 83 and 84. FIG.
In the reach effect display, the sub display device 530 switches the fluctuation speed of the right symbol to lower speed fluctuation (low speed vertical scroll fluctuation) than in FIG. 82 (a3) (FIG. 83 (b1)). The sub display device 530 displays a symbol (here, "Month") just before "treasure" which is a symbol for deriving a hit when the right symbol is changed at a low speed (Fig. 83 (b2) When it comes to), the variation mode is switched from the low-speed variation (low-speed vertical scroll variation) to a different variation mode (gradual change mode). Specifically, in the gradual change aspect, the sub display device 530 gradually turns off the dot display portion 531 in charge of the character part so that the characters of "month" are gradually lost (progressively lost) (FIG. 83) (B3), FIG. 83 (b 4), FIG. 83 (b 5)), the dot display portion 531 in charge of the character part is lighted gradually so that the character of “treasure” gradually Fig. 83 (b6), Fig. 83 (b7) and Fig. 83 (b8). In addition, the sub display device 530 gradually turns off the dot display portion 531 in charge of the character portion so that the character of “treasure” gradually disappears (FIG. 84 (b 9), FIG. 84 (b 10), 84 (b11), gradually turn on the dot display portion 531 in charge of the character part so that the character of the symbol (here, “cherry blossom”) one after “treasure” gradually appears (FIG. 84) (B12), FIG. 84 (b13), FIG. 84 (b14). The sub display device 530 switches the variation mode to the low-speed variation again (FIG. 83 (b1)) when it is in a state of displaying the symbol one behind “treasure” (FIG. 84 (b14)).

  The sub-display device 530, while repeating such a change, finally puts the right symbol in the temporary stop state with the symbol ("treasure") corresponding to the right symbol in the result aspect of the special figure variation display game.

  In this way, the variation to the symbol ("treasure") that derives the hit and the variation mode in the variation from the symbol ("treasure") that derives the hit to the next symbol ("sakura"), from other symbols By making the game machine 10 different from the fluctuation mode in the fluctuation of the game machine 10, it is possible for the game machine 10 to give the player a sense of expectation that the symbol for deriving the hit is temporarily stopped. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 is a decoration (for example, "flower", "snow", "months") of the panel effect devices 550, 551 (including the movable members 550a, 551a) among the three symbols displayed by the sub display device 530. In the case where a symbol (panel decoration symbol) corresponding to “”, “blow” or the like is included, the panel effect devices 550, 551 may be operated. Alternatively, the gaming machine 10 enables the board effect devices 550 and 551 when the panel decoration symbol is included in the three symbols displayed by the sub display device 530, and the operation condition such as detection of the operation of the push button 25 It may be made to operate after waiting for establishment. In the case where the panel display symbol is included in the three symbols displayed by the sub display device 530, it may be only one symbol out of the three symbols, or as a specific one symbol (for example, the final stop symbol) Also, any two of the three designs may be used, a specific two designs (for example, a reach configuration design) may be used, or all three designs may be used. For example, the gaming machine 10 operates the board effect devices 550 and 551 when the sub display device 530 displays "month (panel decoration symbol)" on the left symbol and the middle symbol and becomes a reach system. In addition, in the gaming machine 10, after the sub display device 530 displays "treasure (non-panel decoration symbol)" on the left symbol and the middle symbol to become a reach system, the right symbol "moon (panel decoration symbol)" When displaying and disclosing (including temporary stop), the panel effect devices 550 and 551 are made operable, the operation of the push button 25 is detected, and the panel effect devices 550 and 551 are operated and the sub display device 530 is re-executed. Vary. The gaming machine 10 may make the operation modes of the board effect devices 550 and 551 different according to the type and combination of the board decoration symbol displayed by the sub display device 530.

  It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 does not operate the board effect devices 550 and 551 when a sufficient effect time can not be secured even when a panel decoration symbol is included in the three symbols displayed by the sub display device 530. You may For example, in the case where the variation time of the sub display device 530 is shortened or can be shortened, the gaming machine 10 may not operate the board effect devices 550, 551. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can accelerate the effect game on the sub display device 530 without considering the operation time (including the return operation time) of the board effect devices 550 and 551.

Next, a specific example of the rocking display will be described with reference to FIG.
In the swing display, the sub display device 530 continuously displays the state in which the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped with the symbol of "treasure" while swinging the device, and the special view change display The swing width is gradually reduced as the game end timing is approached (FIG. 85 (c1), FIG. 85 (c2), and FIG. 85 (c3)).

  As described above, by swinging the sub display device 530, it is possible to clearly indicate that the effect in the special view variation display game is being performed (is changing). In addition, the sub-display device 530 can clearly indicate the timing at which the special figure fluctuation display game ends by gradually reducing the swing width as the special figure fluctuation display game ends.

Next, 3 symbol temporary stop derivation display will be described with reference to FIG.
In the 3 symbol temporary stop derivation display, the sub display device 530 performs the left symbol from the state (Fig. 86 (d1)) in which the 3 symbols are fluctuating rapidly (high speed vertical scroll fluctuation) in the result aspect of the special figure fluctuation display game In the temporary stop state with the left symbol and the corresponding symbol (“treasure”) (FIG. 86 (d2)), then, the middle symbol is the symbol corresponding to the middle symbol in the special pattern variation display game result (“treasure”) In the temporary stop state (Fig. 86 (d3)), the right symbol is put in the temporary stop state (Fig. 86 (d4)) with the symbol corresponding to the right symbol in the special pattern variation display game ("treasure") (Fig. 86 (d4)). Derivation of a combination of symbols corresponding to the result aspect (combination of symbols) of the figure variation display game. Thereby, the sub-display device 530 can notify not only the outcome mode (hit or miss), but also whether it is a hit with probability fluctuation.

Next, processing for counting up the effect start memory, which is the right to execute the effect game in the sub display device 530, will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect start storage count increase processing in the effect control device of the fifth embodiment. The effect start storage count increase process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The display effect determination process is a process executed when a command transmitted based on the detection of the game ball from the game control device 100 by the winning opening switch 35a is received, and the step D63 (FIG. 46) is a process executed by the control unit.

[Step D111] The control unit specifies the gaming state.
[Step D112] The control unit determines whether to operate the distribution gate 353 based on the gaming state. For example, the control unit determines to operate the distribution gate 353 when it is in the right-handed state. Note that the control unit determines whether or not to operate the distribution gate 353 based on whether or not it is a specific gaming state (right-handed state) is an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the control unit may determine whether to operate the distribution gate 353 based on the number of rotations after entering a specific gaming state.

  When it is determined that the distribution gate 353 is not operated, the control unit ends the effect start storage count increase processing, and when it is determined that the distribution gate 353 is operated, the process proceeds to step D113.

[Step D113] The control unit switches the route so that the game ball flows in the distribution channel 353 to the effect channel 354.
[Step D114] The control unit sets a wait time.

[Step D115] The control unit increments the count of effect start storage by one.
[Step D116] The control unit determines whether or not the command to be transmitted has been received based on the detection of the game ball from the game control device 100 by the winning opening switch 35a.

  When the control unit determines that the command transmitted based on the detection of the game ball from the game control device 100 by the winning opening switch 35a is determined to be received, the process proceeds to step D115, and the game control device 100 by the winning hole switch 35a. If it is determined that the transmitted command has not been received based on the detection of the gaming ball, the process proceeds to step D117.

  [Step D117] The control unit determines whether the set wait time has timed out. When the control unit determines that the wait time has not timed out, the process proceeds to step D116, and when the control unit determines that the wait time has timed out, the process proceeds to step D118.

[Step D118] The control unit switches the route so that the game ball does not flow into the effect flow path 354 at the sorting gate 353, and ends the effect start memory count increase process.
Next, processing for determining an execution trigger of the effect game in the sub display device 530 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a flowchart of an effect game execution opportunity determination process in the effect control device of the fifth embodiment.

  The effect game execution timing determination process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The effect game execution timing determination process is a process executed when the effect start memory increases, when the user operates the push button 25 and at the start timing of the special view change display game, and the main process step D23 (see FIG. 44) is a process executed by the control unit.

  [Step D121] The control unit determines whether or not the effect game execution trigger determination process has started, triggered by the increase in the effect start storage. If the control unit determines that the special game variation display game start or the effect game execution trigger determination process has been started by accepting the operation of the push button 25, the process proceeds to step D122, and that the effect start memory has increased If it is determined that the effect game execution opportunity determination process has been started as a trigger, the process proceeds to step D123.

  [Step D122] The control unit determines whether or not there is presentation start memory. The control unit proceeds to step D129 if the effect start memory is “0”, and proceeds to step D125 if the effect start memory is other than “0”, that is, if there is a effect start memory.

  [Step D123] The control unit determines whether or not the special figure variation display game is being executed. If the control unit determines that the special figure variation display game is not being executed, the process proceeds to step D129, and if it is determined that the special figure variation display game is being performed, the process proceeds to step D124.

  [Step D124] The control unit determines whether or not the effect game has been executed in the special figure variation display game being executed. If the control unit determines that the effect game has been executed in the special figure variation display game in progress, the control unit proceeds to step D129, and determines that the effect game has not been executed in the special figure variation display game in execution. To step D125.

[Step D125] The control unit specifies the contents of the effect of the special view variable display game.
[Step D126] The control unit determines whether or not the special view variable display game derives a reach effect. If the control unit determines that the special view variation display game does not derive the reach effect, the process proceeds to step D129. If the control unit determines that the special view change display game derives the reach effect, the process proceeds to step D127.

  [Step D127] The control unit determines whether or not the remaining time of the special figure variation display game is 2 seconds or more. If the control unit determines that the remaining time of the special figure variation display game is not 2 seconds or more, the process proceeds to step D129, and if it is determined that the remaining time of the special figure variation display game is 2 seconds or more, the process proceeds to step D128. move on.

[Step D128] The control unit determines that it is an execution trigger of the effect game, and ends the effect game execution timing determination process.
[Step D129] The control unit determines that it is not an opportunity to execute the effect game, and ends the effect game execution opportunity determination process.

  According to this, in addition to the timing synchronized with the start timing of the special view variation display game, the gaming machine 10 starts the rendering game at the timing asynchronous with the start timing of the special view variation display game (a trigger for executing the presentation game) It can be done.

  Next, the process of setting the pattern of the effect game executed by the sub display device will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect game pattern setting processing in the effect control device of the fifth embodiment.

  The effect game pattern setting process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The effect game pattern setting process is a process executed when it is determined that it is an execution trigger of the effect game, and is a process executed by the control unit in step D23 (see FIG. 44) of the main process.

[Step D131] The control unit specifies the remaining time of the special figure variation display game.
[Step D132] The control unit specifies a result mode of the special figure variation display game.
[Step D133] The control unit determines whether or not the remaining time of the special figure variation display game is 29 seconds or more. If the control unit determines that the remaining time of the special figure variation display game is 29 seconds or more, the process proceeds to step D134, and if it is determined that the remaining time of the special figure variation display game is not 29 seconds or more. Go to

  [Step D134] The control unit determines whether or not the result mode of the special view variable display game is a hit. If the control unit determines that the result mode of the special figure change display game is a hit, the process proceeds to step D135, and if it is determined that the result mode of the special figure change display game is not a hit, the process proceeds to step D136.

[Step D135] The control unit sets Pattern 1 as the pattern of the effect game, and ends the effect game pattern setting process.
[Step D136] The control unit sets Pattern 2 as the pattern of the effect game, and ends the effect game pattern setting process.

  [Step D137] The control unit determines whether or not the remaining time of the special figure variation display game is 9 seconds or more. If the control unit determines that the remaining time of the special view variation display game is 9 seconds or more, the process proceeds to step D138, and if the control unit determines that the remaining time of the special view variation display game is not 9 seconds or more Go to

[Step D138] The control unit sets Pattern 3 as the pattern of the effect game, and ends the effect game pattern setting process.
[Step D139] The control unit determines whether or not the remaining time of the special figure variation display game is 3 seconds or more. If the control unit determines that the remaining time of the special figure variation display game is 3 seconds or more, the process proceeds to step D140, and if it is determined that the remaining time of the special figure variation display game is not 3 seconds or more Go to

[Step D140] The control unit sets Pattern 4 as the pattern of the effect game, and ends the effect game pattern setting process.
[Step D141] The control unit sets Pattern 5 as the pattern of the effect game, and ends the effect game pattern setting process.

By setting the pattern of the effect game in this manner, the gaming machine 10 can store the effect game within the effect time of the corresponding special-image variation display game.
By the way, in the effect game executed by the sub display device 530, the effect can be skipped based on an instruction from the player. Such skipping of effects based on an instruction from the player will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect game skip processing in the effect control device of the fifth embodiment.

The effect game skip process is a process for skipping the effect of the effect game being executed on the sub display device 530 by the operation of the player (depression of the push button 25).
The effect game skip process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The effect game skip process is a process that is executed when the player's operation (the push of the push button) is detected, and is a process that is executed by the control unit in step D19 (see FIG. 44) of the main process.

  [Step D151] The control unit determines whether or not it is time to skip the effect game. The control unit skips the effect game when the effect game is in the three symbol temporary stop display or in the swing display, that is, when the result aspect corresponding to the result aspect of the special view variable display game has already been derived. It is determined that it is impossible timing. On the other hand, the control unit is in the reach derivation display, in the reach effect display, or in the 3 symbol temporary stop derivation display (the state before the 3 symbols temporarily stop in the combination of the symbols corresponding to the result aspect of the special view variation display game) If it is determined that it is the timing at which the effect game can be skipped.

  When the control unit determines that the timing for the effect game is skippable, the process proceeds to step D152, and when the control portion determines that the timing for the effect game is not skippable, the effect game skip processing is ended.

[Step D152] The control unit skips the effect game in execution and executes three symbol temporary stop display for two seconds.
[Step D153] When the three symbol temporary stop display is executed, the control unit ends the effect game, and ends the effect game skip process.

  According to such an effect skip, when the effect game is being executed, the gaming machine 10 moves to the sub display device 530 of the result aspect corresponding to the result aspect of the special view variation display game at the timing desired by the player. Can be derived. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can enable the player to grasp the result mode of the special view change display game at any timing (for example, early).

  The effect skip may skip part of the effect in the effect game. For example, when the gaming machine 10 receives an instruction to skip the effect during reach derivation display, the game may skip to the reach effect.

  Next, the flow of processing in the case where the effect game is played with pattern 1, in the case with pattern 2, in the case with pattern 3 and in the case with pattern 4 and in the case with pattern 5 will be described. FIG. 91 is a timing chart showing a flow of processing when the effect control device of the fifth embodiment performs the effect game in pattern 1. FIG. 92 is a timing chart showing the flow of processing when the effect control device of the fifth embodiment plays the effect game in pattern 2. FIG. 93 is a timing chart showing a flow of processing when the effect control device of the fifth embodiment performs the effect game in pattern 3. FIG. 94 is a timing chart showing a flow of processing when the effect control device of the fifth embodiment performs the effect game with the pattern 4. FIG. 95 is a timing chart showing a flow of processing when the effect control device of the fifth embodiment performs the effect game with the pattern 5. In the following timing chart, when the effect game starts at an asynchronous timing with the special view variation display game, that is, the execution start memory is increased or the execution is triggered by accepting the operation of the push button 25 by the user. Description will be made using an example when it is determined that there is.

  First, the flow of processing when the effect game is performed in pattern 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 (1) shows a flow of processing when the player does not skip the effect. FIGS. 91 (2) and 91 (3) show the flow of processing when the player skips the effect.

  In FIG. 91 (1), the gaming machine 10 starts the N-th special view variation display game from the timing t11, starts the effect game (pattern 1) on the sub display device 530 at the timing t12 and performs reach derivation display. Begin. The effect game (pattern 1) being performed on the sub display device 530 is in a state where the effect skip can be performed as the reach derivation display is started.

  The gaming machine 10 performs reach derivation display for five seconds from timing t12 to timing t14, performs reach effect display for twenty-two seconds from timing t14 to timing t18, and performs three symbol temporary stop display from timing t18. In the effect game (pattern 1) being executed on the sub display device 530, the effect skip corresponding to the result aspect of the special figure fluctuation display game is derived by the three symbol temporary stop display at the timing t18, It will be possible.

  The gaming machine 10 performs three symbol temporary stop display for two seconds from the timing t18 to the timing t19, and performs a swing display for n seconds from the timing t19 to the timing t20 at which the Nth special feature variation display game ends, The (pattern 1) is ended, and the N-th special-pattern variation display game is also ended.

  In FIG. 91 (2), the gaming machine 10 starts the N-th special view variation display game from timing t11, starts the effect game (pattern 1) on the sub display device 530 at timing t12 and performs reach derivation display. Begin. The effect game (pattern 1) being performed on the sub display device 530 is in a state where the effect skip can be performed as the reach derivation display is started.

  When the player receives a skip operation (depression of the push button 25) by the player at timing t13 during reach derivation display, the gaming machine 10 ends the reach derivation display and starts three symbol temporary stop display. The gaming machine 10 terminates the effect game (pattern 1) when three symbol temporary stop display is performed from the timing t13 to a timing t15 two seconds later, and ends the N-th special view fluctuation display game at a timing t20.

  In FIG. 91 (3), the gaming machine 10 starts the N-th special view variation display game from the timing t11 and starts the effect game (pattern 1) on the sub display device 530 at the timing t12 to perform reach derivation display. Begin. The effect game (pattern 1) being performed on the sub display device 530 is in a state where the effect skip can be performed as the reach derivation display is started.

  The gaming machine 10 performs reach derivation display for five seconds from timing t12 to timing t14, and starts reach effect display from timing t14. When the player receives a skip operation (depression of the push button 25) by the player at timing t16 during reach effect display, the gaming machine 10 ends the reach effect display and starts three symbol temporary stop display. The gaming machine 10 terminates the effect game (pattern 1) when three symbol temporary stop display is performed from timing t16 to timing t17 two seconds later, and ends the N-th special view variation display game at timing t20. The above is the flow of processing when effect skip is performed in the effect game (pattern 1) and when effect skip is not performed.

  Next, the flow of processing when the effect game is performed in pattern 2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 (1) shows a flow of processing when the player does not perform the effect skip. FIGS. 92 (2) and 92 (3) show the flow of processing when the player skips the effect.

  In FIG. 92 (1), the gaming machine 10 starts the N-th special view variation display game from the timing t21 and starts the effect game (pattern 2) on the sub display device 530 at the timing t22 to perform reach derivation display. Begin. The effect game (pattern 2) being performed on the sub display device 530 is in a state where the effect skip can be performed with the start of the reach derivation display.

  The gaming machine 10 performs reach derivation display for five seconds from timing t22 to timing t24, performs reach effect display for twenty-two seconds from timing t24 to timing t28, and performs three symbol temporary stop display from timing t28. The effect game (pattern 2) being played on the sub display device 530 is pushed by the player in accordance with having derived the result aspect corresponding to the result aspect of the special view fluctuation display game by the 3 symbol temporary stop display at timing t28. The effect skip of the effect game by the operation of the button 25 is impossible.

  The gaming machine 10 performs a three symbol temporary stop display for two seconds from the timing t28 to the timing t29, ends the effect game (pattern 2), and ends the Nth special figure fluctuation display game at the timing t30.

  In FIG. 92 (2), the gaming machine 10 starts the N-th special view variation display game from the timing t21 and starts the effect game (pattern 2) on the sub display device 530 at the timing t22 to perform reach derivation display. Begin. The effect game (pattern 2) being performed on the sub display device 530 is in a state where the effect skip can be performed with the start of the reach derivation display.

  When the player receives a skip operation (depression of the push button 25) by the player at timing t23 during reach derivation display, the gaming machine 10 ends the reach derivation display and starts three symbol temporary stop display. The gaming machine 10 terminates the effect game (pattern 2) when three symbol temporary stop display is performed from timing t23 to timing t25 two seconds later, and ends the N-th special view fluctuation display game at timing t30.

  In FIG. 92 (3), the gaming machine 10 starts the N-th special view variation display game from the timing t21 and starts the effect game (pattern 2) on the sub display device 530 at the timing t22 to perform reach derivation display. Begin. In the effect game (pattern 2) being performed on the sub display device 530, with the start of the reach derivation display at the timing t21, the effect skip can be performed.

  The gaming machine 10 performs reach derivation display for five seconds from timing t22 to timing t24, and starts reach effect display from timing t24. When the player receives a skip operation (depression of the push button 25) by the player at timing t26 during reach effect display, the gaming machine 10 ends the reach effect display and starts the three symbol temporary stop display. The gaming machine 10 terminates the effect game (pattern 2) when three symbol temporary stop display is performed until timing t27 two seconds after timing t26, and ends the N-th special view fluctuation display game at timing t30. The above is the flow of processing when effect skip is performed in the effect game (pattern 2) and when effect skip is not performed.

  Next, the flow of processing when the effect game is performed in pattern 3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 (1) shows a flow of processing when the player does not perform the effect skip. FIG. 93 (2) shows a flow of processing when the player skips the effect.

  In FIG. 93 (1), the gaming machine 10 starts the N-th special view variation display game from timing t31, starts the effect game (pattern 3) on the sub display device 530 at timing t32, and derives 3 symbol temporary stops Start to display. In the effect game (pattern 3) being executed on the sub display device 530, with the start of the three symbol temporary stop derivation display, the effect skip becomes possible.

  The gaming machine 10 performs three symbol temporary stop derivation display from timing t32 for seven seconds from timing t35, and performs three symbol temporary stop display from timing t35. In the effect game (pattern 3) being executed on the sub display device 530, the effect skip corresponding to the result aspect of the special figure variation display game is derived by the three symbol temporary stop display at the timing t35, It will be possible.

  The gaming machine 10 performs a three symbol temporary stop display for two seconds from the timing t35 to the timing t36, ends the effect game (pattern 3), and ends the Nth special figure fluctuation display game at the timing t36.

  In FIG. 93 (2), the gaming machine 10 starts the N-th special view variation display game from timing t31, starts the effect game (pattern 3) on the sub display device 530 at timing t32, and derives 3 symbol temporary stops Start to display. In the effect game (pattern 3) being executed on the sub display device 530, with the start of the three symbol temporary stop derivation display, the effect skip becomes possible.

  When the gaming machine 10 receives the skip operation (depression of the push button 25) by the player at timing t33 during the 3 symbol temporary stop derivation display, the 3 symbol temporary stop derivation display is ended and the 3 symbol temporary stop display is started Do. The gaming machine 10 terminates the effect game (pattern 3) when three symbol temporary stop display is performed from timing t33 to timing t34 two seconds later, and ends the N-th special figure fluctuation display game at timing t36. The above is the flow of processing when effect skip is performed in the effect game (pattern 3) and when effect skip is not performed.

  Next, the flow of processing in the case where the effect game is performed in pattern 4 will be described using FIG. FIG. 94 (1) shows a flow of processing when the player does not skip the effect. FIG. 94 (2) shows a flow of processing when the player skips the effect.

  In FIG. 94 (1), the gaming machine 10 starts the N-th special view variation display game from the timing t41, starts the effect game (pattern 4) on the sub display device 530 at the timing t42, and derives 3 symbol temporary stops Start to display. In the effect game (pattern 4) being executed on the sub display device 530, with the start of the three symbol temporary stop derivation display, the effect skip becomes possible.

  The gaming machine 10 performs the 3 symbol temporary stop derivation display for n seconds from the timing t42 to the timing t45 (remaining time until the special figure variation display game ends-2 seconds) and performs the 3 symbol temporary stop display from the timing t45 . In the effect game (pattern 4) being executed on the sub display device 530, the effect skip corresponding to the result aspect of the special figure variation display game is derived by the three symbol temporary stop display at the timing t45, It will be possible.

  The gaming machine 10 performs a three symbol temporary stop display for two seconds from the timing t45 to the timing t46, ends the effect game (pattern 4), and ends the Nth special figure fluctuation display game at the timing t46.

  In FIG. 94 (2), the gaming machine 10 starts the N-th special view variation display game from the timing t41, starts the effect game (pattern 4) on the sub display device 530 at the timing t42, and derives 3 symbol temporary stops Start to display. In the effect game (pattern 4) being executed on the sub display device 530, with the start of the three symbol temporary stop derivation display, the effect skip becomes possible.

  When the gaming machine 10 receives the skip operation (depression of the push button 25) by the player at timing t43 during the 3 symbol temporary stop derivation display, the 3 symbol temporary stop derivation display is ended and the 3 symbol temporary stop display is started Do. The gaming machine 10 terminates the effect game (pattern 4) when three symbol temporary stop display is performed from timing t43 to timing t44 two seconds later, and ends the N-th special figure fluctuation display game at timing t46. The above is the flow of processing when effect skip is performed in the effect game (pattern 4) and when effect skip is not performed.

Next, the flow of processing in the case where the effect game is performed in pattern 5 will be described using FIG.
The gaming machine 10 starts the N-th special figure variation display game from the timing t51, starts the effect game (pattern 5) on the sub display device 530 at the timing t52, and starts to perform the 3 symbol temporary stop display. The gaming machine 10 performs a three symbol temporary stop display for two seconds from the timing t52 to the timing t53, ends the effect game (pattern 5), and ends the Nth special figure fluctuation display game at the timing t54. The above is the flow of processing of the effect game (pattern 5).

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 has a result mode corresponding to the result mode of the special view fluctuation display game simultaneously executed on the main display device (display device 41), and the line of the result mode on the main display device The sub display device 530 executes an effect game that can be controlled asynchronously with the special view variation display game to be performed.

  According to this, the gaming machine 10 can make it possible to derive a result mode at free timing in the sub display device 530 while securing gaming performance (game rules) in the special view variation display game in the main display device. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can widen the range of games.

  In the above-mentioned embodiment, although a case where a production game was performed only during execution of a special figure change display game was explained as an example, it is not restricted to this. For example, even if the special figure variation display game is in the stop state, the gaming machine 10 makes the three symbols in the high-speed variation state, and the special figure variation display game satisfying the condition is satisfied. It may be made to stand by in a high-speed fluctuation state until it starts (until it determines that it is an execution opportunity).

[Modification 1 of the fifth embodiment]
In the fifth embodiment, it is described that the swing display is performed after the three symbol temporary stop display (combination display of hits) is performed in the pattern 1 of the effect game. In the first modification of the fifth embodiment, the setting of the effect mode of the effect (hit effect) in the special game state performed by the main display device after the special view variation display game derives a hit is performed by changing to the swing display.

First, the display performed in place of the rocking display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing an example of the music selection display on the sub display device of the modification 1 of the fifth embodiment.
The song selection display is an example of a display for setting an effect mode of an effect (hit effect) in the special game state. The gaming machine 10 can also perform, for example, character selection display, mode selection display, etc., instead of or in addition to the song selection display, as the setting of the effect mode of the effect (hit effect) in the special game state.

  In the song selection display, the sub display device 530 displays selectable songs as shown in FIGS. 96 (e1), (e2) and (e3) (“Song A?”, “Song B?”, “Song C And let the player choose which song to use in the special game state. Then, when the sub display device 530 receives the selection of the song by the player by the operation of the push button 25, as shown in FIG. 96 (e4), the received song is displayed ("Song A !!") and the song selection is displayed. Finish.

Next, the flow of processing when the rocking display is changed to the music selection display in FIG. 91 will be described using FIG.
FIG. 97 is a timing chart showing the flow of processing when the effect control device of the modification 1 of the fifth embodiment plays the effect game with pattern 1. Here, the description will be made using the same timing as a comparison with FIG.

  The gaming machine 10 starts the N-th special view variation display game from the timing t11, starts the effect game (pattern 1) on the sub display device 530 at the timing t12, and starts performing the reach derivation display. The effect game (pattern 1) being performed on the sub display device 530 is in a state where the effect skip can be performed as the reach derivation display is started.

  The gaming machine 10 performs reach derivation display for five seconds from timing t12 to timing t14, performs reach effect display for twenty-two seconds from timing t14 to timing t18, and performs three symbol temporary stop display from timing t18. In the effect game (pattern 1) being executed on the sub display device 530, the effect skip corresponding to the result aspect of the special figure fluctuation display game is derived by the three symbol temporary stop display at the timing t18, It will be possible.

  The gaming machine 10 performs a three symbol temporary stop display for two seconds from the timing t18 to the timing t19, and performs a song selection display for n seconds from the timing t19 to the timing t20 at which the Nth special feature variation display game ends. End (Pattern 1).

  In this manner, by using the sub display device 530, before performing effects in the special gaming state on the main display device side (before deriving the result aspect), it is possible to set the effect aspect of the effects in the special gaming state There is no need to have the setting of the effect mode at the start of the special game state, and the effect time of the effect in the special game state can be long (the effect time of the effect in the special game state is reduced by the time for setting the effect mode Never). As a result, the gaming machine 10 can secure a longer rendering time for special effects in the special gaming state, increase the degree of freedom of the effects, and improve the interest.

  In addition, although it changed and demonstrated to rocking display, it does not restrict to this. For example, in the gaming machine 10, when the special figure variation display game derives a hit, and there is time until the special figure variation display game ends after 3 symbol temporary stop display, the time until the particular figure variation display game ends. It may be performed at time (for example, at t15 in FIG. 91 (2)).

  In addition, before the game machine 10 executes effects in the special game state on the main display device side (before the winning is derived), a part of the effects of the special game state in the sub display device 530 (for example, an introduction portion etc. ) May be performed.

  It should be noted that switching of a song serving as an option at the time of song selection may be performed by an operation by the player, or switching of a song serving as an option is performed triggered by time (for example, song switching every 2 seconds) May be performed). In the case where a song serving as an option is switched on the basis of time, the switching timing may be adjusted based on the display time of the song selection display. For example, in the case where the game selection display time is 4 seconds and there are 4 songs as choices, the gaming machine 10 allows the song to be switched within 1 second so that all options can be selected. Do.

[Modification 2 of the fifth embodiment]
In the second modification of the fifth embodiment, the determination is made in consideration of the game state of the gaming machine 10 in addition to the effect contents of the special view variation display game in the determination of whether or not it is an execution trigger of the effect game. FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect game execution opportunity determination processing in the effect control device of Modification 2 of the fifth embodiment.

  [Step D161] The control unit determines whether or not the effect game execution trigger determination process has started, triggered by the increase in the effect start storage. If the control unit determines that the special game variation display game start or the effect game execution trigger determination process has been started by accepting the operation of the push button 25, the process proceeds to step D162, and the effect start memory is increased If it is determined that the effect game execution opportunity determination process has been started as a trigger, the process proceeds to step D163.

  [Step D162] The control unit determines whether or not there is presentation start memory. The control unit proceeds to step D170 when the effect start memory is “0”, and proceeds to step D165 when the effect start memory is other than “0”, that is, when the effect start memory is present.

  [Step D163] The control unit determines whether or not the special figure variation display game is being executed. If the control unit determines that the special figure variation display game is not being executed, the process proceeds to step D170. If the control unit determines that the special figure variation display game is being performed, the process proceeds to step D164.

  [Step D164] The control unit determines whether or not the effect game has been executed in the special figure variation display game being executed. If the control unit determines that the effect game has been executed in the special figure variation display game in progress, the control unit proceeds to step D170, and determines that the effect game has not been executed in the special figure variation display game in execution. The process proceeds to step D165.

[Step D165] The control unit specifies the contents of the effect of the special view variable display game.
[Step D166] The control unit determines whether or not the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 is a gaming state that can trigger the execution of the effect game. For example, when the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 is a predetermined state to be hit to the right, the control unit determines that the gaming state can be an execution trigger.

  If the control unit determines that the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 is a gaming state that can trigger execution of a rendering game, the process proceeds to step D167, and the gaming state in which the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 can not become a trigger of execution of a rendering game If it is determined that is, the process proceeds to step D170.

  [Step D167] The control unit determines whether or not the special view variable display game derives the reach effect. If the control unit determines that the special view variation display game does not derive the reach effect, the process proceeds to step D170. If the control unit determines that the special view change display game derives the reach effect, the process proceeds to step D168.

  [Step D168] The control unit determines whether or not the remaining time of the special figure variation display game is 2 seconds or more. If the control unit determines that the remaining time of the special figure variation display game is not 2 seconds or more, the process proceeds to step D170, and if it is determined that the remaining time of the special figure variation display game is 2 seconds or more, the process proceeds to step D169. move on.

[Step D169] The control unit determines that it is an execution trigger of the effect game, and ends the effect game execution timing determination process.
[Step D170] The control unit determines that it is not an opportunity to execute the effect game, and ends the effect game execution opportunity determination process.

  As described above, by using the gaming machine 10 for determining whether or not the gaming state is an execution trigger, it is possible to allow the player to grasp the gaming state even if the presentation game is executed.

[Modification 3 of the fifth embodiment]
In the fifth embodiment, one effect game is played in one special figure variation display game. In the fifth embodiment, a rendering game can be executed a plurality of times in one special view variable display game.

  For example, the gaming machine 10 determines the number of effect games to be executed in one special figure variation display game and the effect time thereof at the time of trigger event determination of the effect game. For example, when it is determined that the gaming machine 10 is an execution opportunity in the execution opportunity determination process, the number of effect games executed in the special figure change display game and the effect time to be assigned to each effect game It determines based on the remaining time of and the number of presentation start memory pending.

  A flow of processing in the case of executing a plurality of presentation games in a single special figure variation display game will be described using FIG. FIG. 99 is a timing chart showing a flow of processing when the effect control device of the modification 3 of the fifth embodiment performs the effect game a plurality of times in one special view variable display game. The timing chart shown in FIG. 99 shows the flow of processing in the case where the special figure variation display game performs three rendering games when deriving a hit.

  The gaming machine 10 starts an N-th special figure variation display game from timing t61 and starts a first effect game (pattern 3) to start three symbol temporary stop derivation display. In the first effect game (pattern 3) being executed on the sub display device 530, the effect skip can be performed as the 3 symbol temporary stop derivation display is started to be performed.

  The gaming machine 10 performs 3 symbol temporary stop derivation display for 7 seconds from timing t61 to timing t62, and performs 3 symbol temporary stop display from timing t62. In the first effect game (pattern 3) being executed on the sub display device 530, with the start of the 3 symbol temporary stop display at the timing t62, the effect skip becomes impossible.

  The gaming machine 10 performs three symbol temporary stop display for two seconds from timing t62 to timing t63, terminates the first effect game (pattern 3), and starts the second effect game (pattern 3) for three symbols. Start to display temporary stop derivation. In the second effect game (pattern 3) being performed by the sub display device 530, with the start of the three symbol temporary stop derivation display, the effect skip becomes possible.

  The gaming machine 10 performs three symbol temporary stop derivation display for seven seconds from timing t63 to timing t64, and performs three symbol temporary stop display from timing t64. In the second effect game (pattern 3) being executed on the sub display device 530, the effect skip can not be performed due to the start of the 3 symbol temporary stop display at the timing t64.

  The gaming machine 10 performs a three symbol temporary stop display for two seconds from the timing t64 to the timing t65, terminates the second effect game (pattern 3), and starts the third effect game (pattern 1) to reach out Start to display. In the third effect game (pattern 1) being performed by the sub display device 530, with the start of the reach derivation display, the effect skip becomes possible.

  The gaming machine 10 performs reach derivation display for five seconds from timing t65 to timing t66, performs reach effect display for twenty two seconds from timing t66 to timing t67, and performs three symbol temporary stop display from timing t67. In the third effect game (pattern 1) being played on the sub display device 530, with the start of the 3 symbol temporary stop derivation display being performed at the timing t67, the effect skip becomes impossible.

  The gaming machine 10 performs a three symbol temporary stop display for two seconds from the timing t67 to the timing t68, and performs a rocking display for n seconds from the timing t68 to the timing t69 at which the Nth special feature variation display game is ended. The effect game (pattern 1) is ended.

  In the gaming machine 10, the result mode (combination of the symbols in the 3 symbol temporary stop display) derived in the final effect game among a plurality of times is taken as the result mode corresponding to the result mode of the special figure variation display game Let the result mode derived | led-out in the production game of be a result mode of the lack which does not correspond with the result mode of a special figure fluctuation display game.

  According to this, the gaming machine 10 causes the player to grasp that the result mode of the special view variation display game is the out of the first and second production games, and then the special view variation is performed in the third production game. It can be made to grasp that the result mode of the display game is actually a hit. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can improve interest as compared with the case where it is determined that the result mode of the special figure change display game is a hit in one effect game.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 has a function to skip the effect skip during each effect game and skip the effect of each effect game (for example, when the effect skip during the first effect game, 3 of the first effect game It may be made to skip to the symbol temporary stop display, or it functions as a skip of the entire three effect games (for example, when the effect skip during the first effect game, the third symbol temporary stop display of the third effect game May be skipped).

  In addition, although it demonstrated as performing three times of presentation games in one special figure fluctuation display game, it changes to this, and, as for game machine 10, three times of presentation games are performed in one presentation game The processing shown in FIG. 99 may be realized by performing an effect (so-called pseudo link) to make it known.

[Modification 4 of the fifth embodiment]
In the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 88, when the special view variation display game is executed when the effect start memory increases (D121: YES) (D123: YES), the special game variation display game Even if the game has not been executed (D124: NO), the game is not a special-figure-variation display game for which the special-figure fluctuation display game is to be executed (D126: NO or D127: NO). It was determined that it was not an execution opportunity.

  On the other hand, in the modification 4 of the fifth embodiment, when the special figure variation display game in progress does not derive reach effect (D 126: NO), or the remaining time of the special figure variation display game in execution is short. Even if there is a case (D127: NO), reach figure is derived in the pending storage, the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation display game which is the target of execution of the production game) to perform effects for 2 seconds or more If there is a pending storage to be executed, and a hit does not occur before the start of the special view variation display game, it is determined that it is an execution trigger, and the effect game corresponding to the special view variation display game of the pending storage Is executed before the presentation of the corresponding special-image variation display game starts.

  For example, the gaming machine 10 keeps rotating the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol at high speed (high-speed variation display) until the corresponding special figure variation display game starts, and the corresponding special figure variation display game starts The effect game (pattern 1 to pattern 5) described in the fifth embodiment is started.

The flow of the process of the fourth modification of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 100 is a timing chart showing a flow of processing when the effect control device of the modification 4 of the fifth embodiment performs the effect game across a plurality of special view change display games.

  In the timing chart shown in FIG. 100, the N-th special view variation display game is a special view variation display game not subject to the execution of the effect game (for example, the special view variation display game without deriving the reach effect, the remaining time It is assumed that it is a special figure variation display game which is less than 2 seconds, or a special figure variation display game in which a rendering game has been executed. In addition, it is assumed that the (N + 1) th variable display game is a special view variable display game which is a target of execution of the effect game.

  When start memory is generated at the timing t71 of the N-th special figure variation display game, the gaming machine 10 detects a special figure variation display game to be an object of execution of the effect game from within the hold storage, and the N + 1th special figure It is specified that the variable display game is a special view variable display game which is an object of execution of the effect game. For example, the gaming machine 10 executes the effect game from within the hold storage based on the reception command received from the game control device 100 when the production control device 300 generates the hold storage (when winning is triggered to generate the hold storage) To detect the special figure variation display game that is the target of.

  Then, the gaming machine 10 starts the effect game corresponding to the (N + 1) th special figure variation display game from the timing t71 and starts high-speed variation display. In the effect game being played on the sub display device 530, the corresponding special figure variation display game (the (N + 1) th) is not started, and therefore, the effect skip is impossible.

  The gaming machine 10 ends the N-th special figure fluctuation display game at timing t72, starts the (N + 1) -th special figure fluctuation display game, ends the high-speed fluctuation display, and starts the reach derivation display. The effect game being played on the sub display device 530 is in a state in which effect skip is possible as the (N + 1) th special figure variation display game is started.

  The gaming machine 10 performs reach derivation display from timing t72 to timing t73 five seconds later, performs reach effect display from timing t73 to timing t74 for 22 seconds, and performs three symbol temporary stop display from timing t74. The effect game being played on the sub display device 530 is in a state in which the effect skip can not be performed as the three symbol temporary stop display is started at the timing t74.

  The gaming machine 10 performs a three symbol temporary stop display for two seconds from the timing t74 to the timing t75, and performs a swing display for n seconds from the timing t75 to the timing t76 at which the N + 1th special figure variation display game ends. Finish.

  According to this, the gaming machine 10 can execute the effect game even during the special figure variation display game which is not the target of the execution of the effect game. Thus, the gaming machine 10 can improve the player's interest.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10, when there is a special figure variation display game to be the target of the execution of the effect game in the pending storage, across the special figure variation display game, the special feature to be the target of the execution of the relevant presentation game In order to play the effect game corresponding to the figure variable display game, it is possible to clearly show that the player has a holding memory for deriving the reach effect. Thus, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the player from missing a reach effect.

[Modification 5 of the fifth embodiment]
In the modification 4 of the fifth embodiment, the special figure fluctuation display game in progress does not derive reach effect (D 126: NO), or the remaining time of the special figure fluctuation display game in execution is a short time Even if (D127: NO), reach effect is derived in the pending storage, and the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation display game targeted for execution of the presentation game) is executed to produce effects for 2 seconds or more If there is a pending storage, and a hit does not occur before the start of the special view variation display game, it is determined that it is an execution opportunity, corresponding to the effect game corresponding to the special view variation display game of the pending storage It is assumed that it is executed before the production of the special figure variation display game starts.

  In the fifth modification of the fifth embodiment, the special figure variation display game in progress does not derive reach effect (D 126: NO), or the remaining time of the special figure variation display game in execution is a short time Even if (D127: NO) (even if the special figure variation display game being executed is a special figure variation display game that is not the target of the execution of the presentation game), the presentation game is executed if there is a pending storage Do.

  For example, the gaming machine 10 is a rendering game consisting of 3 symbol temporary stop derivation display and 3 symbol temporary stop display (2 seconds) regardless of the contents of the special pattern variation display game currently executed next time. Run. In this case, the gaming machine 10 sets, for example, the execution time of the 3 symbol temporary stop derivation display so that the 3 symbol temporary stop display (2 seconds) can be performed in the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed next.

The flow of the process of the fifth modification of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 101 is a timing chart showing a flow of processing when the effect control device of the modification 5 of the fifth embodiment performs the effect game across a plurality of special view variable display games.

  In the timing chart shown in FIG. 101, the N-th special view variation display game is a special view variation display game not targeted for the execution of the effect game (for example, the special view variation display game for which the reach effect is not derived, the remaining time is It is assumed that it is a special figure variation display game which is less than 2 seconds, or a special figure variation display game in which a rendering game has been executed.

When start storage is generated at the timing t81 of the N-th special view variation display game, the gaming machine 10 specifies that there is storage on hold (that storage on hold is not 0).
Then, the gaming machine 10 starts the effect game corresponding to the (N + 1) th special figure variation display game from the timing t81 and starts to perform the 3 symbol temporary stop derivation display. In the effect game being performed on the sub display device 530, since the corresponding special figure variation display game (N + 1st time) is not started with the start of the 3 symbol temporary stop derivation display, the effect skip is not performed. It will be possible.

  The gaming machine 10 ends the N-th special figure variation display game at timing t82 and starts the (N + 1) -th special figure variation display game. The effect game being played on the sub display device 530 is in a state in which effect skip is possible as the (N + 1) th special figure variation display game is started.

  The gaming machine 10 performs three symbol temporary stop derivation display from timing t82 to timing t83, and performs three symbol temporary stop display from timing t83. The effect game being played on the sub display device 530 is in a state in which the effect skip can not be performed as the three symbol temporary stop display is started at the timing t83.

The gaming machine 10 performs a three symbol temporary stop display for two seconds from the timing t83 to the timing t84, and ends the effect game.
According to this, the gaming machine 10 can secure an execution opportunity of the effect game. That is, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the start memory from saturating (exceeding the maximum number).

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 may interlock the feature and the effect game. For example, when the symbol is temporarily stopped at "month" in the effect game, the month of the character may be moved to the center, and when temporarily stopped at another symbol, the symbol may be returned to the stopped or initial position. .

  Further, even when the game and the effect game are interlocked with each other, if the effect game is skippable, the operation may not be in time due to the skip, so that the function is not operated. It is also good.

  Further, even in the case where the game and the effect game are interlocked with each other, the gaming machine 10 operates the character to clarify the boundaries of the game if the effect game can not be skipped instead of the above. You may not make it happen.

  In addition, even when the game machine 10 interlocks the prize with the effect game, or during the effect game, even if the remaining time of the corresponding special view fluctuation display game is short, the effect game also ends. Since it is imminent, you may make it not operate an accessory.

  In addition, even in the case where the gaming machine 10 interlocks the feature and the effect game, the special view variation display game performs a specific effect (for example, an effect that the effect may be hidden by the feature). May not operate the character. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can suppress the reduction in the visibility of the effects performed in the special view variable display game.

The gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment (including the first to fourth modifications) described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes main control means (game control device 100) and slave control means (effect control device 300). The main control means supervises the progress of the first variation display game (special figure variation display game) whose right of execution is the detection of establishment of the first condition (winning on the start winning opening 36, normal variation winning device 37). Control. The secondary control means causes the first display means (display device 41) to display the first variation display game in response to an instruction from the main control means, and establishes a second condition different from the first condition (effect flow path of gaming balls The second variable display game is controlled by making the progress (start timing, end timing) of the second variable display game (production game) whose detection right to 354 (flow down) is the execution right asynchronously to the first variable display game Is displayed on the second display means (the sub display device 530), and at the same time, the result mode of the second variable display game is derived based on the result mode derived by the first variable display game in the variable display.

  (2) The gaming machine 10 of (1) further includes an operation means (push button 25) capable of accepting an operation, and when the operation of the operation means is accepted, it is based on the result mode of the first variable display game The result aspect of the second variable display game can be derived before the result aspect of the first variable display game is derived.

  (3) The gaming machine 10 of (1) further includes operation means (push button 25), the second variable display game is capable of shortening the effect (effect skip is possible), and the slave control device is the operation means When the operation of is detected, the effect of the second variable display game is shortened.

The result aspect of the second variation display game of (4) and (3) is the same as the result aspect of the first variation display game.
(5) The subsidiary control means of (4) derives the result mode in the second variable display game at a timing before deriving the result mode in the first variable display game.

(6) The slave control means of (5) derives the result mode of the second variable display game at the timing when the operation means is operated.
(7) The subsidiary control means of (6) determines the effect mode of the second variable display game based on the remaining time of the first variable display game to be executed simultaneously.

(8) The subsidiary control means of (7) determines the effect mode of the second variable display game based on the result mode of the first variable display game to be executed simultaneously.
(9) When the secondary control means of (8) derives a result mode (hit) that triggers the transition to the special game state, the first variable display game performs the result mode Before being derived, the second display means is used to set an effect mode in the special game state.

Sixth Embodiment
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the sixth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment includes a gaming board 3000 (see FIG. 76) as in the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment. The gaming machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment uses the sub display device 530, the push button 25 (see FIG. 62), the effect lamp 540, and the board effect devices 550 and 551 in addition to the display device 41 to give notice of suspension. Make a presentation.

First, the configuration of the display screen in the display device 41 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen in the display device of the sixth embodiment.
In the gaming machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the position of the sub display device 530 can be changed, and the position to retract to the lower end of the center case 40 (retraction position) and the position to advance to the front of the display device 41 (advance position And can be switched.

  First, FIG. 102A shows the display screen of the center case 40 and the display device 41 when the sub display device 530 is in the retracted position while the symbol in the variable display game is changing. The effect lamp 540 and the board effect devices 550 and 551 light up in a mode corresponding to the symbol variation. For example, the effect lamp 540 and the board effect devices 550 and 551 blink in white. The panel effects devices 550, 551 are in a non-operating state.

  The display device 41 shown in FIG. 102 (1) has two display patterns, a special figure 1 pending number indication 603, a special figure 2 pending number indication 604, a pending indication 605, and a pending conclusion indication 606 as display contents. Including.

  The two decorative patterns have a large symbol group 601 as a first decorative symbol and a small symbol group 602 as a second decorative symbol. The large symbol group 601 takes charge of game effects for the purpose of improving interest. Therefore, the large symbol group 601 is displayed large at the approximate center of the display device 41. Large symbol group 601 includes left symbol 601L, middle symbol 601C and right symbol 601R. The left symbol 601L, the middle symbol 601C and the right symbol 601R of the display screen 600 all indicate that the corresponding special figure variation display game is in a symbol variation state.

  The large symbol group 601 starts changing in the order of the left symbol 601L, the middle symbol 601C, and the right symbol 601R, and stops (including temporary stop) in the order of the left symbol 601L, the middle symbol 601C, and the right symbol 601R. Therefore, in the large symbol group 601, in many cases, the left symbol 601L and the middle symbol 601C form a reach aspect, and it is possible to wait for the stop of the right symbol 601R to form a hit aspect.

  The small symbol group 602 is in charge of reporting of the variable display state for the purpose of improving the ease of grasping the gaming state of the player. Therefore, the small symbol group 602 is smallly displayed on the peripheral portion of the display device 41 so as to ensure visibility without disturbing the display effect by the large symbol group 601. The small symbol group 602 includes a left symbol, a middle symbol and a right symbol. The left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol in the small symbol group 602 of the display screen 600 all indicate that the corresponding special figure variation display game is in the symbol variation state.

  In general, the large symbol group 601 is displayed larger than the small symbol group 602, the degree of freedom of the display position is high, and the display mode can be largely changed. On the contrary, the small symbol group 602 is displayed smaller than the large symbol group 601, and the degree of freedom of the display position is low (for example, position fixing).

  The special figure 1 reservation number display 603 displays the number of pending storages (starting number of memories) of the special figure 1 game. A special figure 2 pending number display 604 displays the number of pending storages of the special figure 2 game. The hold display 605 can clearly indicate the number of held memories of the special view fluctuation display game and notify of the degree of expectation for the game result for each held memory according to the display mode. The number of pending storages displayed by the pending display 605 corresponds to the sum of the number of pending storages displayed by the special view 1 pending count display 603 and the number of pending storages displayed by the special view 2 pending number display 604. The holding and digest display 606 can indicate that the special view variable display game is in the variable display state and can notify the degree of expectation for the game result by the display mode.

  The number of pending storages for the special view 1 game indicated by the special view 1 pending count display 603 is “2”, and the number of pending storages for the special view 2 game shown by the special view 2 pending number display 604 is “0”, The number of pending storages indicated by the pending indication 605 is “2”. In addition, the reserve consumption indication 606 indicates that the special figure variation display game is in symbol variation.

  Next, the display screen of the center case 40 and the display device 41 when the sub display device 530 is at the advanced position while the symbol is changing in the variable display game is shown in FIG. 102 (2). The effect lamp 540 and the board effect devices 550 and 551 light up in a mode corresponding to the symbol variation. The panel effects devices 550, 551 are in a non-operating state.

The display device 41 shown in FIG. 102 (2) includes a small symbol group 602, a special figure 1 pending number indication 603, a special figure 2 pending number indication 604, and a pending conclusion indication 606 in the display content.
The sub display device 530 is at the advanced position and hides a part of the display area of the display device 41. For example, the sub display 530 is in a position to hide the hold display 605. At this time, the display device 41 may or may not display the hold display 605 in the display area hidden by the sub display device 530. The display device 41 can reduce the processing load of the effect control device 300 by not displaying the hold display 605 in the display area hidden by the sub display device 530.

  The sub display device 530 can display an effect game. The display device 41 sets the effect area 560 instead of the display of the large symbol group 601 to display the required effect display in order to direct the player's attention to the effect game. The effect game is a variable display game performed in association with the on-hold notice effect. The effect game is a variable display game for effects different from the special view change display game (including the special view 1 change display game and the special view 2 change display game) or the popular view change display. Note that the on-hold notice effect is one mode of the prefetch effect, and the gaming machine 10 performs on-off notice effect using the on-hold display 605 and the on-hold digest display 606.

  The pre-reading effect (also referred to as pre-reading notice or pre-reading notice effect) means that the variable display game corresponding to the start winning memory (the start winning memory is held or just held) for which the special view variable display game is not yet executed In order to notify the player in advance with predetermined reliability whether or not it will be a big hit when it is played (or what kind of fluctuation pattern it will be), effects such as performing display of start winning memory storage etc. differently from normal It is. And the pre-reading system command (pre-reading fluctuation system command and pre-reading symbol system command) is the command which notifies beforehand the fluctuation pattern and the stop design which correspond to the retention of the starting winning a prize memory which becomes the object of pre-reading effect It is transmitted from the control device 100 to the effect control device 300. In addition, the normal variation system command and symbol system command which are not pre-read are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the time of the variation display start.

  Here, the effect game displayed by the sub display device 530 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a view showing a display example of an effect game in the sub display device of the sixth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 103 (1), the sub display device 530 can variably display a symbol or an image for each of the three matrix display portions 530L, 530C, and 530R. For example, the sub display unit 530 displays the left partial image of the push button 25 on the matrix display unit 530L in a stopped state, and variably displays the matrix display units 530C and 530R (FIG. 103 (2)). Subsequently, the sub display device 530 stops and displays the middle part image of the push button 25 on the matrix display unit 530C, and variably displays the matrix display unit 530R (FIG. 103 (3)). Subsequently, the sub display unit 530 stops and displays the right partial image of the push button 25 on the matrix display unit 530R, and displays the entire image of the push button 25 on the matrix display units 530L, 530C, and 530R (FIG. 103 (4)). ).

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 can play the effect game in which the entire image of the push button 25 is derived in the sub display device 530. In the effect game, deriving the entire image of the push button 25 is a success of the effect, and not deriving the entire image of the push button 25 is a failure of the effect.

  Note that the gaming machine 10 may perform outlier fluctuation in the sub display device 530 so as not to derive the entire image of the push button 25, or performs reach variation in the sub display device 530 before deriving the entire image of the push button 25. May be Further, an execution trigger of the effect game may be the establishment of a predetermined event trigger, and may be, for example, a reception trigger of a prefetch command, or may be a winning trigger for a predetermined winning opening.

  In response to the success of the effect game in the sub display device 530, the gaming machine 10 guides the player to the operation of the push button 25 using the display device 41, the sub display device 530, and the effect lamp 540. Here, operation guidance of the push button 25 will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 and 105. FIG. FIG. 104 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of push button operation guidance using the display device of the sixth embodiment, the sub display device, and the effect lamp. FIG. 105 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating an example of push button operation guidance using the display device according to the sixth embodiment, the sub display device, and the effect lamp.

First, the gaming machine 10 lights up the effect lamp 540 in a predetermined mode while notifying the sub display device 530 that the entire image of the push button 25 has been derived, and notifies success of the effect game (FIG. )).
Next, the gaming machine 10 scrolls the entire image of the push button 25 displayed on the sub display device 530 upward. At this time, the gaming machine 10 displays a range which is missing from the display range of the sub display device 530 in the entire image of the push button 25 in the effect area 560 of the display device 41 (FIG. 104 (2)). That is, while the gaming machine 10 displays the entire image of the push button 25 with the display device 41 and the sub display device 530, the entire image of the push button 25 from the display range of the sub display device 530 to the effect area 560 of the display device 41 Scroll up in the upward direction. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 makes the player easily feel the relation between the display on the result of the effect game performed on the sub display device 530 and the display on the operation guide of the push button 25 performed on the display device 41. be able to.

  In addition, even when the gaming machine 10 displays the entire image of the push button 25 (the result mode of the effect game) on the sub display device 530, even if the effect lamp 540 performs advance notification for the operation result of the push button 25. Good. For example, when the game machine 10 detects the pressing operation of the push button 25 and changes the hold display mode (hold standby display or hold digest display), the game display 10 corresponds to the hold display mode after the display mode of the effect lamp 540 is changed. It is a display mode. More specifically, when detecting the pressing operation of the push button 25 and changing the display mode of the specific hold standby display from white display to red display, the gaming machine 10 is detected before the pressing operation of the push button 25 is detected. The effect lamp 540 is suggested to be a red display mode in advance to indicate a change in the hold display mode. Note that the gaming machine 10 does not necessarily have to make the display mode of the effect lamp 540 consistent with the post-change display mode in the suggestion of a change in the pre-display mode, and a display that matches the post-change display mode. The display mode may have a lower degree (such as the degree of expectation or reliability) than the mode.

  When the game machine 10 displays the entire image of the push button 25 in the effect area 560 of the display device 41, the sub display device 530 displays a message regarding operation guidance of the push button 25. For example, the sub-display device 530 horizontally scrolls the message "READY" before the operation acceptance timing of the push button 25 to prompt the player to prepare for the operation of the push button 25 (FIG. 105 (1)).

  Then, the gaming machine 10 changes the display mode of the entire image of the push button 25 in the effect area 560 of the display device 41 (for example, increases the lightness) to the player that it is the operation reception timing of the push button 25 invite. Further, the gaming machine 10 displays a message on the operation display of the push button 25 on the sub display device 530. For example, the sub display device 530 displays a message “Press!” At the operation reception timing of the push button 25 to urge the player to operate the push button 25 (FIG. 105 (2)).

  As described above, in the gaming machine 10, when the display device 41 and the sub display device 530 cooperate to perform the operation guide of the push button 25, the operation guide can be notified to the player more surely and the interest is improved. Can be Although the gaming machine 10 displays the message etc. by the sub display device 530, the message etc. may be displayed by the display device 41 in addition to the sub display device 530 or in place of the sub display device 530. .

  In the same manner as the entire image of the push button 25, the gaming machine 10 displays the message “READY” or the message “press!” Displayed on the sub display device 530 from the display range of the sub display device 530 to the effect area 560 of the display device 41. The display may be scrolled upward to the top.

  The gaming machine 10 may display the image displayed by scrolling to the effect area 560 as a display mode such as the dot display displayed by the sub display device 530 or a low resolution display such as the dot display. Instead of the mode, the display mode may be switched to the high resolution display mode.

  The gaming machine 10 accepts the operation of the push button 25 and performs a suspension notice effect accompanied by a change in the display mode of the suspension display 605 or the suspension digest display 606. With reference to FIG. 106 to FIG. 108, a description will be given of the hold notification effect accompanied by the change of the display mode of the hold display 605 or the hold digest display 606. FIG. 106 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of a reserve announcement effect accompanied by a change in display mode of the pause display or the pause digest display according to the sixth embodiment; FIG. 107 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating an example of the hold notification effect with the change of the display mode of the hold display or the hold digest display according to the sixth embodiment; FIG. 108 is a diagram (part 3) illustrating an example of the hold notification effect with the change of the display mode of the hold display or the hold digest display according to the sixth embodiment;

  The gaming machine 10 receives an operation (for example, a pressing operation) of the push button 25 and changes the display mode of the effect lamp 540 according to the reliability notified as the pre-reading effect (FIG. 106 (1)). For example, the gaming machine 10 turns on the effect lamp 540 in a display mode corresponding to the display mode after the change of the hold display 605 or the hold digest display 606. More specifically, the gaming machine 10 lights up the effect lamp 540 in red when changing the hold display 605 or the hold digest display 606 to red.

  Further, the gaming machine 10 changes the operation mode of the board effect devices 550 and 551 together with the change of the display mode of the effect lamp 540 (FIG. 106 (1)). For example, the gaming machine 10 moves the movable member 551a hidden behind the board effect device 551 directly below the effect lamp 540. The change of the operation mode of the board effect devices 550 and 551 can direct the player's attention to the upper part of the display device 41, and also directs the player's attention to the change of the display mode of the effect lamp 540 performed at the same time. be able to. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can make the player easily feel that the effect lamp 540 and the board effect devices 550 and 551 take on the effect related to the on-hold notice effect. Also, the gaming machine 10 can direct the player's attention to the display device 41.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 changes the position of the sub display device 530 from the advanced position to the retracted position (FIGS. 106 (1) and (2)). Thus, the display device 41 clearly indicates the hold display 605. In this manner, the gaming machine 10 can make the player feel the correspondence between the effect game and the on-hold notice effect from the interlock of the retraction of the sub display device 530 and the indication of the on-hold display 605. Note that the display device 41 provides a time lag in which the display mode of the hold display 605 or the hold termination display 606 is not changed for a predetermined time after the position of the sub display device 530 is at the retracted position (see FIG. )). That is, in the gaming machine 10, the effect lamp 540 changes the display mode, the board effect devices 550 and 551 change the operation mode, and the sub display device 530 changes the position, so that the hold display 605 or hold reservation is performed. The display mode of the display 606 is maintained.

  Although the gaming machine 10 receives the operation of the push button 25 to change the position of the sub display device 530 from the advanced position to the retracted position, it waits at the advanced position and displays an image according to the operation of the push button 25. It may be displayed. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can perform various display effects using the sub display device 530 standing by at the advanced position and the display device 41.

  Next, the gaming machine 10 changes the operation mode of the board effect devices 550 and 551 to the initial state (FIG. 107 (1)). For example, the gaming machine 10 moves the movable member 551a that has been moved immediately below the effect lamp 540 to a position (initial state) where the movable member 551a is hidden behind the board effect device 551.

  Further, the gaming machine 10 displays a response display 562 from the effect lamp 540 toward the hold display 605 or the hold finish display 606 in the effect area 560 of the display device 41 (FIG. 107 (1)). The correspondence display 562 is a display for informing the correspondence between the effect lamp 540 and the hold display 605 or the hold digestion display 606, and is, for example, a lightning-like effect of the same color as the light emission mode of the effect lamp 540. It superimposes on the inside pattern 601C. More specifically, when the effect lamp 540 is changed to red, the gaming machine 10 sets the corresponding display 562 to a red effect. The correspondence display 562 may be changeable in shape, size, color, display time, and the like according to the reliability notified as pre-reading effect regardless of the display mode of the effect lamp 540. In addition, correspondence display 562 is said to be superimposed on middle symbol 601C in large symbol group 601, but may be superimposed on symbols other than middle symbol (for example, left symbol 601L and right symbol 601R), which symbol should be superimposed The display mode of the hold display 605 or the hold digest display 606 may be made different depending on the type. For example, the correspondence display 562 may indicate which display mode of the hold display 605 or the hold digest display 606 is to be switched depending on which symbol is superimposed, or the hold display depending on which symbol is superimposed The color, the shape, the size, and the like of the display mode after the change of the storage digest display 605 or 605 may be made different.

  Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 changes the display mode of the hold display 605 or the hold digest display 606 according to the reliability of notifying as pre-reading effect (FIG. 107 (1)). For example, the gaming machine 10 changes the hold indicator 605 or the hold digest indicator 606 from white to red.

  For example, it is not easy for the player to grasp the change timing and the change contents only by changing the display mode of the hold display 605 or the hold digest display 606. However, the gaming machine 10 holds the player's interest by alerting with various effect devices (display device 41, sub display device 530, push button 25, effect lamp 540, board effect devices 550, 551, etc.) It can lead to a display 605 or a hold digest display 606.

  It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 prioritizes the display contents of the effect area 560 over the display contents of the large symbol group 601 when setting the effect area 560 for holding notice in the display area of the display device 41 during execution of the hold notice effect. Do. At this time, the gaming machine 10 may hide the large symbol group 601 or may display the large symbol group 601 by reducing the transparency.

  Next, the gaming machine 10 restores the display mode of the effect lamp 540 to a normal display mode (for example, white lighting) (FIG. 107 (2)). Further, the gaming machine 10 cancels the setting of the effect area 560 for the on-hold notice in the display area of the display device 41 (FIG. 107 (2)).

  In this manner, in the game machine 10, the effect lamp 540, the board effect devices 550 and 551, the correspondence display 562, and the hold display 605 or the hold digest display 606 cooperate with one another to produce a play mode (display mode or operation mode Can be easily notified to the player because the notification target and the notification content are changed.

  The effect lamp 540 can switch the emission color by projecting the emission color of the light source 543 (see FIG. 79) onto the projection lens 541 (see FIG. 79) through the display plate 548 (see FIG. 79). The effect lamp 540 can display a character such as a tiger by projecting the light emitted from the light source 543 onto the projection lens 541 through the display plate 546 (see FIG. 79) (FIG. 108 (1)). At this time, the gaming machine 10 can display the correspondence display 562, the hold display 605, or the hold digest display 606 in a striped pattern in accordance with the display mode of the effect lamp 540.

  In addition, the effect lamp 540 can display a message such as “superheat” by projecting the light emitted from the light source 543 onto the projection lens 541 through the display plate 544 (see FIG. 79) (see FIG. )). At this time, the gaming machine 10 can display the correspondence display 562, the hold display 605, or the hold digest display 606 in a display mode such as a flame in accordance with the display mode of the effect lamp 540. Although not shown, the effect lamp 540 displays an animation in which a petal dances by projecting the light emitted from the light source 543 onto the projection lens 541 while switching the plurality of display plates 545, 547, 549. Can. At this time, the gaming machine 10 may display the correspondence display 562, the hold display 605, or the hold digest display 606 in a display form such as a petal in accordance with the display form of the effect lamp 540.

  Next, the relationship between the display mode and the degree of expectation in the hold display 605 or the hold digest display 606 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 109 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the display mode and the degree of expectation in the on-hold notice effect of the sixth embodiment. In addition, although the display mode of the hold display 605 will be described, the display mode of the hold digest display 606 can be the same.

  The display modes of the hold display 605 are from pattern P10 to pattern P19. The pattern P10 and the pattern P11 are default (standard) display modes, and are, for example, circular and white display modes. The pattern P <b> 10 is a display mode (non-hidden) relating to pending storage for which pending advance announcement effects are not scheduled. The pattern P11 is a display mode (latency A) relating to pending storage for which a pending advance presentation effect is scheduled.

  The pattern P12 is a non-default (non-standard) display mode, for example, a circular and white blinking display mode. The pattern P12 is a display mode (latency B) regarding pending storage for which pending advance presentation effects are scheduled.

  The pattern P11 and the pattern P12 are both related to the holding memory for which the hold notification effect is scheduled, but the pattern P11 does not clarify that the hold notification effect is scheduled, and the pattern P12 is for the hold notification effect. It differs in the point of clarifying a thing.

  The pattern P13 is a non-default display mode, for example, a circular and blue display mode. The pattern P14 is a non-default display mode, for example, a circular and green display mode. The pattern P15 is a non-default display mode, for example, a circular and red display mode. The pattern P16 is a non-default display mode, for example, a circular and petal (cherry blossom) pattern display mode. The pattern P17 is a non-default display mode, for example, a circular and rainbow display mode.

  In the pattern P13 to the pattern P17, an expectation (for example, a hit expectation) corresponding to the result mode of the variable display game is set. The degree of expectation is not limited to that corresponding to the possibility of winning per, but may correspond to the development stage of variable display effects such as reach and super reach. It should be noted that the general winning a prize opening notice display effect may be to notify the expected degree separately to the pending notice effect at the other stage and independently, or to notify the expected degree by the combination with the pending advance effect at the other stage. It may be

  The pattern P18 is a non-default display mode, for example, a circular and tiger pattern display mode. The pattern P18 is a temporary display mode, and changes from the pattern P15 to any of the patterns P17 at a delayed timing such as at the time of the hold shift. That is, the pattern P18 is a display mode showing an expectation of developing from the pattern P15 to any of the pattern P17.

  The pattern P19 is a non-default display mode, such as a flame-like display mode. The pattern P19 is a temporary display mode, and changes to either the pattern P16 or the pattern P17 at a delayed timing such as a hold shift. That is, the pattern P19 is a display mode indicating an expectation of developing into either the pattern P16 or the pattern P17.

  The gaming machine 10 sets the lowest expectation to the pattern P13, sets the highest expectation to the pattern P17, and sets the expectation to be gradually increased from the pattern P13 to the pattern P17. Note that the gaming machine 10 may set a specific degree of expectation, for example, from 0% to 100%, from pattern P13 to pattern P17. For example, "low", "medium" and "high" As such, the size of a rough expectation may be set.

  Pattern P 18 and pattern 19 may be in a non-temporary display mode. In that case, the gaming machine 10 can set a predetermined degree of expectation for the pattern P18 and the pattern 19 as in the patterns P13 to P17.

  In this manner, the gaming machine 10 can perform the on-hold notice effect as a series of operations ranging from the start point of the effect game on the sub display device 530 to the change in the display mode of the on-hold display 605 or the on-hold digest display 606. Such a gaming machine 10 holds a waiting notice effect while attracting attention of the player during the game progress to a feature operation (for example, the position switching of the sub display device 530 or the operation mode of the board effect devices 550 and 551). Can increase the player's interest in Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 can make the on-hold notice effect more easily understandable to the player by interposing the item operation.

  Next, a modification of the on-hold notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a diagram showing an example of the hold notification effect accompanied by the change in the display mode of the hold display or the hold digest display according to the modification of the sixth embodiment.

  In the panel effect device 550, 551 shown in FIG. 107 (1), the movable member 551a can be moved to the back side of the panel effect device 551 without waiting for the correspondence display 562 to move from the effect lamp 540 to the hold display 605 or the hold finish display 606. To move to the position where the movable member 551a is hidden behind the panel presentation device 551 while waiting for the correspondence display 562 to move from the effect lamp 540 to the hold display 605 or the hold digest display 606. It is good (figure 110 (1)).

  At this time, the correspondence display 562 can have the same display mode regardless of the position of the movable member 551a. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can reduce the processing load of the effect control device 300, and can perform the corresponding display without a sense of discomfort even in an unexpected situation in which the movable member 551a does not operate.

  In addition, the panel effect devices 550 and 551 may include a light emitting unit (for example, full color LED) including the movable member 551a, and a light emission mode (for example, synchronization) corresponding to the effect lamp 540. Display (Fig. 110 (1)). Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can increase the player's interest in the effect lamp 540 by the movable member 551a. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may set the light emission mode of the other light emission units included in the board effect devices 550 and 551 to a light emission mode different from the light emission unit included in the movable member 551a. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can make the movable member 551 a and the effect lamp 540 stand out from the center case 40 to further increase the player's interest in the effect lamp 540.

  The panel effect devices 550 and 551 shown in FIGS. 106 (1) and (2) move the movable member 551a from the back surface of the panel effect device 551 directly below the effect lamp 540, but from the back surface of the panel effect device 550. The movable member 550a may be moved immediately below the effect lamp 540 (FIG. 110 (2)). In addition, the gaming machine 10 may select which of the movable members 550a and 551a the board effect devices 550 and 551 are to be moved in relation to the reliability notified by the on-hold notice effect. For example, the gaming machine 10 gives the player a new interest in the movement of the movable members 550a and 551a by notifying the reliability different when the movable member 551a moves and when the movable member 550a moves. Can.

  Further, the game machine 10 may make the operation contents of the push button 25 different depending on which of the movable members 550 a and 551 a is moved. For example, the movement of the movable member 551a corresponds to a single pressing operation of the push button 25, and the movement of the movable member 550a corresponds to a plurality of pressing operations (continuous hitting operation) of the push button 25. At this time, the movable member 550a may move in relation to the number of pressing operations of the push button 25 (FIG. 110 (2)). For example, the movable member 550a moves little by little each time the push button 25 is pressed, and moves immediately below the effect lamp 540 when the number of press operations reaches 10 times.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 can display the operation guidance display 561 on the effect area 560 of the display device 41 and can guide the continuous hitting operation of the push button 25. For example, the gaming machine 10 can display a continuous hitting operation image of the push button 25 as the operation guidance display 561. In addition to or in place of the operation guidance display 561, the gaming machine 10 may display a message “Continuous strike!” Or the like on the sub display device 530.

  Next, the execution timing of the on-hold notice effect will be described using FIG. FIG. 111 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart of the on-hold notice effect according to the sixth embodiment. First, the start winning at timing t0 can be the starting point of the on-hold notice effect. The effect control device 300 detects the start winning combination that can be the starting point of the on-hold notice effect by receiving the prefetch system command from the game control device 100 at timing t0.

  In addition, when the start winning combination at the timing t0 is “m (for example, any integer from 0 to 7)” before the starting winning combination, “1” is incremented to “m + 1” as the number of pending storages. Update to

  Further, the effect control device 300 can set the on-hold notice effect standby state for waiting on the execution of the on-hold notice effect. Thereby, the effect control device 300 can adjust the start timing and the execution time of the effect game in the sub display device 530. For example, the effect control device 300 can release the on-hold notice effect standby state at timing t1 after the on-hold shift timing and can start the effect game by detecting the on-hold notice effect execution trigger at timing t2. The pending shift timing is a timing at which the number of fluctuation display times is updated to “n + 1” by incrementing “1” when the number of fluctuation display times is “n (for example, any integer of 1 or more)”. The on-hold notice effect execution trigger may be a timer trigger or an event trigger after the timing at which the on-hold notice effect standby state can be released. More specifically, the effect control device 300 may release the on-hold notice effect standby state using the timing at which 3000 ms has elapsed from the on-hold shift timing as a timer trigger, and may start the effect game. Alternatively, the effect control device 300 may release the on-hold notice effect standby state as an event trigger by detecting the flow-down (see FIG. 76) of the effect channel 354 of the game ball after the on-hold shift timing to start the effect game. Further, the effect control device 300 does not necessarily have to be capable of releasing the on-hold notice effect standby state beyond the on-hold shift timing. In addition, the effect control device 300 may set the reception timing of the prefetching system command as the start timing of the effect game without setting the pending notification effect standby state.

  When the effect game starts at timing t2, the effect control device 300 continues the effect game for a predetermined time, and derives (displays) the result of the effect game at timing t3. When the whole image of the push button 25 is derived in the sub display device 530 as a result of the effect game, the effect control device 300 performs operation guide display of the push button 25 for a predetermined time from timing t3. In addition, when the operation of the push button 25 is detected at timing t4, the effect control device 300 displays the correspondence guidance (for example, the correspondence display 562) without waiting for a predetermined time to elapse. At time t5, the effect control device 300 changes the display mode (hold mode) of the hold display 605 or the hold finish display 606 in response to the correspondence guidance.

  In this manner, in the gaming machine 10, since the plurality of effect devices cooperate between the start winning combination and the holding mode change, it is possible to easily inform the player of the notification target and the notification content while maintaining high interest. it can. In addition, even if the game machine 10 operates a movable effect device (for example, the sub display device 530 or the panel effect device 550, 551 or the like), the player's attention is separated from the hold notification effect to cooperate with the hold notification effect. You can suppress that. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may be arranged in such a manner that the presentation locations (for example, the display positions of the sub display device 530, the panel presentation devices 550 and 551, the presentation lamps 540, the hold display 605 and the hold digest display 606) are distributed. The player's attention can be prevented from leaving the on-hold notice effect since the effect locations cooperate with one another.

  The gaming machine 10 may be capable of executing effects (for example, the effect game of the fifth embodiment) other than the hold notification effect in the hold notification effect standby state. Further, the gaming machine 10 may stand by in the holding notice effect standby state for execution of effects including effects other than the holding notice effect (for example, the effect game of the fifth embodiment). In this case, the gaming machine 10 may notify the continuation time of the on-hold notice effect standby state, for example, the continuation time of the on-off notice effect standby state or the on-off notice effect standby by the sub display device 530 or another display device. It is also possible to display the number of times of variation display etc. of the special drawing game in the state. In addition, the gaming machine 10, in the holding notice effect waiting state, the duration of the holding notice effect waiting state or the special drawing game in the holding notice effect waiting state by the BGM and the sound effects (including sound) outputted by the speakers 19a and 19b. It is also possible to notify of the number of times of fluctuation display of Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can improve the player's sense of expectation for the release of the on-hold notice effect standby state. Further, the gaming machine 10 can maintain the player's attention to the release of the on-hold notice effect standby state, and can suppress the player's missed on-off notice effect after the on-off notice effect standby state is released.

  Note that the gaming machine 10 may be provided with a backup memory (for example, an EEPROM etc.) in the effect control device 300, and in the power-off state, information regarding the on-hold notice effect standby state is stored and held in the backup memory. It may be possible to return to the on-hold notice effect standby state. For example, the information on the pending notification effect standby state includes the presence or absence of the pending notification effect standby state and the effect location (for example, the sub display device 530, the panel effect device 550, 551, the effect lamp 540, the pending indicator 605, or the pending decision indicator 606). It includes the current display mode and the final display mode for each display position etc.). At this time, the gaming machine 10 uses the effect location as the default mode after power recovery, and is triggered by the reception of a predetermined command (for example, a fluctuation start command, a hold number command, a prefetch command, etc.) from the game control apparatus 100. The information on the hold notice effect standby state is read out from the backup memory, and the hold notice effect standby state is restored. When the gaming machine 10 returns to the on-hold notice effect standby state after power recovery, the on-off notice effect may be made waiting for the on-off notice effect execution opportunity, or the on-off notice effect execution opportunity is established or not. However, it may be regarded as having been established and the on-hold notice effect may be performed. In addition, when the gaming machine 10 returns to the on-hold notice effect standby state after the power is restored, the gaming machine 10 may display the final mode without passing through the intermediate process of the on-hold notice effect. In addition, when the effect control device 300 is not provided with a backup memory, the gaming machine 10 may not execute any on-hold notice effect related to the on-hold notice effect standby state after power recovery.

  Next, detailed expectation degree notification performed by the effect lamp 540 and the board effect devices 550 and 551 as a modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 112 is a diagram illustrating an example of anticipation degree notification according to the modification of the sixth embodiment.

  The gaming machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment receives the operation (for example, the pressing operation) of the push button 25 and changes the display mode of the effect lamp 540 according to the reliability notified as pre-reading effect (FIG. 106 (1)). ). The gaming machine 10 of the modification of the sixth embodiment is notified of the expectation by the five light emission modes of the light emission units of the panel effect devices 550 and 551, and the light emission units of the movable members 550a and 551a in addition to the effect lamp 540. Do.

  The effect lamp 540 reports an approximate degree of expectation, and the board effect devices 550 and 551 (including the movable members 550a and 551a) notify a detailed degree of expectation. For example, the effect lamp 540 reports the approximate degree of expectation in the display mode as shown in FIG. More specifically, when the light emission mode is red, the effect lamp 540 has a higher expectation than the green and a lower expectation than the petal (cherry blossom) pattern. However, the degree of expectation notified by the gaming machine 10 may be close to a petal (sakura) pattern or a degree of expectation close to green, even when the light emission mode of the effect lamp 540 is red.

  The panel effect devices 550 and 551 assist the expectation degree notification that can not be represented only by the light emission mode of the effect lamp 540. In addition, the character which each board | plate structure respectively has board production apparatus 550, 551 and movable member 550a, and 551a demonstrates by calling it "flower", "snow", "the moon", and "blow."

  "Flower", "Snow", "Month" and "Blow" notify that the detailed expectation is "1" when the respective display modes are "off". This indicates that the light emission mode of the effect lamp 540 is the lowest even in the red. In addition, when the display mode of "flower" is "lighting" and the display modes of "snow", "moon" and "blow" are "off", it is informed that the detailed expectation is "2". . This indicates that the light emission mode of the effect lamp 540 is one with low expectation among red. In addition, when the display mode of "flower" and "snow" is "lighting" and the display mode of "month" and "blow" is "lighting out", it is informed that the detailed expectation is "3". . This indicates that the light emission mode of the effect lamp 540 is of the medium degree of expectation among red. Also, when the display mode of "flower", "snow" and "blow" is "light" and the display mode of "month" is "off", it is informed that the detailed expectation is "4". . This indicates that the light emission mode of the effect lamp 540 is the one with high expectation among red. In addition, when the display mode of "flower", "snow" and "moon" is "on" and the display mode of "blow" is "off", it is informed that the detailed expectation is "5". . This indicates that the light emission mode of the effect lamp 540 is the highest even in red.

  In this manner, the gaming machine 10 can express the degree of expectation which can not be represented by only one effect lamp 540, with the aid of the board effect devices 550, 551 (including the movable members 550a, 551a). In addition, the gaming machine 10 plays a game of mutual relationship by using the effect lamp 540 and the board effect devices 550, 551 (including the movable members 550a, 551a) which cooperate between the start winning and the hold mode change. It is possible to inform the player and make it easy for the player to understand and improve the degree of interest and to perform detailed notification of the degree of expectation.

  The assistance of the panel effect devices 550, 551 (including the movable members 550a, 551a) is assisted by the display mode of the display portion provided for each of the panel effects devices 550, 551 (including the movable members 550a, 551a) And assistance by the operation aspect of the members 550a, 551a.

  Next, the pending change mode determination process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 113 is a diagram showing a flowchart of hold change mode determination processing in the effect control device of the sixth embodiment. The on-hold change mode determination process is a process of setting a series of on-hold notice effects. The on-hold change mode determination process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300 each time a start winning occurs. The pending change mode determination process is a process executed by the control unit in step D23 (see FIG. 44) of the main process.

  [Step D171] The control unit determines whether or not the hold display 605 or the hold digest display 606 is in a state where the hold change is possible. For example, when there is a predetermined number of pending storages, when a prefetch notice command is received, when an effect time of a predetermined time can be secured, etc., the status can be changed when a combination of these conditions is met. It can be determined that The control unit proceeds to step D172 when the hold display 605 or the hold digest display 606 is in the state in which the hold change is possible, and ends the hold change mode determination process when the hold change is not possible.

  [Step D172] The control unit executes an effect game setting process. The effect game setting process is a process of setting an effect game to be performed by the sub display device 530. The effect game setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  [Step D173] The control unit executes an operation guidance setting process. The operation guidance setting process is a process of setting operation guidance of the push button 25. The operation guidance setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  [Step D174] The control unit executes a correspondence guidance setting process. The correspondence guidance setting process is a process of setting the effect mode of the effect lamp 540, the board effect devices 550 and 551, the correspondence display 562, and the hold display 605 or the hold termination display 606. The correspondence guidance setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. The control unit ends the on-hold change mode determination process after executing the correspondence guidance setting process.

  Next, the effect game setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 114 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect game setting processing in the effect control device of the sixth embodiment. The effect game setting process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300 in step D172 of the hold change mode determination process.

  [Step D181] The control unit determines the final holding mode of the target holding memory. The final holding mode refers to the final display mode in the holding display 605 or the holding digestion display 606, and is, for example, any of patterns P10 to P17 (may include patterns P18 and P19) shown in FIG. The control unit can determine the final holding mode based on the pre-reading advance notice command and the like.

[Step D182] The control unit sets a pending notification effect standby state.
[Step D183] The control unit determines that the on-hold notice effect execution opportunity is established, proceeds to step D185 when the on-hold notice effect execution opportunity is established, and proceeds to step D184 if the on-hold notice effect execution opportunity is not established.

  [Step D184] The control unit determines whether or not the on-hold notice effect standby state has ended, and proceeds to step D183 if the on-hold notice effect standby state is not ended, and waits for establishment of on-hold notice effect execution timing. On the other hand, the control unit ends the effect game setting process when the on-hold notice effect standby state is ended. The control unit ends the on-hold notice effect standby state by a predetermined timer trigger or event trigger.

  [Step D185] The control unit sets the effect game by the establishment of the on-hold notice effect execution trigger. The setting of the effect game includes the effect time, the effect mode, and the result mode. The control unit ends the on-hold notice effect standby state after setting the effect game.

  Next, the operation guidance setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 115 is a diagram showing a flowchart of operation guidance setting processing in the effect control device of the sixth embodiment. The operation guidance setting process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300 in step D173 of the hold change mode determination process.

  [Step D191] The control unit determines whether or not a specific result mode (for example, the entire image of the push button 25) has been derived in the effect game. The control unit proceeds to step D192 when the specific result mode is derived in the effect game, and ends the operation guidance setting process when the specific result mode is not derived.

  [Step D192] The control unit determines an operation guidance mode. For example, the operation guide mode includes single-shot guidance for guiding a single pressing operation of the push button 25 and continuous hitting guidance for guiding a plurality of pressing operations of the push button 25. The control unit can determine the operation guide mode in accordance with the final hold mode determined in step D181 of the effect game setting process.

  [Step D193] The control unit sets an operation reception time according to the operation guidance mode determined in Step D192. For example, the control unit sets an operation reception time of 3 seconds when performing single hit guidance, and sets an operation reception time of 5 seconds when performing continuous hit guidance.

  [Step D194] The control unit sets an operation guidance display. For example, the control unit sets the display content of the display device 41 and the display content of the sub display device 530 in response to single hit guidance and continuous hit guidance. The control unit ends the operation guidance setting process after setting the operation guidance display.

  Next, the correspondence guidance setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 is a diagram showing a flowchart of correspondence guide setting processing in the effect control device of the sixth embodiment. The correspondence guidance setting process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300 in step D174 of the hold change mode determination process.

  [Step D201] The control unit determines whether or not the pressing operation of the push button 25 has been detected within the operation reception time. The control unit proceeds to step D202 when a pressing operation of the push button 25 is detected within the operation reception time, and ends the correspondence guidance setting process when a pressing operation of the push button 25 is not detected.

  Note that the control unit may not perform all of the on-hold notice effects by not detecting the pressing operation of the push button 25, the timing at which the corresponding on-hold standby display is switched to on-hold digest display, or the timing thereafter. It is also possible to switch to the final holding mode (for example, at the time of reach occurrence, at the time of presentation development during reach, etc.).

[Step D202] The control unit acquires the final holding mode determined in Step D181 of the effect game setting process.
[Step D203] The control unit determines a corresponding guidance mode in accordance with the final reserve mode. The corresponding guide mode referred to here includes the display mode of the effect lamp 540, the operation mode of the board effect devices 550 and 551, and the display mode of the corresponding display 562.

[Step D204] The control unit sets the determined correspondence guidance mode as correspondence guidance.
[Step D205] The control unit sets a display mode (hold display mode) of the corresponding hold display 605 or the hold digest display 606 according to the final hold mode. The control unit ends the correspondence guidance setting process after setting the hold display mode.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can set a series of hold notification effects.
Next, the configuration of the display screen of the display device 41 according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 117 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen in the display device of the modified example 1 of the sixth embodiment. In addition, about the structure similar to the display apparatus 41 of 6th Embodiment described using FIG. 102, the code | symbol is made the same and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The gaming machine 10 of the first modification of the sixth embodiment also allows the position of the sub-display device 530 to be changed and retracts to the lower end of the center case 40 (retraction position) and advances to the front of the display device 41. It is possible to switch between the position to be moved (advanced position).

  First, FIG. 117 (1) shows the display screen of the center case 40 and the display device 41 when the sub display device 530 is in the retracted position while the symbol in the variable display game is changing. The display device 41 includes, in the display content, two sets of decorative symbols, a special figure 1 pending number indication 603, a special figure 2 pending number indication 604, a pending indication 605a, and a pending decision indication 606.

  The hold display 605 a can clearly indicate the number of held memories of the special view fluctuation display game and notify of the degree of expectation for the game result for each held memory, according to the display mode. The number of pending storages displayed by the pending display 605 a corresponds to the sum of the number of pending storages displayed by the special view 1 pending count display 603 and the number of pending storages displayed by the special view 2 pending number display 604. The hold display 605a is displayed in a display area that is not within the movement range of the sub display device 530, and is displayed, for example, in one vertical row for each hold storage on the left side of the display area. The display device 41 arranges the hold display 605a on the left side of the large symbol group 601, and arranges the special view 1 hold number display 603 and the special view 2 hold number display 604 on the right side. Even if the line of sight moves largely in the display area, the number of pending storages can be confirmed well.

  Next, a display screen of the center case 40 and the display device 41 when the sub display device 530 is at the advanced position while the symbol is changing in the variable display game is shown in FIG. 117 (2). The display device 41 includes a small symbol group 602, a special figure 1 pending number indication 603, a special figure 2 pending number indication 604, a pending indication 605a, and a pending decision indication 606 in the display content.

  The sub-display device 530 is at the advanced position and hides a part of the display area of the display device 41. However, the hold display 605a is well visible because it is not in the movement range of the sub-display device 530.

  Next, the execution timing of the suspension announcement effect of the modification 2 of the sixth embodiment will be described using FIG. FIG. 118 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart of the reserve announcement effect of the modification 2 of the sixth embodiment. In the sixth embodiment, from the staging game to the holding mode change is performed in one variation display in the holding notice effect, but in the second modification of the sixth embodiment, the holding mode is held from the effect game in the holding notice effect. The change is performed over two or more variable displays.

  First, the start winning at timing t10 can be the starting point of the on-hold notice effect. The effect control device 300 detects the start winning combination that can be the starting point of the on-hold notice effect by receiving the pre-reading system command from the game control device 100 at timing t10.

  Further, the effect control device 300 can set the on-hold notice effect standby state for waiting on the execution of the on-hold notice effect. Thereby, the effect control device 300 can adjust the start timing and the execution time of the effect game in the sub display device 530. For example, the effect control device 300 can release the on-hold notice effect standby state at timing t11 or later which exceeds the on-hold shift timing, and starts the effect game by detecting the on-hold notice effect execution trigger at timing t12.

  When starting the effect game at timing t12, the effect control device 300 continues the effect game for a predetermined time, and derives (displays) the result of the effect game at timing t13. Note that the duration of the effect game (from the start of the effect game to the derivation of the result of the effect game) may be a period within the range of one variable display being executed in parallel, or two or more changes. It may be a period spanning display.

  The effect control device 300 changes the display mode of the effect lamp 540 from timing t13 and performs operation guide display of the push button 25 when the entire image of the push button 25 is derived in the sub display device 530 as a result of the effect game. . The change of the display mode of the effect lamp 540 functions as the advance notice for the change of the hold mode.

  The effect control device 300 continues the change of the display mode of the effect lamp 540 and the operation guide display of the push button 25 for a predetermined time. The predetermined time may be a period within the range of one variable display being executed in parallel, or may be a period spanning two or more variable displays.

  When the effect control device 300 detects the operation of the push button 25 at timing t14, the effect control device 300 displays a correspondence guidance (for example, the correspondence display 562) without waiting for a predetermined time to elapse. At time t15, the effect control device 300 changes the display mode (hold mode) of the hold display 605 or the hold finish display 606 in response to the correspondence guidance.

  That is, the gaming machine 10 can start the effect game when the number of times of variation display is “n + 1”, and can display the corresponding guidance at the timing of the number of times of variation display “n + k (where k ≧ 2)”. For example, the gaming machine 10 displays the display mode (for example, red) as the advance notice on the effect lamp 540 across a plurality of variable display games, and displays the display mode corresponding to the display mode of the effect lamp 540 by the corresponding display It is handed over to the hold display 605 a and the hold digest display 606. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can make the player feel more specific sense of expectation until the operation of the push button 25 is received. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can secure a holding effect time sufficient to perform various effects. Note that the effect unit that changes the display mode as the advance notice may be not only the effect lamp 540 but also other effect portions such as the board effect devices 550 and 551. In addition, the hold display 605a and the hold digest display 606, which take over the display mode of the effect section that changes the display mode as the advance notice, do not necessarily have to be the same display mode, and include development and demotion. It is also good.

  The gaming machine 10 may be capable of executing effects (for example, the effect game of the fifth embodiment) other than the on-hold notice effect in the effect time sufficiently secured. In this case, the gaming machine 10 may notify the continuation time of the rendering time sufficiently secured, for example, the duration time or rendering time of the rendering time sufficiently secured by the sub display device 530 or another display device. It is also possible to display the number of times of variation display and the like of the special drawing game shown in FIG. In the gaming machine 10, the duration of the rendering time sufficiently secured by the BGM and the sound effects (including sound) output from the speakers 19a and 19b in the sufficiently secured rendering time, and the special drawing game during the rendering time You may make it alert | report the fluctuation | variation display frequency etc. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can improve the player's sense of expectation for the release of the on-hold notice effect standby state. Further, the gaming machine 10 can maintain the attention of the player during the rendering time sufficiently secured, and can prevent the player from overlooking the staging announcement effect.

  The gaming machine 10 may delay the derivation of the result of the effect game. For example, the gaming machine 10 maintains the variation state of the effect game when limiting the derivation of the result of the effect game by the progress of the special figure change display game. Maintenance of the fluctuation state of the effect game includes extension of a predetermined time with respect to the fluctuation time, and extension of a predetermined condition (for example, restriction release). For example, the gaming machine 10 maintains the variation state of the effect game, for example, when a predetermined effect occurs, when the special view game derives a hit, or when a predetermined error is detected. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may not accept the operation of the push button 25 during the delay in the derivation of the result of the effect game, and the provisional display mode (even when the operation of the push button 25 is detected) For example, the default display mode, the display mode to be set in advance, and the last mode may be temporarily displayed. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may forcibly stop the progress of the effect game. For example, the gaming machine 10 forcibly stops the fluctuation of the effect game when the progress of the effect game is limited by the progress of the special figure change display game. The forced stop of the fluctuation of the effect game includes partial shortening of the fluctuation time, all shortening and the like. For example, the gaming machine 10 forcibly stops the fluctuation of the effect game, for example, when a predetermined error is detected, when the special effect game is generated, or when the special view game derives a hit. Further, the gaming machine 10 may display the display mode scheduled when the fluctuation of the effect game is forcibly stopped, or a provisional display mode (for example, a default display mode or a display set in advance). It is also possible to display the mode, the previous release mode, etc.). When the game machine 10 forcibly stops the variation of the effect game, the gaming machine 10 may forcibly end (cancel) the on-hold notice effect which is to be played the effect game.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 may have two or more effect parts that change the display mode as the advance notice, and for example, the advance notice of the on-hold notice effect may be performed by the effect lamp 540 and the board effect devices 550 and 551. Good. Here, the advance notice of the on-hold notice effect performed by the effect lamp 540 and the board effect devices 550 and 551 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 119 is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode in the advance notice of the on-hold notice effect in the second modification of the sixth embodiment.

  The gaming machine 10 switches the display mode of the effect lamp 540 first in the advance notice of the reserved advance effect, and switches the light emission mode of the light emitting unit of the board effect devices 550, 551 later. At this time, the gaming machine 10 can switch the light emission modes of the light emitting units of the board effect devices 550 and 551 in a plurality of stages in the effect time sufficiently secured.

  In the switching example shown in FIG. 119 (1), the display mode of the effect lamp 540 is switched to red by the change trigger tr1, and the panel effect devices 550 and 551 during the extinguishing switch the light emission mode while synchronizing from the change trigger tr1 on. Show. Here, the panel effect device 550 will be described as "flower" and the panel effect device 551 as "snow". Further, the change trigger can be a predetermined event trigger or timer trigger such as a hold shift, a predetermined time lapse, an operation detection of the push button 25 or the like. "Flower" and "Snow" are synchronously switched to blue at the change trigger tr2, switched to green synchronously at the change trigger tr3, and switched to red synchronously at the change trigger tr4.

  In the switching example shown in FIG. 119 (2), the display mode of the effect lamp 540 is switched to red by the change trigger tr1, and the light emission mode is switched asynchronously after the change trigger tr1 after "flower" and "snow" are turned off. Show. The "flower" is switched to blue at the change trigger tr2, switched to green at the change trigger tr3, and switched to red at the change trigger tr4. On the other hand, "snow" is switched to blue at a change trigger tr3, switched to green at a change trigger tr4, and switched to red at a change trigger tr5.

  As described above, “flower” and “snow” (panel effect devices 550 and 551) become the display mode of the effect lamp 540 in stages by switching the light emission mode synchronously or asynchronously. Note that the light emission modes of "flower" and "snow" are changed so as to increase the degree of expectation in order to correspond to the display modes as shown in FIG. In the gaming machine 10, depending on the number of change triggers, the light emission mode of "flower" and "snow" may not reach the light emission mode corresponding to the display mode of the effect lamp 540. The light emission mode corresponding to the display mode may be exceeded. In the gaming machine 10, the light emission modes of "flower" and "snow" may complement the display mode of the effect lamp 540 to notify more detailed reliability. For example, when the light emission mode of the effect lamp 540 is red, if the light emission modes of "flower" and "snow" are respectively red, the reliability of prior notice by the effect lamp 540 is improved, and "flower" and "snow" If the light emission mode of each does not reach red (for example, blue), the reliability of prior notice by the effect lamp 540 decreases, and if the light emission mode of “flower” and “snow” exceed red (for example, petal (cherry blossom) pattern) The reliability of prior notice by the effect lamp 540 is lowered. In addition, the final light emission mode of “flower” and “snow” may be different, in which case game machine 10 is compared with the case where the final light emission mode of “flower” and “snow” is the same, The light emission mode of "flower" and "snow" can complement the display mode of the effect lamp 540 to notify the more detailed reliability.

  Next, the on-hold notice effect according to the third modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 120 is a diagram showing an example of a reserve announcement effect accompanied by a change in the display mode of the hold display or the hold digest display according to the third modification of the sixth embodiment. In the sixth embodiment, the correspondence display 562 is displayed superimposed on the large symbol group 601 in the suspension notice effect, but in the modification 3 of the sixth embodiment, the correspondence display in the suspension notice effect is the large symbol It is displayed avoiding superimposition with the group 601.

  The gaming machine 10 displays on the effect area 560 of the display device 41 a correspondence display 563 directed from the effect lamp 540 to the hold display 605 or the hold finish display 606 (FIG. 120 (1)). The correspondence display 563 is a display for informing the correspondence between the effect lamp 540 and the hold display 605 or the hold digest display 606, and is, for example, a lightning-like effect of the same color as the light emission mode of the effect lamp 540. More specifically, when the effect lamp 540 is changed to red, the gaming machine 10 sets the corresponding display 563 to a red effect. The correspondence display 563 may be changeable in shape, size, color, display time, and the like according to the reliability notified as pre-reading effect regardless of the display mode of the effect lamp 540. Note that the correspondence display 563 goes around the left side of the large symbol group 601 so as not to overlap the large symbol group 601, and goes to the hold display 605 or the hold digest display 606. In addition, the correspondence indication 563 is between the left symbol 601L and the middle symbol 601C, and the middle symbol 601C and the right symbol 601R so as not to overlap the right symbol group of the large symbol group 601 or to overlap the large symbol group. May be In addition, the correspondence display 563 is not necessarily required to go from the effect lamp 540 to the hold display 605 or the hold finish display 606 on one road, and as shown in FIG. 120 (2) One or more of them may be directed to the hold indicator 605 or the hold digest indicator 606. Further, the correspondence display 563 indicates which display mode of the hold display 605 or the hold digest display 606 is to be switched depending on which route it takes from the effect lamp 540 to the hold display 605 or the hold digest display 606. Alternatively, the color, shape, size, etc. of the display mode after the change may be made different.

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can ensure the visibility of the large symbol group 601 while displaying the correspondence display 563. Also, the gaming machine 10 can increase the player's interest in the correspondence display 563.

  Next, the execution timing of the on-hold notice effect of the modification 4 of the sixth embodiment will be described using FIGS. 121 and 122. FIG. FIG. 121 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of a suspension notice effect accompanied by a change in display mode of the suspension display or the suspension digest display according to the fourth modification of the sixth embodiment; FIG. 122 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating an example of a reserve announcement effect accompanied by a change in the display mode of the hold display or the hold digest display according to the fourth modification of the sixth embodiment; In the sixth embodiment, the correspondence display 562 directly goes from the effect lamp 540 to the hold display 605 or the hold termination display 606 in the hold notification effect, but in the fourth modification of the sixth embodiment, the hold notification effect is supported. The display goes from the effect lamp 540 to the hold display 605 or the hold finish display 606 via a relay point.

  The gaming machine 10 switches the display mode of the effect lamp 540 (for example, from white to green) and displays the character 564 in the effect area 560 of the display device 41 (FIG. 121 (1)). The gaming machine 10 displays a correspondence display 565 directed from the effect lamp 540 to the character 564 in the effect area 560 of the display device 41 (FIG. 121 (2)). The gaming machine 10 integrally displays the character 564 and the correspondence display 566 (Fig. 122 (1)). In the description of FIG. 118, the gaming machine 10 displays the display mode as the advance notice on the effect lamp 540 across a plurality of variable display games, but the gaming machine 10 of the fourth modification of the sixth embodiment The display mode (for example, green) as the advance notice can be displayed on the correspondence display 566 displayed integrally with the character 564. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can maintain the player's interest in the hold notification effect while waiting for the progress of the hold notification effect. Note that the correspondence display 565 does not need to be distinguishable from the character 564 itself. For example, the character 564 may have a function as the correspondence display 565 by changing the display mode of the character 564. For example, the correspondence display 565 may be an effect on the back of the character 564 or may be an appearance change (color change, form change, etc.) of the character 564. The gaming machine 10 displays the correspondence display 567 directed from the character 564 to the hold display 605 or the hold termination display 606 in the effect area 560 of the display device 41 and switches the display mode of the hold display 605 or the hold termination display 606 2)).

  In this manner, the gaming machine 10 switches the display mode of the hold display 605 or the hold termination display 606 through a plurality of steps from the effect lamp 540 to the correspondence display 565, the character 564 and the correspondence display 566, and the correspondence display 567. Can. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can maintain the player's interest in the hold notification effect even if the progress of the hold notification effect is long.

  The correspondence displays 565, 566, and 567 are displays for notifying of the correspondence between the effect lamp 540, the character 564, and the hold display 605 or the hold digest display 606. Also, the character 564 has a function as a relay display for relaying the effect lamp 540 and the hold display 605 or the hold termination display 606, and also holds a prior notice hold in the case of giving a prior notice across a plurality of variable display games. It has a function as

  Further, the gaming machine 10 clarified the correspondence relationship between the effect lamp 540 and the hold display 605 or the hold termination display 606 by the correspondence display 565, 566, 567, but separately from this, the correspondence display 562 (see FIG. 110 (1) The correspondence relationship may be clearly indicated by the correspondence display 563 (see FIGS. 120 (1) and (2)). For example, the correspondence between the effect lamp 540 and the hold display 605 or the hold digest display 606 by the correspondence display 565, 566, 567 is explicitly indicated as the first correspondence, and the correspondence lamp 562 or the correspondence lamp 563 with the effect lamp 540 The correspondence with the hold indication 605 or the hold termination indication 606 is explicitly indicated as the second correspondence, and the gaming machine 10 is made to indicate the second correspondence late after the first correspondence being explicitly indicated. May be In that case, the gaming machine 10 expects the display mode of the hold display 605 or the hold digest display 606 by specifying the first correspondence relationship from the display mode of the hold display 605 or the hold digest display 606 by specifying the second correspondence relation. By setting it as a display mode with a low feeling, it is possible to produce a high expectation for the explicitness of the correspondence between the two levels.

  Next, the on-hold notice effect according to the fifth modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 123 is a diagram showing an example of the hold notification effect accompanied by the change of the display mode of the hold display or the hold digest display according to the fifth modification of the sixth embodiment. In the sixth embodiment, the correspondence display 562 linearly goes from the effect lamp 540 to the hold display 605 or the hold termination display 606 in the hold notice effect, but in the fifth modification of the sixth embodiment, the hold notice effect In the response display, from the effect lamp 540 to the suspension display 605a or the suspension processing display 606 linewise.

  The correspondence display 568 shown in FIG. 123 (1) goes from the effect lamp 540 to the middle symbol 601C, and after going to a pause on the middle symbol 601C, goes to the hold display 605a or the hold digest display 606. Further, the gaming machine 10 can change not only one of the hold display 605 a or the hold digest display 606 but also the corresponding display 568 to change two or more display modes, and branches the corresponding display 568. For example, the gaming machine 10 branches the correspondence display 568 into two on the middle symbol 601C, and goes to the first and second of the hold display 605a. Thereafter, the gaming machine 10 switches the first and second display modes of the hold display 605a. Thus, the gaming machine 10 can make the end point of the correspondence display 568 starting from the effect lamp 540 difficult to predict by displaying the correspondence display 568 in a broken line. In addition, the gaming machine 10 allows the player to have a sense of anticipation that two or more of the hold display 605 a or the hold digestion display 606 simultaneously change the display mode by enabling the correspondence display 568 to be branched at the midpoint (flexion point). Can be given.

  The gaming machine 10 may set two or more middle points of the correspondence display 568 without being limited to one. Further, the gaming machine 10 may set the middle point of the correspondence display 568 not only on the middle symbol 601C but also on the left symbol 601L and the right symbol 601R. At this time, the gaming machine 10 may change the degree of expectation depending on which one of the left symbol 601L, the middle symbol 601C, and the right symbol 601R the midpoint is set. Further, the gaming machine 10 may change the display mode of the symbol in which the middle point of the corresponding display is set. For example, in the correspondence display 569 shown in FIG. 123 (2), the midpoint is set on the right symbol 601R, and the right symbol 601R is changed to the enlarged display mode. In addition, the change of the display mode of the design in which the middle point of the correspondence display is set is not limited to the enlargement or reduction of the design, but the change of color, the change of pattern type (from a number pattern to a character pattern or a pattern consisting of numbers and characters Character change etc.) or the like.

  Next, the on-hold notice effect of the sixth modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the effect lamp, the correspondence display, and the hold display according to the sixth modification of the sixth embodiment. Although the correspondence display 562 of the sixth embodiment basically corresponds to the display mode of the effect lamp 540 and the display mode of the hold display 605 (including the hold display 605 a and the hold digest display 606), the sixth The correspondence display of the sixth modification of the embodiment is not limited to the correspondence between the display mode of the effect lamp 540 and the display mode of the hold display 605 on a one-to-one basis.

  The relationship between the effect lamp 540 and the correspondence display shown in FIG. 124 (1) is a one-to-one correspondence because the display manner of the correspondence display is white when the display manner of the effect lamp 540 is white. On the other hand, since the corresponding display in the display mode can correspond to the white, blue, green or red hold display 605 in the display mode, the correspondence display and the hold display 605 have a one-to-many correspondence relationship. It is. In addition, the corresponding display of the display mode is white has a correspondence with the display mode in which the degree of expectation higher than the degree of expectation set to white is set. That is, even when the effect lamp 540 and the corresponding display are white, the gaming machine 10 can make the player feel an expectation for the possibility that the hold display 605 will be white, blue, green or red.

  The relationship between the effect lamp 540 and the correspondence display shown in FIG. 124 (2) is a one-to-one correspondence because the display pattern of the correspondence display is a tiger pattern when the display mode of the effect lamp 540 is a tiger pattern. On the other hand, since the display mode corresponding to tiger pattern is compatible with the white, blue, green, or tiger pattern hold display 605, the relationship between the correspondence display and the hold display 605 is one-to-many. It is a correspondence relation. In addition, the correspondence display of a display aspect has a correspondence with the display aspect to which the expectation degree below the expectation degree set to the tiger pattern is set. That is, although the gaming machine 10 does not guarantee that the hold display 605 will be a tiger pattern even if the effect lamp 540 and the corresponding display have a tiger pattern, the game player 10 can expand the opportunity to touch the tiger pattern. .

  The relationship between the effect lamp and the corresponding display is not necessarily limited to 1: 1. As shown in FIG. 124 (3), the relation between the effect lamp and the correspondence display may be one-to-many correspondence, and the relation between the correspondence display and the hold display 605 may be one-to-one. Although the relationship between the effect lamp 540 and the corresponding display shown in FIG. 124 (1) indicates that the display corresponding to the effect lamp 540 has a higher degree of expectation when the display mode is white, for example, the display mode of the effect lamp 540 is In the case of tiger pattern, the corresponding display may be set to a lower expectation. Thus, the gaming machine 10 may have different correspondence depending on the display mode of the effect lamp 540. Similarly, the gaming machine 10 may have different correspondence depending on the display mode of the correspondence display.

  Next, the on-hold notice effect of the seventh modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 125 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the effect lamp, the correspondence display, and the hold display according to Modification 7 of the sixth embodiment. Although the correspondence display 562 of the sixth embodiment basically corresponds to the display mode of the effect lamp 540 and the display mode of the hold display 605 (including the hold display 605 a and the hold digest display 606), the sixth In the correspondence display of the seventh modification of the embodiment, the correspondence between the display mode of the effect lamp 540 and the correspondence display relates to the correspondence between the correspondence display and the display mode of the hold display 605. That is, in the correspondence display of the seventh modification of the sixth embodiment, it is not determined whether the display form of the hold display 605 is only by the display form of the correspondence display, and the display form of the effect lamp 540 and the display form of the correspondence display And the display mode of the hold display 605 can be determined. In other words, in the correspondence display of the seventh modification of the sixth embodiment, the player can not predict what the display form of the hold display 605 will be with only the display form of the correspondence display. The player can predict the display mode of the hold display 605 in combination with the display mode of the corresponding display. The display mode of the effect lamp 540, the display mode of the correspondence display, and the display mode of the hold display 605 may be determined each time, or may be determined in advance as a combination.

  First, the relationship example shown in FIG. 125 (1) will be described. When the display mode of the correspondence display is red when the display mode of the effect lamp 540 is red, the effect control device 300 sets the display mode of the hold display 605 as a cherry (petal) pattern with probability p11 and red with probability p12. Make it white with p13. Further, when the display mode of the corresponding display is white when the display mode of the effect lamp 540 is red, the effect control device 300 sets the display mode of the hold display 605 as a cherry (petal) pattern with probability p21 and as red with probability p22. , White with probability p23. At this time, by setting p11 <p21, the gaming machine 10 can produce a sense of expectation of obtaining a higher degree of expectation in the hold display 605 even if the degree of expectation indicated by the effect lamp 540 is demoted by the correspondence display. . The gaming machine 10 may further clarify the sense of expectation that can be supervised by the player by setting p11 = 0. In addition, the gaming machine 10 holds the combination of the display mode of the effect lamp 540 and the display mode of the corresponding display by setting p12 ≠ p13 (for example, p12> p13) and p22 ≠ p23 (for example, p22 <p23) It is possible to produce an interest that causes the player to predict the display mode of the display 605.

  Next, a related example shown in FIG. 125 (2) will be described. Here, although some display modes are omitted for the sake of simplicity, as described with reference to FIG. 109, the effect control device 300 includes the hold display 605 (including the hold display 605 a and the hold digest display 606). The degree of expectation is set such that red> green> blue> white in the display mode. Even when the display mode of the effect lamp 540 is red and the display mode of the hold display 605 is red, the effect control device 300 can differentiate the degree of expectation according to the display mode of the corresponding display. For example, when there is a route r1 in which the display mode of the correspondence display is red, a route r2 in green, a route r3 in blue, and a route r4 in white, the effect control device 300 is r4> r3> r2. Set the degree of expectation for each route to be> r1.

  In addition, it can be made the same, when the display modes of the production lamp 540 used as the starting point of a path | route differ like the example of a relationship shown to FIG. 125 (3). For example, the effect control device 300 has a path r11 in which the display mode of the effect lamp 540 and the display mode of the correspondence display are red, a path r12 in green, a path r13 in blue, and a path r14 in white. At this time, the degree of expectation for each route is set such that r14> r13> r12> r11.

  In addition to the display on the display device 41 or the display on the display device 41, the suspension display 605 and the storage termination display 606 shown in FIG. 102 and the like, and the suspension display 605a and the storage termination display 606 shown in FIG. Instead of the display device 41, it may be displayed on a display device different from the display device 41. For example, the gaming machine 10 may be provided with a dedicated display device for dedicated display of the hold display 605, 605a and the hold digest display 606. More specifically, the gaming machine 10 is provided with a full color LED for each of the hold display 605, 605a and the hold digestion display 606 as a dedicated display device, and causes the full color LED to emit light in the light emission color corresponding to the display mode shown in FIG. . In addition, the gaming machine 10 can realize the distinction of the light emission mode corresponding to the display mode shown in FIG. 109 by the lighting color of the full color LED, the blinking cycle, the brightness, or a combination thereof. For example, the gaming machine 10 lights the full color LED with the corresponding luminescent color for display modes such as "white", "blue", "green", "red", "cherry blossom", etc., and the display mode for "rainbow" In the seven-color sequential switching lighting, yellow can be blinked for the "trad" display mode, and can be realized by sequential switching of the lightness in red for the "superheat" display mode. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may include a single color LED instead of the full color LED, and causes the single color LED to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the display mode shown in FIG. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can realize the distinction of the light emission mode corresponding to the display mode shown in FIG. 109 by the blinking cycle of the single color LED, the brightness, or a combination thereof. For example, the gaming machine 10 can indicate the degree of expectation corresponding to the display mode by delaying the flashing cycle as the degree of expectation is lower and setting the flashing cycle earlier as the degree of expectation is higher. In addition to the display device 41, the gaming machine 10 may be provided with a second liquid crystal display device as a sub liquid crystal display device, and the hold display 605, 605a and the hold digest display 606 in the same display mode as the display device 41. It may be displayed on the second liquid crystal display device.

  The effect lamp 540 and the board effect devices 550 and 551 may be configured as the same unit, or may be configured separately. The effect lamp 540 and the board effect devices 550 and 551 may be one effect device having both functions.

  In the game machine 10, in addition to the game control apparatus 100 monitoring a required error, the effect control apparatus 300 monitors an operation error of the board effect apparatus 550, 551. The operation error of the panel effect device 550, 551 is a state where the panel effect device 550, 551 is not returned to the initial position in the initial state, or a state where the position movement of the panel effect device 550, 551 can not be confirmed in the operating state, etc. It is an error to notify as The operation error of the panel effect device 550, 551 may be notified by display by the display device 41 etc., or may be notified by sound (including voice) by the speakers 19a, 19b etc. The notification by the light emission mode may be performed by the light emission unit of 550, 551. The operation error of the panel effect devices 550 and 551 may be notification end by removing the error cause, or may be notification end when the predetermined condition is satisfied regardless of the removal of the error cause. For example, the effect control device 300 may end the notification by detecting the pressing operation of the push button 25, the elapse of a predetermined time from the occurrence of an error, or turning on again after the power is turned off, or a combination of these (for example, power on again The error notification may be given later and the notification may be ended by the end of the error notification etc. after 30 seconds. Further, the effect control device 300 may cancel the power saving and perform an error notification when detecting an operation error of the board effect devices 550, 551 during power saving (while waiting for customers), and the result of the game may be immediately obtained. The error notification may be performed after waiting for the establishment of the power saving cancellation condition (for example, the start of the game). In addition, when the operation control device 300 detects an operation error of the panel effect devices 550, 551 when the power is turned on, the error notification is performed after the initialization process is finished (for example, in the normal processing state). It is also good. At this time, the effect control device 300 may make the notification modes different depending on whether or not it is a predetermined gaming state. For example, the effect control device 300 reports an operation error by sound and a lamp / LED when the gaming state is in the movement of the special view game, and generates an operation error as the sound when the gaming state is not in the movement of the special view game. In addition to lamps and LEDs, notification may be made by display. Further, the effect control device 300 may notify an operation error of the board effect devices 550, 551 without waiting for a command reception from the game control device 100 after the power is turned on, or may receive a predetermined command from the game control device 100. The operation error of the panel presentation device 550, 551 may be notified. The predetermined command referred to here may be, for example, an initialization command (power on command, power failure recovery command, model designation command, etc.) capable of confirming the start of the game control apparatus 100, or a game in which the player can confirm the game start It may be a progress system command (for example, a hold number command, a symbol variation command, a symbol stop command, etc.).

The gaming machine 10 of the sixth embodiment (including the modification) described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 stores start memory as an execution right of the first game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game, special figure 2 fluctuation display game: large symbol group 601, small symbol group 602), and the start memory is stored. It is possible to change the display mode (for example, FIG. 109) of the on-hold display (for example, on-hold display 605 and on-hold digest display 606) according to the starting memory in relation to the corresponding first game result to execute on-hold notice effect The first display unit (for example, the display area of the large symbol group 601 and the small symbol group 602 in the display device 41) and the second display unit (for example, the display of the hold display 605 or the hold digest display 606 on the display device 41) Area, the third display unit (for example, the display area of the effect game in the sub display device 530), the fourth display unit (for example, the effect lamp 540), and the movable portion (for example, the board effect device 550). Including the 551), the operation unit (e.g., a push button 25), and a control unit (game control device 100, the effect control device 300), the. The first display unit can display the first game. The second display unit can display a hold display. The third display unit can display a second game (rendering game) executed in parallel with the first game. The fourth display unit can display a predetermined display. The movable portion is operable in a predetermined operation mode. The operation unit can accept an operation. The control unit displays a guidance display (for example, the operation guidance display 561) for guiding the operation of the operation unit when the third display unit displays a specific result mode (for example, FIG. 103 (4)) in the second game. (1) When the display unit is displayed and the operation unit receives an operation, the movable unit is changed from the first state (for example, FIG. 80 (1)) to the second state (for example, FIG. 80 (2)) Correspondence notification display (for example, correspondence display) for notifying the correspondence between the display mode of the predetermined display in the fourth display unit and the display mode of the hold display in the second display unit (FIG. 106) It is possible to execute on-hold notice effect of displaying 562) on the first display unit and changing the display mode of the on-hold display on the second display unit (FIG. 107 (1)).

  (2) The control unit of (1) is a combination of the display mode of the predetermined display on the fourth display unit and the operation mode of the movable portion and the display mode of the suspension display in the suspension announcement effect, The degree of expectation regarding the result of the first game is notified (FIG. 112).

  (3) The gaming machine 10 stores the start memory as the right to execute the game (special figure 1 change display game, special figure 2 change display game: large symbol group 601, small symbol group 602), and corresponds to the start memory It is possible to change the display mode (for example, FIG. 109) of the on-hold display (for example, on-hold display 605 and on-hold digest display 606) according to the start memory in relation to the game result to execute on-hold notice effect. 1 display unit (for example, display area of large symbol group 601 and small symbol group 602 in display device 41), second display unit (for example, effect lamp 540), control unit (game control apparatus 100, effect control apparatus 300) And). The first display unit can display the game and the hold display. The second display unit can display a predetermined display. The control unit causes the second display unit to stand by for a predetermined display over a plurality of games, and notifies the correspondence between the predetermined display on the second display unit and the display mode of the hold display on the first display unit. The relationship notification display is displayed on the first display unit at the timing of changing the display mode of the hold display (see FIG. 118, FIG. 121, FIG. 122 and others).

  (4) The gaming machine 10 starts and stores the start memory as the right to execute the game (special figure 1 variable display game, special figure 2 variable display game: large symbol group 601, small symbol group 602) based on the predetermined condition being established. A game for storing and variably displaying a plurality of identification information corresponding to the start memory is executed, and a hold display according to the start memory in relation to the result of the game (for example, hold display 605 or hold digest display 606) The display mode (for example, FIG. 109) can be changed to execute the suspension announcement effect, and the first display unit (for example, the display area of the large symbol group 601 and the small symbol group 602 in the display device 41) 2 display unit (for example, a display area of the hold display 605 or the hold finish display 606 in the display device 41), a third display unit (for example, the effect lamp 540), and a control unit (game control apparatus 100, effect control Includes a location 300), the. The first display unit can display a game. The second display unit can display a hold display. The third display unit can display a predetermined display. The control unit changes the display of the correspondence notification informing the correspondence between the display mode of the predetermined display in the third display unit and the display mode of the hold display in the second display unit at the timing of changing the display mode of the hold display. It is displayed on the first display unit so as to straddle the identification information in (see FIG. 118, FIG. 120 and others).

  (5) The gaming machine 10 stores start memory as an execution right of the game (special figure 1 change display game, special view 2 change display game: large symbol group 601, small symbol group 602), and corresponds to the start memory It is possible to change the display mode (for example, FIG. 109) of the on-hold display (for example, on-hold display 605 and on-hold digest display 606) according to the start memory in relation to the game result to execute on-hold notice effect. 1 display unit (for example, a display area of large symbol group 601 and small symbol group 602 in display device 41, a display region of pending display 605 and pending digest display 606 in display device 41) and a second display unit (for example, effect lamp 540) and a control unit (game control apparatus 100, effect control apparatus 300). The first display unit can display the game and the hold display. The second display unit can display a predetermined display. The control unit displays, on the first display unit, a correspondence notification display for notifying correspondence between the display mode of the predetermined display in the second display unit and the display mode of the hold display in the first display unit, and the correspondence notification display It is possible to execute an on-hold notice effect that acts on the display mode of the on-hold display via the specific display (for example, the character 564) that can be displayed on the first display unit (see FIG. 118, FIG. 121, FIG.

  (6) The gaming machine 10 stores start memory as an execution right of the game (special figure 1 change display game, special view 2 change display game: large symbol group 601, small symbol group 602), and corresponds to the start memory It is possible to change the display mode (for example, FIG. 109) of the on-hold display (for example, on-hold display 605 and on-hold digest display 606) according to the start memory in relation to the game result to execute on-hold notice effect. 1 display unit (for example, a display area of large symbol group 601 and small symbol group 602 in display device 41), a second display unit (display region of hold display 605 in display device 41 and hold digest display 606), and control unit And (game control apparatus 100, effect control apparatus 300). The first display unit can display a game. The second display unit can display a hold display. The control unit can display, on the first display unit, a plurality of types of operation displays (for example, the correspondence display 563) capable of executing the suspension notice effect acting on the suspension display in the first display unit, and the plurality of types of operation displays The operation display of one of them is displayed, and the display mode of the hold display is changed to the display mode corresponding to the operation display of one (see FIG. 120 and others).

  The above processing functions can be realized by a computer. In that case, a program is provided which describes the processing content of the function that the gaming machine of the embodiment should have. The above processing functions are realized on the computer by executing the program on the computer. The program in which the processing content is described can be recorded on a computer readable recording medium. Examples of the computer-readable recording medium include a magnetic storage device, an optical disc, a magneto-optical recording medium, a semiconductor memory, and the like. The magnetic storage device includes a hard disk drive (HDD), a flexible disk (FD), a magnetic tape and the like. The optical disks include a DVD (Digital Versatile Disk), a DVD-RAM, a CD (Compact Disk) -ROM / RW (ReWritable), and the like. Magneto-optical recording media include MO (Magneto-Optical disk) and the like.

  When the program is distributed, for example, a portable recording medium such as a DVD or a CD-ROM in which the program is recorded is sold. Alternatively, the program may be stored in the storage device of the server computer, and the program may be transferred from the server computer to another computer via a network.

  The computer that executes the program stores, for example, the program recorded on the portable recording medium or the program transferred from the server computer in its own storage device. Then, the computer reads the program from its storage device and executes processing according to the program. The computer can also read the program directly from the portable recording medium and execute processing according to the program. Also, each time a program is transferred from a server computer connected via a network, the computer can sequentially execute processing in accordance with the received program.

  In addition, at least a part of the above processing functions can be realized by an electronic circuit such as a digital signal processor (DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or a programmable logic device (PLD).

  In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine shown in the disclosed embodiment as a gaming machine, and, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, ball ball gaming machines, etc. The present invention is applicable to all gaming machines that use the game ball of the present invention and to slot machines that are gaming machines that use medals.

  In addition, the disclosed embodiments are to be considered in all respects as illustrative and not restrictive. Moreover, you may apply combining each structure of the above-mentioned embodiment and modification. The scope of the present invention is indicated not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include all the modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims.

10 game machine 41 display device 100 game control device 300 effect control device

Claims (2)

The start memory is stored as the right to execute the first game, and the display mode of the hold display according to the start memory can be changed in relation to the result of the first game corresponding to the start memory to execute hold notification effect A gaming machine,
A first display unit capable of displaying the first game;
A second display unit capable of displaying the pending display;
A third display unit capable of displaying a second game executed in parallel with the first game;
A fourth display unit capable of displaying a predetermined display;
A movable portion operable in a predetermined operation mode;
An operation unit capable of accepting an operation;
When the third display unit displays a specific result mode in the second game, a guidance display for guiding the operation of the operation unit is displayed on the first display unit, and the operation is accepted in the operation unit. The movable part is changed from the first state to the second state and the predetermined display is displayed on the fourth display unit, and the display mode of the predetermined display on the fourth display unit and the hold display on the second display unit And a control unit capable of executing the on-hold notice effect for displaying on the first display unit a correspondence notification display for notifying a correspondence relationship with the display mode of the second display unit and changing the display mode of the on-hold display on the second display unit ,
Including gaming machines. The control unit
The result of the first game according to a combination of the display mode of the predetermined display in the fourth display unit and the operation mode of the movable portion and the display mode of the suspension display in the suspension announcement effect. Informing the degree of expectation about
The gaming machine according to claim 1.

Images